1 month trip

• North Dakota
• Czech Republic
• Switzerland
• Vegan City Guides
• Vegan Travel & Tips
• Vegan Fashion
• Sustainability
• Blogging Tips
• Photo Diaries
• Unfortunate (but hilarious)
• Recommendations
• Get in Touch
• Work With Me
• Best Travel Insurance
• Freelance Gig

• North America , Road Trip , Things To Do

Looking for an incredible adventure? Consider going on an 1-month West Coast road trip. You’ll love the stunning scenery, breathtaking views, magical landscapes, bustling wildlife, and — of course — incredible memories! And to help you out, I’ve put together this ultimate 1-month USA West Coast road trip itinerary that’ll blow your mind!

Psst. This post contains affiliate links. Read our disclosure .

There’s nothing better than the big open road, a car with a full tank of gas, good company, and the opportunity for endless adventures.

That’s exactly what Dan and I experienced when we embarked on our incredible 1-month USA road trip across the West Coast earlier this year. In just 30 days, we visited 14 different states, nearly hit 8,000 miles in our little van, and made incredible memories. It’s something I’ll never forget.

Within these 14 days, we experienced a good number of things — both good and bad…

✓ Camped out in numerous Wal-Mart parking lots, only to be woken up by late-night truckers and visitors.

✓ Ate one of the best vegan donuts  ever , as well as my first vegan sausage McMuffin.

✓ Viewed the Mexico/US border from our car while driving to New Mexico from Dallas.

✓ Hiked in the Superstition Mountains near Phoenix .

✓ Drove through the darkness to find a good FREE camping spot and star gazed in the middle of nowhere near Sedona, AZ .

✓ Explored the nooks and crannies of Zion National Park.

✓ Experienced strange things on the Las Vegas strip (completely sober BTW).

✓ Got locked out of our van in Yosemite National Park (yep — we were  those people!).

✓ Unlocked the van with a piece of string, a stick, and sheer willpower.

✓ Walked with the giants (Giant Sequoia’s that is) in Sequoia National Park.

✓ Camped on a desolate beach on the California Coast (only to be  almost caught by the DNR when we woke up!).

✓ Saw endless ocean views along the stunning Oregon Coast .

✓ Drove through blizzard-like weather in Montana .

✓ Made a few Buffalo friends while in Theodore Roosevelt National Park in North Dakota.

✓ Safely made it back home to good ol’ Minnesota .

No doubt, it was an incredible adventure! In the end, this unbelievable west coast trip just made me realize  how much the United States really has to offer in terms of amazing natural beauty and fantastic places to explore.

So, with that in mind, are you ready to explore the United States with this awesome 1-month West Coast drive that’ll completely blow your mind? I thought so.

Side Note: This itinerary can also be used as just a general outline and inspiration! Bend it to your will and use it for West Coast road trip ideas; tailor it to find the perfect adventure for you!

Psst, ever thought about renting an RV for your US road trip adventure? Click HERE to read my post on 5 reasons why you need to rent one. (Hint: these reasons are pretty awesome!)

Table of Contents

THE ULTIMATE 1-MONTH USA WEST COAST ROAD TRIP ITINERARY

Since Dan and I nearly drove straight from Minnesota to Dallas, TX in the span of a day and a half, I definitely don’t expect you to start there.

So, because Arizona is damn near my favorite state ever, this mind-blowing west coast USA road trip starts in Phoenix and takes you through incredible national parks, breathtaking landscapes, and along spectacular coastal roads.

You’ll end in Seattle, Washington, where you can easily hop on another flight to get back to where you need to be!

QUICK SUMMARY: 

• Day 1-3 : Phoenix, Arizona
• Day 4-5 : Sedona, Arizona
• Day 6-7 : Grand Canyon National Park
• Day 8-10 : Las Vegas, Nevada
• Day 11-13 : Death Valley National Park
• Day 14-16 : Sedona National Park
• Day 17-20 : Yosemite National Park
• Day 21-22 : Sacramento, California
• Day 23-27 : California/Oregon Coast
• Day 28-29 : Portland, Oregon
• Day 30-31 : Seattle, Washington

Additionally, keep in mind that this is just a general itinerary! You can pick and choose how you’d like to go about it. Like one destination more than you thought? Stay a bit longer! Not feeling the vibe of another destination? Peace out!

**One great thing about using Booking.com (which the accommodations are linked to) is that you can usually cancel last minute without being charged — which means you can be more flexible with your road trip!

Psst, before you pack up and head out, don’t forget to take a peek at my handy dandy list of 55+ essentials to pack for a long-term road trip !

Day 1: Phoenix, Arizona

Depending on how you arrive in Phoenix, whether it be by car or plane, the first day on your epic road trip adventure will no doubt be filled with fatigue and jet lag. Although, if you have the energy, it’s a great place to get out and explore.

If not, take that nap! You deserve it. We all deserve the naps.

If you’re looking for a great restaurant to eat in the day, depending on what time you arrive, check out my list on 10 fantastic vegan restaurants in Phoenix !

Day 2-3: Phoenix, Arizona

Once you’ve rested and you’re reading to go, head out into the bustling city, as well as the city surroundings. Phoenix is a fantastic base for those who love to hike and those who love to shop. Whatever you’re choice, there’s options for everyone!

I recommend researching some awesome hikes in the nearby mountains; Superstition Mountains, Camelback Mountain, and the Phoenix Mountains. You can find some really great hiking trail suggestions here !

Additionally, if you’re not into hiking, the city of Phoenix offers a plethora of things to do.

Things to do in Phoenix:

• Head into Scottsdale Old Town and explore the Wild West-looking buildings.
• Check out the incredible Desert Botanical Garden and view adorable succulents, beautiful flowers, towering cacti, and gorgeous greenery!
• Ready to view beautiful Phoenix from above? Go on a Sunrise Phoenix Hot Air Balloon Ride !
• Depending on how hot it is, have a picnic in one of the many city parks.
• Visit the Heard Museum, which is devoted to Native American civilizations.
• Check out the Phoenix Mountains Preserve.
• Admire the Pueblo Grande Ruin.
• Spend time outside at the Tempe Beach Park.
• Explore the the Japanese Friendship Garden of Phoenix, Ro Ho En.
• Ultimately, get outside because the weather is usually spot-on and there are  so many things to do in parks, greenery, and mountains of Phoenix, AZ!

P.S. Check out these day tours and excursions from Phoenix  if you aren’t into planning activities yourself!

Where to stay in Phoenix:

As in many cities, there are various neighborhoods which are better than others! A few of my favorite suburbs of Phoenix are Scottsdale, Chandler, and Mesa.

• The Gainey Suites Hotel is a highly-rated hotel located in Scottsdale — and it’s surprisingly affordable!
• The Comfort Suites Old Town is a more affordable option in Scottsdale that’s in an awesome location — right in Old Town!
• In Chandler, the Cambria Hotel Phoenix Chandler – Fashion Center is an affordable, highly-rated option and is a guest favorite.
• Mesa, Arizona is a nice suburb of Phoenix closest to some of the best hiking in the Superstition Mountains. You can find a list of great hotels here !

Day 4-5: Sedona, Arizona

Out of all the destinations, I think Sedona, Arizona might be Dan and I’s favorite place.

The gorgeous red rock, non-existent light pollution, beautiful landscapes, and unbelievable star gazing won over our hearts. We spent one awesome night camping just outside Sedona’s city limits before heading up to the Grand Canyon and it was totally worth it!

Seriously, I can’t even tell you how many shooting stars we spotted. We spent  hours outside looking at the crystal clear skies and crazy cool stars. It was an awesome night!

Plus, if you get to Sedona early, you can go on a tour through the awesome Red Rock State Park . Sedona is also a pretty cool town to check out, with its cute cafes, gift shops, and nice locals.

Things to do in Sedona, Arizona:

• Hike one of the many different trails (like the Broken Arrow Trail — highly rated!).
• Check out Oak Creek Canyon.
• Visit Cathedral Rock.
• Explore the Red Rock Scenic Byway.
• Make your heart skip a beat by hiking the Devil’s Bridge Trail.
• Check out one (or a few) of the many gift and specialty shops — the crystal shops are amazing here!
• Visit the Palatki Ruins ( super   cool! ).
• Take a look at the Chapel of the Holy Cross.
• View Sedona from above and watch the sunset from the Airport Mesa.
• Marvel at the Palatki Ruins (Palatki Heritage Site), just outside of Sedona in the Coconino National Forest.

And if you want to stay in Sedona for a bit longer and make it your base, check out these awesome day tours and excursions which go from the city.

Psst, if you want a more detailed itinerary, click here to read a full guide on how to spend one day in Sedona !

Where to Stay in Sedona:

• The A Sunset Chateau is a great place for a relaxing and above-average stay.
• The Bell Rock Inn By Diamond Resorts is highly-rated mid-range accommodation.
• And the Sedona Village Lodge is for those on a budget but who still want to stay at a nicely-rated place!

Psst, want to camp out under the stars? Check out this post on how to find free RV camping around the US !

Also, if you want to spend more time in Arizona, don’t forget to check out my post on the ultimate 7-day Arizona road trip itinerary that explores Phoenix, the Grand Canyon, and Sedona !

Day 6-7: Grand Canyon National Park

No matter which route you take while traveling the west coast of America, you cannot — I repeat, you cannot! — miss out on the Grand Canyon!

Full of wonder and beauty, Grand Canyon National Park is a spectacular site in Northern Arizona which attracts hundreds and thousands of visitors each year. And when you first see it with your own eyes, it’s no wonder why.

Seriously, you may think you understand the enormity of it when you view the Grand Canyon in pictures, but they don’t do it justice! Its vast valley, mile deep ridges, and huge walls filled with the colors of red, orange, purple, and yellow is unbelievable.

Things to do in the Grand Canyon:

• 45 minutes helicopter ride over the Grand Canyon from Tuyasan, AZ (the town right next to the Grand Canyon National Park).
• Drive to one of the many viewpoints throughout the park.
• Go on a Grand Canyon East Rim jeep tour .
• Check out the Grand Canyon Village (surprisingly, a LOT of vegan options in the grocery store!).
• Grand Canyon Hermit Road Bicycle Tour .

Have you ever heard of Minnesota? Here are 15 reasons why summers are better in MN !

Where to stay near or within Grand Canyon National Park:

Dan and I camped in one of the many National Park’s campgrounds — which I highly recommend! — but if you aren’t planning to camp, many accommodations are available.

• For those on a budget: Grand Canyon Plaza Hotel
• Mid-range hotel, yet high ratings: The Grand Hotel at the Grand Canyon
• Great location, good ratings: Best Western Premier Grand Canyon Squire Inn

Day 8-10: Las Vegas, Nevada

The drive from the Grand Canyon National Park South Rim entrance to Las Vegas, Nevada takes about 4-5 hours, depending on how many stops you make to take photos of the surroundings!

When you get to Las Vegas and check-in to your accommodations, get your butt out onto the strip and people watch!

Depending on how much time you have, you can spend 2-3 nights in Las Vegas. Dan and I didn’t drink while exploring Las Vegas but we had such a fun time just walking the strip, seeing what different places had to offer, and watching all the craziness!

Things to do in Las Vegas:

• Walk the strip and people watch.
• Admire the water fountain show at the Bellagio .
• View Las Vegas from above at the Stratosphere.
• Win (or lose) some money at the slot machines.
• Go on a night flight to view Las Vegas from above and have an incredible dinner for two.
• See one of the many, many entertaining shows.
• Go crazy at the Adventuredome Theme Park.
• Check out the Mob Museum.
• Go on a Las Vegas brewery tour !
• See some (fake) celebrities at Madame Tussauds !

Where to stay in Las Vegas:

As you can imagine, there are numerous places to stay in Las Vegas! You can spend your top dollar at one of the many high-class hotels right on the strip or go for a budget accommodation somewhere on the outskirts.

Here are my recommendations:

• If you want to go upscale and splurge, the Bellagio is the place to do it. With its beautiful interior, amazing fountain show, and excellent reviews, there’s no other hotel like it in LV.
• A more affordable, yet just as great option is The Carriage House .
• Into more of a condo style hotel? Try the Jet Luxury at The Vdara .
• At just $60 per night,  The LINQ Hotel and Casino  is a super affordable option with pretty good reviews.

Day 11-13: Death Valley National Park, California

Okay, okay, this might have been my most favorite part on Dan and I’s west coast road trip!

Death Valley National Park looks and feels like another freakin’ planet and it’s the coolest thing ever. As the biggest national park in the continental US, Death Valley has a lot to offer.

No doubt, the best to see it all (or at least see part of it), is to rent a car and simply drive around. You’ll be blown away by the red rock, vast views, endless landscapes, and Mars-looking mountains.

Although, if you want to do a tour around Death Valley, there are a few that go from Las Vegas!

Things to do in Death Valley National Park:

• Visit Zabriskie Point.
• Check out the Artists Palette.
• Lookout at the landscape at Dante’s View.
• Visit the wondrous Mesquite Flat Sand Dunes.
• Explore the Mosaic Canyon.
• If you prefer to do tours, this Death Valley Day Trip tour goes from Las Vegas and is a full-day adventure filled with excitement.

Looking to be a more sustainable traveler? Check out these  20 helpful tips to get started .

Where to stay in Death Valley National Park:

Unfortunately, there’s not many place to stay  within Death Valley National Park, but there’s a few nice places on the outskirts.

If possible, I highly recommend camping in the National Park. You can find a few great free campsites from this website .

• A nice hotel in the middle of Death Valley and Sequoia National Park: Panamint Springs Hotel .
• The  Amargosa Opera House & Hotel is located in Death Valley Junction, near the California/Nevada border.
• The Longstreet Inn & Casino is the nicest out of the three, but it’s actually in Nevada, near the border. If you decide to leave Las Vegas early, this is a nice spot in between LV and Death Valley National Park.

Day 14-16: Sequoia National Park, California

Ready to see some giants? Giant trees, that is.

Sequoia National Park is one of the most popular national parks in California and after visiting, it’s easy to see why.

The Giant Sequoia and Redwoods, gorgeous views, breathtaking mountains, and incredible hikes are all worthy of the hype!

Things to do in Sequoia National Park:

• Visit the General Sherman Tree.
• Explore Grant Grove.
• Stroll the General Grant Tree Trail.
• Drive the Crescent Meadow Loop.
• Simply drive through this spectacular national park and take in the beautiful scenery!

Where to stay in Sequoia National Park:

Similar to other national parks on the list, there’s no real places to stay within Sequoia National Park unless you decide to camp.

The best places to find accommodations near Sequoia NP is in Three Rivers, Badger, or Pinehurst.

• Stony Creek Lodge is the only accommodation actually within Sequoia National Park. It has a fantastic location (obvi) and good reviews.
• The Rio Sierra Riverhouse has raving reviews and is a mid-range hotel.
• The Sierra Lodge Three Rivers is a budget accommodations with good reviews.
• In Badger, The Hummingbird House has incredible reviews and is a mid-range hotel with lots to offer.

Tip: If you’re visiting Sequoia National Park in the summer or in its busy season, make sure to book well in advance. Accommodations book up quickly and you don’t want to miss out on this place!

Day 17-20: Yosemite National Park, California

Even if you’re not from the United States, you might have heard of a magical not-so-little national park in America: Yosemite National Park .

One of my favorite stops on this West Coast America trip, Yosemite boasts breathtaking views, incredible mountains, lush forests, awesome hiking, magical wildlife, and overall an unbelievable atmosphere.

Things to do in Yosemite National Park:

• Go hiking! One of the best things to do here, no doubt. You’ll find hundreds of trails; some are hard, some are easy but you’ll easily find one you’ll love!
• Visit one of the many waterfalls. Some of the best include Bridalveil Falls, Vernal Fall, Yosemite Falls, and Chilnualna Falls.
• Just sit back and enjoy the views! Yosemite National Park is incredible so don’t miss out on just taking everything in.
• Go on a hiking adventure with a knowledgable guide! Cross the Half Dome, El Capitan, and Glacier Point off your bucket list with this Yosemite Hiking Excursion .

Vegan travel isn’t hard! Especially with these  10+ life-changing vegan travel tips .

Where to stay in Yosemite National Park:

Yosemite National Park is one of the best national parks where you can actually stay  within the national park itself.

While camping here is also great, the accommodations are in abundance — and all are relatively wonderful.

• The Rush Creek Lodge at Yosemite has excellent reviews and is in the heart of the national park.
• Yosemite View Lodge is one of the nearest accommodations near Yosemite Village and has some raving reviews. It’s also relatively affordable!
• Located on the outskirts of Yosemite National Park, the Yosemite Bug Rustic Mountain Resort is the budget accommodation on this list. At under $100 a night, it’s definitely affordable. Although, it’s not located in Yosemite itself.

Day 21-22: Sacramento, California

Even though Sacramento is the state capital of California, it’s not very big! And totally doable in one day.

Additionally, this city is totally optional. Dan and I didn’t spend much time here, only going to the California Automobile Museum because Dan is totes into cool cars.

So, if you need a little stop between Yosemite National Park and driving to the coast (because yes, the coast is next up on the list), Sacramento is a great place to have it.

No doubt, this west coast road trip itinerary is packed full of things to do and awesome adventures, so if you need a little chill day, have it here.

Things to do in Sacramento, California:

• Like old and new cars? Check out the California Automobile Museum . (Dan LOVED this place!)
• Visit the California State Railroad Museum.
• Take a stroll through Old Sacramento.
• Marvel at the Cathedral of the Blessed Sacrament.
• Admire the California State Capitol Museum.
• Walk through one of the many city parks (William Land Park is particularly nice).
• Wander about the Leland Stanford Mansion State Historic Park.

Where to stay in Sacramento, California:

• Love staying in hostels? You’ll like the HI Sacramento Hostel ! Affordable AND awesome reviews.
• The Inn at Parkside is in an excellent location and has wonderful reviews at a great price.
• One of the higher-range hotels on the list, the Embassy Suites by Hilton Sacramento Riverfront Promenade is beautiful, has fantastic reviews, and is in the perfect location.

Day 23-27: California/Oregon Coast

One of my favorite destinations/regions on this USA road trip itinerary.

The California and Oregon Coast is filled with endless ocean views, heart-stopping cliffs, beautiful wildlife, captivating scenery, and incredible adventures!

(Check out this photo diary of the Oregon Coast if you don’t believe me!)

Even though Dan and I had to rush through the California and Oregon Coast, as we were running out of time, this particular road trip itinerary for the American West Coast focuses on spending 4 days meandering through the region.

Because, as one of the most beautiful parts of this itinerary, you need to spend time relaxing and admiring, rather than rushing!

Sample Itinerary for the California and Oregon Coast:

• Pull up Google Maps and find a route from Sacramento to Fort Bragg. (This will take about 4 hours, depending on how much you stop.)
• Fort Bragg has a beautiful glass sand that’s wonderful to explore. If you’d like, you can stay in Fort Bragg. There’s a good amount of affordable, nice hotels .
• P.S. Make sure to venture off the 101 and go onto the Avenue of the Giants. A gorgeous drive through the massive redwoods! Stop off at one of the pull-offs and just walk around to feel the magic of this state park for yourself.
• (This will take about 2 hours to arrive at the Avenue of the Giants from Fort Bragg.)
•  Throughout this drive, there will be a number of pull-offs to stop at. The beaches are beautiful to walk amongst and the cliffside viewing areas are especially breathtaking.
• Lastly, you’ll want to make your way towards Lincoln City, OR, to stay on the 101. After Lincoln City, you’ll make your way inland towards Portland.

Psst, ever thought about visiting Glacier National Park? Check out this post 32 photos of Glacier National Park that’ll blow your mind!

Where to stay along the California and Oregon Coast:

• In Fort Bragg, the Ocean View Lodge has awesome reviews and is in a great location.
• Crescent City is another nice stop along the California Coast. There are a number of fantastic hotels to suit your preference . The Lighthouse Inn has good reviews and breakfast is included!
• Go a little further than Crescent Bay and you’ll come to Newport, OR. A nice little coastal town with lots of hotels.  The Landing at Newport Condominium Hotel is in an incredible location and is a guest favorite!

Day 28-29: Portland, Oregon

Another one of my favorite cities in the United States, Portland is full of fantastic things to do and is a must-see stop on this US west coast itinerary.

And even better?

It’s  chock full of incredible vegan eateries, restaurants, cafes, and shops. As a vegan food fanatic, I love it! In fact, this city kind of reminds of Berlin, Germany; it’s hip, trendy, totally vegan-friendly, and packed with cool things to do.

Things to do in Portland, Oregon:

• Wander through the most magical book store — Powell’s City of Books! One of my favorite things to do in Portland.
• Visit the Lan Su Chinese Garden.
• Walk through the Portland Saturday Market, the nation’s largest weekly open-air arts and crafts market.
• Take a stroll through the Pittock Mansion, a century-old symbol of Portland’s dramatic transformation from a small lumber town to a bustling city.
• Visit the Oregon Museum of Science and Industry, one of the nation’s leading science museums.
• Grab a vegan donut at Voodoo Donuts (you won’t be disappointed!).
• Explore the International Rose Test Garden and take in all the gorgeous sights and smells of the place.
• Do a day trip to the Columbia River Gorge Waterfalls and MT Hood .
• Avid wine drinker? Check out this  Willamette Valley Wine-Tasting Tour !

I recommend checking out this 2-day Portland itinerary for a more detailed guide on how to spend your time in this vibrant, hip city!

Where to stay in Portland, Oregon:

• Want to stay right in the heart of downtown Portland? The Hyatt House Portland/Downtown is perfect!
• At $85 a night, the HI – Portland Northwest Hostel is an affordable option with great reviews!
• The Oxford Suites Portland – Jantzen Beach is a mid-range option in a great location with awesome reviews.

Are you a Harry Potter fan like me? Take a look at this post on the  best Harry Potter sites and attractions in Edinburgh, Scotland (the birthplace of HP!).

Day 30-31: Seattle, Washington

One of the more iconic destinations on this west coast itinerary, Seattle, Washington, is a cool city just begging to be explored.

With its gum wall, Pike Place Market, Space Needle, and Museum of Pop Culture, it’s an incredible place to have an adventure.

Alas, I cannot tell lies… Dan and I didn’t actually visit Seattle . We bi-passed it completely to drive from Portland, OR, to Spokane, WA, to visit my sister. Although, it’s not logical to have you end in Spokane, am I right?

Thus, Seattle makes more sense, as it has a bigger airport if you’re planning to fly out.

Additionally, it has much, much more to do than Spokane. Overall, it just works out better as an ending point! Anyhow, without further rambling…

Things to do in Seattle, Washington:

• Take a ride up the Space Needle to see Seattle from above.
• Wander through the Pike Place Market.
• Stroll along the Seattle Waterfront and relax on some of the nice beaches (yes, they do exist in Seattle!).
• Explore Downtown Seattle and check out the restaurants, shops, eateries, theaters, and more.
• Take a photo in front of the infamous Seattle Gum Wall (just down the road from the Pike Place Market!).
• Venture down under and go on an Underground Tour !
• Relax in one of Seattle’s many parks.
• Get out on the water and admire Seattle from the sea on a boat tour .
• Head out to the field and go to a baseball game.
• Take a walk along one of the many trails surrounding the city.

Where to stay in Seattle:

• Looking to splurge on your last city? Check out the Paramount Hotel . Located in the heart of Downtown Seattle, it has raving reviews and excellent customer service.
• A more budget-friendly option is the Motif Seattle . At $197, it’s definitely one of the cheaper options throughout the city and has awesome reviews, as well as a great location.
• One of the most affordable accommodations throughout Seattle is the HI – Seattle at the American Hotel Hostel ; great reviews, $99 per night, and in Downtown Seattle.

What’s the Budget for a One-Month USA West Coast Road Trip?

I’ve gotten a lot of questions about how to properly budget for this 1 month USA road trip. While everyone’s budget is going to be slightly different, as people generally like to spend their time differently, here’s a rough idea of what you can expect to spend.

• Accommodation : $50-200 per night
• Food & Drinks : $20-70 per day
• Fuel : $250-300 total (roughly $.11 per mile)
• Attractions : $0-100 per day
• Insurance : $100-200 total (I highly recommend World Nomads travel insurance )
• Car Maintenance : $50-150 total
• Miscellaneous : $100-200

Since everyone likes to stay in different accommodations, eats different food, likes to go to different attractions, and do other miscellaneous activities, this budget is going to vary drastically.

To save on accommodation and eating at restaurants everyday, I couldn’t recommend renting an RV more. Use RVShare to explore your options!

Dan and I spent almost every night in our van, so we saved a ton on accommodation. Additionally, while we didn’t have a kitchen, we did use a Coleman camping stove to cook the majority of our meals, saving us loads of money.

Can I just say one word… wowza .

What a monster of a blog post, amirite?!

Although, no doubt, this American West Coast road trip itinerary is packed with helpful information, an easy to follow route, and — of course — awesome experiences!

If you want to discover what the best of the USA west coast has to offer, this itinerary delivers.

Have you visited the United States West Coast? Or have traveled around it? Additionally, let me know what you think of this itinerary in the comments! 

Not sure what to check out next? Readers love these posts:

• 10 best places to visit in Wales, UK (#7 is a must!)
• Your guide to hiking Devil’s Bridge from Mescal Trailhead — Sedona, Arizona
• Road trip packing list – 55+ essentials you can’t forget (2020 edition)
• Best places for vegan food in Minneapolis & St. Paul
• Destinations along Minnesota’s North Shore

Like this post on the ultimate USA west coast road trip itinerary? Pin it!

Yay for transparency! This post contains affiliate links; if you make a purchase through one of the links, we receive a small commission at no extra cost to you. Read the full disclosure policy here .

Related Posts

23 stunning photos that’ll inspire you to visit Minnesota’s North Shore

8 fun things to do when visiting Theodore Roosevelt National Park in North Dakota

How to plan a road trip up the North Shore in Minnesota

Article comments.

Kevin McCarthy

Hi Sophie, What a joyful month that seems to have been for you and Dan. Great commentary on the places I’ve seen, from a different spin. I loved it. Since I’m a retired HS English teacher I’m versed in good writing and that was good. One sticking point I had was your use of “Dan and I’s favorite place” several times., where “Dan and my favorite place” would be more precise. Just a niggling thing, I know, but retirement doesn’t shut down the linguist in me. Thanks for such a great look at our fabulous West. Kevin McCarthy

Bucket list material, that Grand Canyon: if you re just after an impression, you can visit the bad boy in one day. But since it was quite the drive to get there (6 hours), we decided to stay a bit longer. The first day we mainly checked out the east side, the second day the west side. If you re there, try to watch a sunset as well: the sun gives the canyon a truly magical color.

Would love it if you could provide a budget for this trip!

Hey Paige, that’s a great idea! Thank you for the suggestion. I will be sure to update the post with an estimated budget and an exact budget of what my partner and I spent on this road trip! Stay tuned. 🙂

Leave a Comment Cancel Comment

Sign me up for The Wanderful Me newsletter!

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed .

Destinations // Long Term Travel

The ultimate 1 month europe trip itinerary for your first trip to europe.

This post may contain affiliate links. We receive a commission on purchases made through links on this page. This is at no additional cost to you & helps support our travels. Read more in our Disclaimer . Thank you!

Plan the ultimate 1 month Europe trip itinerary with our guide, featuring four iconic cities full of history, culture, and cuisine!

Are you planning a one-month trip to Europe and don’t know where to start? Look no further than this detailed itinerary that takes you through some of the most iconic cities in Europe. From the romantic streets of Paris to the vibrant nightlife of Barcelona, the historic landmarks of Rome to the charming canals of Amsterdam, and the imperial grandeur of Vienna to the exotic flavors of Budapest, this itinerary offers something for everyone. Whether you’re a first-time European visitor or a seasoned traveler, this itinerary will take you on a journey you won’t forget.

We’ll cover a 1 month Europe trip itinerary, 21 days in Europe itinerary, extending to a 5 week Europe itinerary, and more!

This post is all about the ultimate 1 month Europe trip itinerary!

The ultimate 1 month europe trip itinerary, transportation in europe.

There are many options for transportation in Europe, each with its own advantages and disadvantages. One of the most popular ways to travel between European cities is by taking a cheap flight on a budget airline. While these flights may seem to be very affordable, it’s important to factor in all fees for checked bags, carry-ons, and seat selection. Also, factor in the time and money it takes to get to and from the airport.

Train travel is another common option, with many high-speed trains connecting major cities across the continent. Train travel is often more comfortable and scenic than flying, but can sometimes be more expensive though it is still fairly affordable.

Ferries are also a popular option for traveling between coastal cities and islands, offering stunning views of the sea along the way.

For those who prefer more flexibility, renting a car is a great option, allowing travelers to explore at their own pace and visit smaller towns and villages that may not be easily accessible by public transportation. Whatever mode of transportation you choose, make sure to research your options and book in advance to save money and ensure availability.

• Find the best deals on your car rental!

Week 1: Amsterdam + Paris

Days 1-4: Amsterdam, Netherlands

Amsterdam is the perfect city to kick off your one-month Europe itinerary. Since the Amsterdam airport is one of the busiest in the world, this makes for a great starting point through Europe. This charming Dutch city is known for its picturesque canals, charming streets, and delicious foods such as cheese and stroopwafels. While in Amsterdam, be sure to visit the Van Gogh Museum to see some of the artist’s most famous works, and the Anne Frank House to learn about the city’s history during World War II. Amsterdam is also a great place to rent a bike and explore the city like a local. It’s great to spend your first 3-4 days here and then take a short flight or a train ride to Paris.

Days 5-7: Paris, France

Paris is a must-visit city during a 1 month Europe trip itinerary. During your first week in Europe, you can immerse yourself in French culture, enjoy delicious cuisine, and visit iconic landmarks. Start your trip with a visit to the Eiffel Tower, where you can take in stunning city views. Then, take a boat tour on the Seine River to see the city differently. Don’t miss the chance to explore the Louvre Museum, home to some of the world’s most famous works of art. 

With charming cafes and restaurants lining the streets, Paris is the perfect place to indulge in French cuisine and wine. By the end of your first week, you’ll have fallen in love with the City of Light and be ready for the next leg of your European adventure. You could easily spend months just in Paris but enjoy the city for the second half of your first week, and it’s time to head south to Italy.

If you are looking for a longer itinerary through Europe, you could easily spend a week to ten days in each of these cities or add on a few nearby cities like Rotterdam from Amsterdam, Versailles, or Champagne from France. Or you could even stop in Brussels, Belgium, on your way between the two cities.

Week 2: Italy

Italy is a country that offers an endless amount of sights, sounds, and flavors. Start in Rome and visit the Colosseum, the Roman Forum, and the Pantheon, where you can experience ancient Rome firsthand. Don’t forget to visit Vatican City, the world’s smallest country, and see the Sistine Chapel and St. Peter’s Basilica.

Although I would never mind spending a week or more in Rome, since you only have a week in Italy, I would recommend pairing Rome with another city. Depending on what you are looking for, you could travel to a handful of other cities throughout the country. With train travel being cheap and efficient, you can easily travel within the country on a one-week trip.

If you’re interested in more culture (and food), you can take a 2-hour train to Florence. This city was the birthplace of the Renaissance and houses some of Italy’s most famous works of art. You could also visit Venice, the city of canals, where you can take a gondola ride through the winding waterways and enjoy Italian food and wine in charming piazzas and trattorias. If you’re visiting during warmer weather, try heading to the coast with gorgeous small towns in Cinque Terra or luxury waterfront experiences on the Amalfi Coast. The possibilities are endless, and you really cannot go wrong with any choice. Italy is all-around just amazing.

Better safe than sorry...

Are you covered for your next trip? Whether you’re planning a quick weekend getaway or a long-term adventure,  SafetyWing  has you covered. From medical emergencies to lost luggage, they’ll take care of it all. Plus, they even offer emergency response and natural disaster coverage – pretty cool, huh? 

Week 3: Greece

From Italy, you’ll head to Greece. Greece is a country steeped in history and mythology, and a must-visit during a 1 month Europe trip itinerary. Start your journey in Athens and visit the Acropolis and the Parthenon, two of the most famous ancient landmarks in the world.

From Athens, head to any of the beautiful Greek islands. You can fly to some or take a ferry and take in the lovely views along the way. For a more traditional route, try visiting Santorini or Mykonos. But you can expect it to be busy and expensive. For a less crowded Greek island experience, visit Paros or Milos. Enjoy Greek food and wine in charming tavernas and cafes while taking in the breathtaking views of the Aegean Sea.

• Find your entry requirements and make getting a visa a breeze!

Week 4: Spain

To fully immerse yourself in the adventurous and fast-paced one-month trip to Europe, make sure to add Spain to your itinerary. With a unique blend of history, culture, and modernity, this country has so much to offer. Start your journey in Barcelona, one of the most enchanting cities in Spain. Immerse yourself in its vibrant nightlife, visit the world-renowned museums, and marvel at the stunning architecture, including the works of Antoni Gaudi. While in Barcelona, make sure to enjoy some of the best tapas in the world and indulge in the local delicacies until midnight.

Next, travel to Madrid, Spain’s capital city, via high-speed train. The city is a melting pot of cultures with a rich history and a vibrant contemporary art scene. Take some time to explore the city’s many art museums, including the famous Prado Museum, where some of the world’s most famous works of art are displayed. Don’t miss out on the delicious local cuisines and the nightlife, which is just as exciting as Barcelona’s.

This post was all about the ideal 1 month Europe trip itinerary. With so much to see and do in Europe, I hope this is just the beginning of your European adventures.

While you're here....

You can get great deals by booking through our links! We share our favorite ways to book our travels and we earn a small fee each time you make a purchase. This is at no extra cost to you and helps keep us on the road! 

Book your next hotel stay

Find great tours, car rentals for a road trip, don't forget travel insurance, protect yourself online, get visas for most countries, more posts to check out.

Working Out While Traveling | 15 Easy Ways to Workout While On Vacation

41 Must-Have Travel Essentials for Women

What To Do In Siem Reap Besides Temples | 3 Unique Tours in Siem Reap, Cambodia

• Date: September 8, 2023

Related topics:

Want a free long term packing list.

Know exactly what to bring on your long term travel adventure with this FREE Long Term Travel Packing List . Just enter your info below to join our weekly newsletter and get it sent straight to your inbox!

We’re Alicia & Nate, a couple that traveled full-time for 3 years straight. We are now living in a cozy little apartment in Albania. We have a passion for exploring new places and trying new foods.

free travel templates

Shop More templates!

ADVERTISEMENT

sign up for

Our Newsletter

Don't go now..., get 33% off.

By signing up for our weekly newsletter, you’ll receive a 33% off coupon that you can use towards your next purchase + tons of tips on travel! 

Our site uses cookies. If you continue, you agree and accept the use of cookies. To find out more, read our Privacy Policy .

How I Planned a 1 Month Trip in Europe – On a Budget

Are you planning a trip to Europe? This might help you get started. Some years ago, I discovered my passion for travelling and, more specifically, for travelling alone. Yes, it was scary, but this is how I planned my one-month trip in Europe, travelling alone, on a budget.

Disclaimer: It was 2016 before all these budget-saving apps were even available. I had to walk around with a map in my hand.

One month in Europe: Why travel alone?

Why planning a trip to Europe is probably one of the best things for personal development ? It might not be for everyone, but it sure helps lots of people, just like travelling helped me.

It gives me this immense freedom to do what I want when I feel like it, and more than that, I benefit from this never-ending source of experiencing myself through a new place and different people I meet along the way.

For those who have tried it or still do it, you will know what I’m talking about. If you are among the others, then here is a good read for you, a piece I wrote about travelling alone for the first time .

I cannot tell you enough about how much it will help you with your personal growth. Yes, there are greater things yet to be discovered about yourself, and here are some of my conclusions – Great Things Which Happened to Me After I Started Travelling Alone.

If your biggest question is ‘How much does it cost to travel one month in Europe?”.

1 month Europe trip cost

When it comes to planning a trip to Europe, many people start asking about costs. Here’s a list of things to help you plan a budget trip to Europe . Note that these Europe trip cost details are from 2016.

But the answer is that it’s up to you!

If there is one thing you get out of this blog post, it’s that comfort comes at a price, and it isn’t cheap .

In my case, I didn’t pay for accommodation because I planned my trip around the places I have some friends (or used Couchsurfing ), and it cost me well under 1000 Euros (it was in 2016).

The total cost of my transport which I had to book was 170 Euros. After I added the price of the food and other costs (museums, city transport), it added up to 800 Euros.

Keep on reading to see how I did it and what my strategy is for planning a one-month Euro trip under 1000 Euros.

How I travelled cheap, on a budget in Europe for 1 month ?

How I started planning a 1-month trip to Europe

In 2016 I was based in Klagenfurt, a small town in the south of Austria. That’s a great location to travel around Europe because it’s right in the centre.

It was about one month before the actual trip, and because I was tired of waiting for my friends to decide if we were going to do something together, I said to myself, “I’m gonna plan my own holiday, and I will make the most out of it .”

Yes, I have some  tips for you to plan your own holiday , but it will always depend on a lot of other things too. The country, budget, and personal lifestyle. I mean, cheap is a trade-off for comfort and time.

The entire process of planning took me one day. Yes, it was one day of work. Writing prices and locations down. And comparing. Trying different combos.

Planning a trip in Europe: Itinerary planning for budget backpacking in Europe

Your Europe itinerary comes down to money (again).

Years later, I’ve finally written a complete guide on how to plan a trip to Europe , and you should check it out if this is what you’re trying to figure out right now.

So there I was in front of my laptop, with only 400 Euros in my bank account (please keep in mind this was 2016!). Ok, I knew by the time I had to leave, I would have another 330 Euros. But that was for the actual trip (things like food and other unforeseen expenses).

When you travel on a budget, planning plays a huge role.

I had the entire of Europe to choose my locations, so I was flexible about the places , not about the money. Europe on a budget was my only plan.

And I had only one place which was for sure on the list – Paris. But other than that, no clue.

The core of my trip was planning my European route, which depends on transport connections, prices, friends who live there and weather.

Everything was so tied up it was hard to decide.

I checked the weather for the month and decided the week I was going to be in Paris.

Then I had to find a cheap way to get there (by bus). That was my starting point. I knew I wanted to reach Paris, and I had an approximate date because I wanted sunshine, not rainy days.

However, I had a couple of rainy days too. September can be a weird month, but at least it was warm.

Other than Paris, I had no idea where to go next. So I just check all the possible destinations, sorting them by price and checking each one how much it would cost to get to another one from there. I was checking all options, in and out of Paris.

And then I sorted everything based on the price to get there. Remember that you also need to add the cost of transportation from the airport to the city centre. Most budget airports are outside the cities, and a one-way trip to the city can be as much as 20 Euros. So I had to check that too.

Also, I was trying to find the perfect balance between the number of places to visit and the time spent in each city . I don’t like to rush through cities. When you travel for more than a few days, it will get you exhausted, and it’s a good idea to plan some resting days too.

I am going to walk you through my method of building a cheap itinerary in Europe and will explain each destination as I build the final list of stops from my Euro backpacking trip.

My strategy for planning the cheapest trip in Europe (I used all means of transport in Europe – plane, train and bus)

I wrote all about transport in Europe in this post: How to plan a budget trip to Europe .

After I had an idea of where I wanted to go first (Paris), I was on a mission to find the best and cheapest way to get there . Sure, there were 100 Euros train tickets and even more expensive plane tickets, but I was looking to find something less than 50 Euros to get there. When I say travel budget in Europe, I mean it.

At that time, I was based in Klagenfurt, Austria.

The plane was out of the question (in Austria). Too expensive. Then, I opened Google Maps and started to check trains and buses to get there, or somewhere close to France anyway.

That’s how I got to book a train to Frankfurt via Vienna. It was the best option for me, and it was a perfect opportunity to visit Frankfurt as well. And I was getting closer to Paris. It sounded like a good plan. I had no friends in Frankfurt, but it was one for one night, so I decided to use Couchsurfing.

Now they have a Lauda Motion, a low-cost airline flying to Vienna, and life is so much better. It’s like Ryanair, literally. You buy the tickets on the same website!

When travelling in Europe, the  train can be expensive . Next plan: flying. Yes, there are cheap airlines, low cost, but at the time, they were not in Austria. So, I found a pretty decent train ticket to Frankfurt.

Ok, so I decided to spend 2 days (1 night) there.

And on the second day, I found a night bus from Frankfurt to Zurich. I was getting closer to Paris, without spending all my money on the train ticket.

The great advantage of that cheap night bus was that I was leaving Frankfurt at midnight and arriving in Zurich, Switzerland, in the morning. That gave me the entire day to explore Frankfurt and also a full day in Zurich.

Taking two buses was cheaper than taking the train directly to Paris, so that’s why I added Zurich to my European tour map. Only for one day, and then took another night bus to Paris.

For that one day in Zurich, I locked my backpack in a locker at the train station , for which I paid quite a lot. I don’t remember exactly because the prices are in Francs, but I would say it was around 8 Euros. I wasn’t expecting it, but I got to see Zurich.

Also, I’m glad I didn’t get any other ideas because that place is so expensive. No wonder they don’t care about the European Union stuff. A sandwich at the metro was 10 Euros. A stamp = 3 Euros and a postcard = 3 Euros. A beer = 7 Euros (2016). Enough said.

After one sunny day in Zurich, I hopped on another night bus to Paris. By this time, I was so tired my body was hurting. I recommend booking a night bus only if you are under 25 or desperate.

The next morning I arrived in Paris.

Paris is huge. Therefore, I had many transport options. Low-cost airlines, buses, trains, Bla Bla car. Everything. My thoughts on Paris here (sarcasm included). I spent one week in Paris. Here’s a useful guide on how to spend 2 days in Paris . A few days with a friend and the rest of the week with someone I found on Couchsurfing .

Having friends in Dublin , I decided to go there next. The plane ticket was cheap; I bought it five weeks before. I spent six days in Dublin.

Note that the duration of each stay was also determined by the day on which the cheapest flights were.

So if the next cheap flight was in six days, then I would stay six days. If there was a cheap flight in seven days, then I would stay seven days; that was my reasoning.

From Dublin, the options were not so many. And going too far from home was not an option because it meant an expensive return ticket. (Yes, I’ve tested all the options).

Also, there are lots of things to do in Dublin that do not include visiting a bar . And if you make it to Ireland, I can’t recommend enough going to Northern Ireland and visiting the Giant Causeway . It’s just magical.

From Dublin, I found that Copenhagen was really cheap at that time. It’s ironic, considering how crazy expensive Denmark is. So I bought that cheap plane ticket to Copenhagen. Here’s a curated list of top things to do in Copenhagen on your first trip. Since then, I have visited this gorgeous city once more.

I spent another six days there—the same reasoning with the plane prices.

From there, the options were already limited. It was either a long time on a bus or a plane.

I had to get closer to Austria, So I was looking for destinations closer to my home base. I was looking for a destination that had a cheap on-land connection to the home .

While I couldn’t find anything bus, train, or plane to take me closer to Austria, I checked prices for plane tickets to Italy.

If you are in for a special treat, try to book a day trip from Milan, since it’s so close to Como Lake.

Most of the time, planes to Milan have a great price, going from all over Europe. Mine plane was less than 25 EUR. You can still find similar tickets today, but you will need to add an extra carry on or checked luggage, since the rules for luggage have changed since then.

But back in 2016, for 25 EUR, I flew from Copenhagen to Milan. That’s why I decided to go to Milan for one night. And the perk of this destination was that there was a direct cheap night train heading home in Southern Austria—total bliss. For complete disclosure, that train was a night train, which was about 26EUR, but that’s still better than a night bus because you have room to move.

Tips to find cheap accommodation in Europe

During my constant coordination between prices, tickets, and times, I had to keep in mind accommodation. I always check my Facebook friends to see the cities in which I have friends.

This step is a highly important step. Accommodation in Europe is not cheap . A cheap hostel is around 20 Euros per night , and then when you multiply that by 30 nights… it’s not gonna go well if you’re on a budget. It’s not an option for a 1-month trip in Europe.

So when you are looking to find cheap accommodation in Europe, try taking a night bus/train and save that money. Two in one. Transport and accommodation . Although the level of comfort declines.

*After spending 2 nights in a row on a bus, I felt so tired, the first thing I did when I arrived in Paris was to sleep for 5 hours.*

As a last resort, check Booking for some cheap hostels , and always make sure you have a little extra money. For emergencies, you know?

If you happen to meet friends on the way (or make new ones), a nice flat on Airbnb could save you for the night.

I was also confused if I should even consider expensive cities like Copenhagen. I had no idea if I should visit that place. But the weather was great. (I was constantly checking the weather, monthly predictions, etc.).

I knew nobody there, or so I thought. I literally searched on Facebook for “Friends who live in Copenhagen.” I have a friend from high school living there. (After arriving there, I realised I had another friend and two colleagues from the university there. I guess most people are over Facebook at this point, because most of us don’t update our profiles anymore.)

The only two places in which I had no friends prior to my trip were Frankfurt and Milan. I spent only one night in each, so I used Couchsurfing to find a host .

All in all, I’m grateful for all the wonderful people I’ve met and for all their help. This backpacking trip made me realize that people are genuinely kind. Most of them, anyway.

I met amazing people, more than welcoming, and I totally recommend it. I also used the Couchsurfing app a lot to find a buddy for a day, visit a museum, or eat ice cream.

I said it before, and I will say it again – Couchsurfing is More Than Just a Free Bed For The Night .

To sum it up, here are my tips for finding cheap accommodation in Europe:

• Check hostel beds. Try to get a bed in a smaller room for more comfort. If you’re travelling to popular locations (such as Paris or London), book well in advance.
• Check out Couchsurfing. Nowadays, you need a subscription to access it, but I believe it is for the better, as it keeps the weirdos out.
• Research hotel location. In the end, it might be worth paying a bit more for a place that is conveniently located, so you will save much more on transport tickets.
• Reach out to friends and former colleagues. I bet most of them won’t mind helping you out for a couple of days.

Managing travel dates and times during my one-month travel around Europe

Considering the lowest costs for that given time frame, planning a trip in Europe required lots of price checking and notes about different options. It was almost like a game of chess, but the outcome was all up to me.

I picked the days based on the price of the ticket. For example, taking a plane from Copenhagen to Milan was half price on a Monday than on Saturday or Sunday.

The cheapest plane tickets are during the week. Monday – Wednesday. The night buses/trains were also cheaper. Or the ones leaving very early in the morning.

A lot of my mornings were spent chasing a train somewhere in those cities. Or arriving. Which is great if you want to make the most out of your day there.

What apps did I use planning and during my 1-month trip in Europe?

Google Maps – whenever the obvious departure and arrival point had too expensive tickets, I stared at the map and searched for “What is close enough and can be cheaper?” (That was a question for me, not Google.)

OBB  –  The Austrian railway company. It’s cheap if you buy it a week before. It’s comfortable. The connections are great. Love it. I was always trying to use the train whenever getting in or out of the country.

Flixbus is a bus company which operates in many countries in Europe. Probably the cheapest one. It’s a bus; it’s ok. But it can be late, so don’t plan to catch a plane after a bus ride. Take some hours in between as a safety measure. And regarding safety, well… it’s like a car. A lot of things can happen on the highway.

Ryanair is a low-cost European airline with great connections and really cheap tickets. Each plane ticket (Paris – Dublin, Dublin – Copenhagen, Copenhagen – Milan was less than 26 Euros).

Sure, nowadays, they have changed their policies, and they basically charge extra for everything (cabin luggage, seat selection, etc.), but it still is one cheap airline.

Just make sure to follow all their rules, and you won’t be charged extra. Install their mobile phone to always have the boarding pass on hand! Please check out my guide on planning a Europe trip for my best and updated tips.

Kiwi is one of my favourites to check for all kinds of flight connections. Low cost or not, this is worth checking, and I love it.

Couchsurfing is an online platform for travellers, open-minded people who have a great passion for travelling and love meeting fellow travellers and/or locals. I used it to find people to hang out with or to find a place to stay. Great, amazing community. Too bad some speak poorly of it. I have many amazing memories because of it, and I have many more friends because of it. Read more about my experiences with Couchsurfing .

What else to keep in mind? Booking.com in case you need a last-minute place to stay.

Don’t forget about travel insurance ! You should always be on the safe side!

Check out the ultimate list for how to travel cheap in Europe for one month in Europe!

Destinations for my 1-month trip in Europe

Oh boy, I felt exhausted after a day of sitting on a chair and killing the internet. And extremely proud of my achievement. And not a single night had to be spent in a hostel. Mastery.

The total cost of my transport which I had to book was 170 Euros. The year of this trip was 2016. After I added the price of the food and other costs (museums, city transport), it added up to 800 Euros.

This is what my final itinerary looked like.

Klagenfurt (Austria) – Frankfurt (Germany) – Zurich (Switzerland) – Paris (France) – Dublin (Ireland) – Copenhagen (Denmark) – Milan (Italy) – Klagenfurt (Austria)

If you’re looking for a Europe itinerary for your first European adventure, check out my recommended itinerary for 3-weeks in Europe . I promise it will be fabulous.

The outcome of planning my own backpacking trip

I was always waiting for someone else to bring me along on their trips or plan everything for me. Oh, I had no idea what I was missing.

This simple, basic thing gives a feeling of self-control and confidence, and it illustrates how in the end, we can manage everything.

What’s in it for you when planning a trip to Europe for yourself ?

You get to decide each step of the way, how long you stand, and what to see. You truly feel like you have complete control over your life.

I manage to travel cheaper and decide my own pace of travelling, destinations, and means of transport.

And it put a smile on my face on those mornings when, at 3 a.m., I was waking up and heading to the airport. Because it was all me. Every second of, it was my idea, and I happily embraced it.

But I had to put in the work. Nothing worth having comes easy or cheap. And cheap isn’t always about the money.

Thanks for reading (assuming you made it this far).

This is my strategy for planning a backpacking trip to Europe , and I hope it helps.

Years later, I still read this blog post and find it hard to understand how I did it, but this is proof that most things happen when you HAVE to make them happen, not when you have extra cash to pump into your 1-month trip to Europe.

Travelling on a budget to Europe happens only when you are truly committed to living on a budget, and the reality is that not all of us are. Unfortunately.

There is still a lot to be said, but I hope you got the idea. Anyway, feel free to tell me about your plans and travel ideas, and I will try my best to help you. When I don’t travel, it makes me really happy to help someone else travel!

Please share, pin, and tell your friends! Travel cheap to Europe and be happy!

Share this:

• Click to share on Facebook (Opens in new window)
• Click to share on LinkedIn (Opens in new window)
• Click to share on Twitter (Opens in new window)
• Click to share on Tumblr (Opens in new window)
• Click to share on Pinterest (Opens in new window)

Iulia Vasile

Iulia is a travel expert, blogger, engineer, freelance copywriter, and a curiosity-driven personality. She sees travel as the ultimate tool for self-improvement and personal growth, and that's the main topic of her blog, Juliasomething.com.

Related posts

Visit The Louvre Museum: Essential Tips for an Unforgettable Visit

Paris On A Budget: Musée d’Orsay And Musée du Louvre

Jökulsárlón Glacier Lagoon: Everything You Need To Know

Tell me what you think cancel reply, 10 comments.

[…] few years ago, I saw a lot of Europe on a really tight budget and wrote a blog post on how I found the best and cheapest travel options in Europe and travel in Europe for a […]

Thanks for inspiring me! You really helped me to plan this out. And I really agree with traveling alone because waiting the others really not worth it ahahaha *sorry for my bad grammar

I am so glad!! Happy travels and may you have the greatest time! I am sure you will love it!

[…] If you are planning a trip to Europe, make sure to check all my tips on how I planned a 1-month trip to Europe on a budget. […]

[…] Read more on How I planned a 1 Month Trip in Europe – On a Budget […]

[…] I was travelling across Europe, I realized this one simple thing, that travelling doesn’t require loads of money. I used […]

[…] is an affordable country in Europe and has pretty much everything Earth has to offer to its inhabitants: mountains, seaside, rivers, […]

[…] PS. This is how to travel 1 month around Europe, ON A BUDGET! […]

Hi Julia I can see myself in you we are just like the same person. I’m going to Europe in 1 month and if I could write any review I would do exactly the same like you. I really your inspiration. Thank you for all your articles. Pam

One Month in Italy – Our Comprehensive Itinerary

Last Updated on March 16, 2024 by Bonnie

When we started planning our first trip to Europe, we wanted to see it all! I (Bonnie) had visited Europe once before, in college, but Grant had not (unless you count a 30-minute layover while he was in the Army, which we don’t). We knew we wanted to make the most of the long flight and spend as much time there as we could. Our thoughts wandered to France, Germany, Italy and everywhere in between and near and far!

After much consideration, we decided to just focus on Italy. We knew we would enjoy the trip more if we had time to see some of the smaller towns. We absolutely made the best decision in this regard and that idea has shaped much of our travels since then.

This article covers our itinerary for how we spent one month in Italy, complete with our favorite sites and mistakes! We used Rick Steve’s Italy itinerary for inspiration but definitely made changes to make it work for us and our length of time.

(Disclaimer: When we link to places where you can buy our stuff or places we stayed, we are using special codes that earn us commissions on the sales at no additional cost to you. Please see our  Review Policy   for more information.)

Our Original One Month in Italy Itinerary

Rome – four nights.

Many folks traveling to Italy will fly into Rome because it is the biggest city and a must-see destination. Rome is a good starting place for one month in Italy, but it is very crowded and busy in the summer, so be ready! Our Four Days in Rome gave us enough time to see the major sites plus a few off-the-beaten-path sites.

We decided to spend our first night at the Hilton at the airport (Fiumicino). In hindsight, that was probably a mistake, especially since we arrived early in the day. We did end up going into the city, which was about a 30-45 minute shuttle bus or train ride. While we enjoyed the hotel and the amenities of the Hilton, I would only suggest staying near the airport if you are arriving later in the day and know that you won’t have time to go into the city.

We booked our next three nights through AirBnB, which was our first experience with that app (this was in 2013). Our room was in the apartment of some locals – a woman and her son. The location was near the Coliseum and the price was right. While everything was ok, it just was not the type of experience we were looking for – not enough privacy when staying in someone’s home vs. an actual bed and breakfast.

On our second visit to Rome (in 2017), we stayed at  Hotel Villa Giulia   in Ciampino, about 30 minutes outside of Rome by bus. The train is only about a 15-minute ride and very inexpensive!

Two or three days is enough time to see the major sites of Rome, such as the Colosseum, the Vatican and the Spanish Steps. If you spend another day or two in Rome, it will give you time to get off the beaten path. We found some of our favorite sites, such as the Catacombs of San Sebastian, Via Appia Antica and the Castel Sant’Angelo were off the beaten path.

Indeed, when we returned to Rome in 2017 , we got to see a lot of cool stuff we missed on our first trip, like the Basilica of St. Paul Outside the Walls and the Catacombs of St. Domitilla, both of which we highly recommend visiting.

Salerno – Three Nights

From Rome, we went to the Amalfi Coast. We chose to stay in Salerno at the wonderful Alto Mare B&B . The view from our room was amazing and the hosts were very friendly and helpful.

Salerno itself is fairly quiet and there is not a lot to see or do. We enjoyed a big park near the coast, but the real attraction is the other nearby cities. Still, we had one of the best meals we had in Italy in Salerno at the recommendation of our host.

We spent one day visiting Amalfi and Sorrento via ferry and bus. The next day we hiked “Sentiero degli Dei,” which means The Path of the Gods, near Amalfi. This excellent hike has tremendous views and is well worth bringing your hiking shoes to tackle this trail!

Get more details on our time at the Amalfi Coast, Salerno and Sorrento here.

Naples – One Night

We spent one night in Naples, which was one night too many for us. Seriously, we absolutely hated Naples. I had read some mixed reviews, so we were hesitant to add it as a stop for our one month in Italy. That said, the Archeological Museum in Naples houses many of the artifacts from Pompei, which we wanted to see. It was also a good base for visiting Pompei, which we enjoyed.

Naples was dirty, crowded, confusing to navigate and did not feel safe. We definitely walked past a SWAT raid of some sort and are pretty sure we walked past a drug deal on one of the side roads (we were about a block off the main street trying to avoid the congestion). The food was not any different from anywhere else in Italy.

I know plenty of people have had wonderful experiences in Naples, but we did not.

On the flip side, our hotel in Naples, Hotel Piazza Bellini , was one of the best we stayed at the entire month in Italy. If you feel that you must go to Naples, we strongly suggest this hotel.

Honestly, if we had this trip to do over again, we would skip Naples and visit Pompeii from Salerno. While it would have taken a bit longer to get there from Salerno, it would have been worth it to enjoy walking the quiet streets of Salerno more.

Ferry to Palermo (Sicily) – Two Nights

While we enjoyed the (overnight) ferry, which was basically a small cruise ship, we definitely made some mistakes here. One mistake was not scheduling more time for Sicily on our one month in Italy itinerary. The other was that we took the ferry from Naples to Palermo but then decided to visit Mt. Etna on the other side of the island.

We had to take a three-hour bus to get there and back. The upside was that we got to see a lot of the interior, which was very pretty. The downside was that we wasted a good part of our time in Sicily sitting on a bus.

The Best Western Hotel Mediterraneo in Catania (one night) was very nice. They helped us book a tour of Mt. Etna, which was with a local guide and only four of us total in the group. We also found some great food here. If you want to try exotic meats, Sicily is the place to do it.

Again, if we had it to do over again, we would have spent more time in Sicily. What we saw of the island was quite pretty and is one of the few places we could be convinced to rent a car.

Read more about our time in Naples, Pompei and Sicily here.

Venice – Two nights

We flew from Palermo to Venice on Ryan Air, which was a cheap and easy flight. One note about flying into Venice: there are two airports. Somehow, we weren’t paying attention and didn’t realize we were at the one farther outside the city. We kept waiting and waiting for the hotel shuttle to pick us up and couldn’t figure out why it was taking so long. Once we realized that we were at the “wrong” airport, it took a train and a cab to get us to the right place. I think we finally arrived after midnight… A full day of travel exhausted us!

One full day in Venice was more than enough for us. Other people will tell you to spend two or three days or more. I think we were just tired that day and didn’t have the patience for some of the lines and rules about not taking bags into places. The city is very interesting though, and definitely worth a day or two.

Make sure you take the time and spend the money on a gondola ride. On our second trip, we took one and LOVED it! We also recommend going out to the islands and seeing glass blowing… Amazing!

After our return to Venice, we can see spending a second day in the city to make sure you have the opportunity to explore more of the outskirts but we think you can make do with just one day.

Our hotel for this stay was the Hilton Garden Inn in Mestre , just outside of Venice. A note on Venice: you cannot drive in Venice, so don’t bother renting a car here. Honestly, though, I wouldn’t want to drive anywhere near any of the big cities we visited in our one month in Italy.

Trento – One Night

Trento is northwest of Venice and is a good base for visiting the Dolomite mountains in northern Italy. There is definitely a German/Austrian influence here and not nearly as touristy, which was a nice change of pace!

We took a “hike” that offered some nice views, but we must have missed some signs because a lot of it was along a road.

This was a great place to rest and relax, but maybe not necessarily a “must-see” stop, unless you are just looking for something different. Still, we recommend this stop for our one month in Italy itinerary because it is beautiful and the food was quite good!

We stayed at the Hotel America , which was definitely more European than American!

Milan – One Night

We were going to go from Trento to Bolzano, another mountain town farther north, but we discovered at the last minute the museum we wanted to visit was closed the day we would be there. So, we changed of plans and went directly to Milan.

Milan was the perfect example of “don’t go somewhere just because everyone says you should go.” Yes, the cathedral in Milan was amazing. That was it. We aren’t big shoppers and didn’t care about going to any of the malls for the latest fashions. So, basically, we spent the night in Milan for a 30-minute visit to one cathedral.

If I had it to do over, I would skip Milan on our one month in Italy itinerary. It just wasn’t where our interests are.

We stayed at the DoubleTree by Hilton , which was a nice hotel, out of the main part of town, but near a metro station.

Varenna – Two Nights

Thankfully, our next stop, Varenna, made up for the wasted time in Milan! Located on Lake Como, Varenna became one of our favorite cities in Italy. We visited an old castle that is now home to several owls and hawks. They do a falconry show each day, but it was short due to the heat. The hike there was still worth it, as there were great views from the top.

We also took the ferry across the river and did a short hike in one of the neighboring towns. We loved this area and would spend more time here if we could get a do-over!

The Hotel Monte Codeno provided a comfortable room, though it did have a very small shower.

Turin – One Night

The big attraction in Turin is the Museum of the Shroud. We enjoyed the museum and how it presented the information. We also visited the Cinema Museum, which was just ok.

Turin was not overly touristy or crowded, which was a nice change. If either of these attractions interests you, or anything else you read about in Turin, then it’s worth a day. Otherwise, you could probably skip it on your one month in Italy.

We stayed at the Best Quality Hotel Gran Mogol, a nice, comfortable hotel, despite the fact they were in the middle of some renovations.

Read more about our time in Northern Italy here.

Riomaggiore – T hree Nights

Riomaggiore is one of the five towns that make up the Cinque Terre. These towns are quintessential Italian coastal hillside towns and there is a hiking trail that connects all of them, which makes the area even more interesting.

There are a couple of different trails along the Cinque Terre. The Blue Path is the lower and more popular path. The Red Path is higher up the mountain and more difficult to get to. In fact, we were not able to hike the Red Trail, as we waited too late to plan it and couldn’t make it work with the bus schedule.

Parts of The Blue Trail were closed, due to poor conditions, which is not unusual after a lot of rain. There have even been some mudslides in the past that have completely washed out parts of the trail.

We took a train to Monterosso al Mare, then hiked to Vernazza and on to Corniglia. Having train service to all the towns makes it easy to start and stop hiking wherever you want or need to.

We stayed in  Riomaggiore at the Hotel La Zorza , which provided a large one-bedroom apartment above a nice bar/restaurant at a very reasonable price.

Read more about Hiking the Coast of the Cinque Terre here.

Florence – Four Nights

We made a quick stop in Pisa on our way to Florence to see the Leaning Tower. As we walked through town, it was obvious that we really weren’t missing anything else. Thus, we did not feel bad about not spending more time there. I’m sure Pisa is a lovely town, but we had other towns that we were more interested in seeing.

On our return to Italy in 2017, we spent a bit more time exploring the rest of the Piazza dei Miracoli but still only spent a few hours in Pisa. After two visits, we can safely say Pisa is worth the stop but not worth spending the night unless it just happens to work best for your timing.

Florence is by far our favorite “big” city in Italy. The art and beauty of the entire town are just magical. We found what ended up being our favorite restaurant, Antica Trattoria da Tito , not far from our Bed & Breakfast. Grant REALLY enjoyed the Steak Florentine!

There are tons of interesting sights in Florence, so I would suggest giving yourself at least two or three days. I am sure that it would be easy to fill up a week, especially if you decide to use Florence as a base to travel out to Pisa or any of the smaller towns in Tuscany.

We stayed at the B&B La Notte Blu . The hotel was about a 10-minute walk from the main part of town – close enough to be convenient, but far enough to not be too loud or crowded.

Read more here: Let Florence Capture Your Heart in Three Days

Cortona – One Night

While one night is plenty of time to “see” Cortona, we could easily have spent several days here. It is absolutely beautiful and very quaint and interesting, as most of the small hill towns are.

It was VERY easy to see why Frances Mayes was inspired to buy and renovate a house here, which ultimately became the book (and movie), Under the Tuscan Sun .

Spend as much time here as you can. The Hotel San Luca was right at the entrance to the town with great views and a good restaurant.

Siena – Four Nights

We spent “extra” time in Siena because we were here for The Palio. If you haven’t heard of The Palio, be sure to check out our article which provides all the information on Italy’s iconic horse race . If you can time your visit so you are in town for The Palio (July 2 and August 16, annually), we highly suggest it.

There are probably one or two days’ worth of sites any other time of the year. Siena is a smaller town, but not too small. It too would be a good town to use as a base to take day trips to some of the other small towns in Tuscany.

The Hotel Albergo Chiusarelli was amazing! Great location and great food plus they managed to accommodate us when we decided to add an extra night at the last minute… Not easy to do on the day of The Palio!

Read about Planning Your Trip to See Il Palio – Italy’s Craziest Horse Race

Assisi – One Night

I am convinced that most visitors love Assisi because it is the only small town they visit. And I understand that. If you have limited time and/or money, I understand choosing Assisi as your one small town so that you can see the church of San Francesco.

Don’t get me wrong, it is an interesting town, and the church is nice. But, we enjoyed Cortona and Siena more.

By this point in the trip, it was “just another interesting church” to us. Seriously, there are SO MANY interesting and pretty churches and paintings in Italy that eventually they all run together.

The Hotel Sorella Luna  was very comfortable and conveniently located.

• Exploring Tuscany: Side Trips from Florence

Rome – One Night

Our last night in Italy was at the Hilton Garden Inn at the Rome airport. We did not see any additional sites in Rome this day.  We like to stay near the airport on our final night, especially if we have an early flight. It allows us to not have to worry about fighting traffic and missing our flight and maybe even get a little extra sleep!

Our Revised and Recommended One Month in Italy Itinerary

So, after our experiences in Italy, both on our first trip and our second trip, what would we do differently? What would we recommend? What would we plan for a friend?

Here is what we recommend, including our changes from our visits to Italy:

• Land in Rome and spend four days exploring
• Travel by train to the Amalfi Coast, staying in any of the cities but we liked Salerno.
• Three days exploring the Amalfi Coast and seeing Pompeii
• Take a ferry from Naples to Palermo.
• Rent a car and spend three days exploring Sicily. At the end of the third day, fly to Venice.
• Spend one day exploring Venice
• Take the train to Trento (stop in Verona to walk the streets and grab lunch if you have time… we did that in 2017 and it was great)
• Spend a day in Trento exploring the town and doing a little hiking
• Take an early train to Bolzano to see the South Tyrol Museum of Archaeology, home of Europe’s oldest known preserved human mummy, plus a lot of other cool sites.
• Take the train to Varenna on Lake Como and spend two nights enjoying Lake Como and exploring the area
• Take the train to the Cinque Terre, staying in either Riomaggiore (where we stayed) or Monterosso
• Spend the day hiking the Cinque Terre on the Blue Trail from end to end and then take the train back.
• Take the train from the Cinque Terre to Pisa and spend a few hours exploring the Piazza Miracoli then continue to Florence.
• Spend four days exploring Florence
• Travel by train to Siena and spend two nights exploring (longer if you can be there for the Palio!)
• Travel by train to Cortona and spend two nights enjoying this beautiful hill town
• Travel by train from Cortona to Rome to pick up your return flight

This one month in Italy itinerary eliminates the mistakes we made, giving more time to experience Sicily and skipping over the stops we made that weren’t really worth the time.

Final Thoughts on Our One Month in Italy

We thoroughly enjoyed our one month in Italy but we would certainly make changes if we were doing this trip again. Still, spending one month in Italy, rather than splitting it up between two or three, or more, countries, was the right decision for us. We really felt like we experienced the country rather than just visiting it.

You can get more details on each of our stops in the links above or below.

• Four Days in Rome
• The Amalfi Coast, Salerno and Sorrento
• Naples, Pompei and Sicily
• A Taste of Northern Italy – Venice and Lake Como
• Hiking the Coast of the Cinque Terre
• Let Florence Capture Your Heart in Three Days
• Transportation in Italy: Getting Around the Country
• Tips for Your First Visit to Italy
• Planning Your Trip to See Il Palio – Italy’s Craziest Horse Race

I know there are still some amazing sights that we missed. Hopefully, we will get to go back one day and revisit some of our favorites and enjoy some new places.

In the meantime, we will stay busy visiting the hundreds of countries that we haven’t been to yet!

If one month in Italy is too much for you, check out our itinerary for One Week in Italy (Venice, Florence and Rome) .

Travel Resources

What do you use to find a flight.

We use Skyscanner to find deals on flights. Skyscanner has a great interface and compares tons of airlines for the best pricing and routing. That said, it does not always have every airline and some airlines will have better deals on their website. Still, Skyscanner is a great place to start. Click here to search for a flight.

What do you use to find a hotel?

We typically stay at Hilton properties , so we use the Hilton website . You can find good Hilton Honors discounts or AAA discounts for a hotel there. We make great use of our free night certificates from our Hilton Honors American Express. Click here to book a Hilton property.

If there are no Hilton properties available, we use TripAdvisor to read reviews and book the hotel. We find we can get the best price that way. Click here to search for a hotel.

We recently partnered with Stay22 to add interactive maps to each of our destination posts. This will allow you to see a plethora of hotels and vacation rentals all in one responsive map of the area.

What if I need more space than I can get at a hotel?

We use Vrbo for the times when we have rented a cabin for a weekend getaway, like this cabin in Townsend, TN , or needed to rent a house for a large family vacation. We had a great experience with them in terms of refunding deposits when COVID hit and will continue to use them. Click here to search for a vacation rental.

Who do you use for rental cars?

As a general rule, we book with Hertz for rental cars. We have had nothing but good experiences with them. Plus, we really like unlimited mileage and not worrying about crossing state lines. We have even rented from Hertz overseas in both Slovenia and Croatia . Click here to book a rental car.

How about booking a cruise?

We have found some amazing prices for booking a cruise through Cruise Direct . We have saved a lot of money on our cruises compared to what we found elsewhere, making a last-minute Bahamas cruise even cheaper. Click here to book a cruise.

What if I want to rent an RV?

We highly recommend Outdoorsy for RV rentals. We rented a camper van for a week to visit Rocky Mountain National Park for the elk rut and Custer State Park for the Buffalo Round-Up and had a blast. The program was easy to use and we really enjoyed the freedom of having a camper van for that trip. Click here to rent an RV.

What do you use for booking tours?

We don’t often book tours. Typically, we like to do stuff on our own. That said, there are some experiences you can’t have any other way. So, when we do want to book a tour, we always check Viator first. Click here to book a tour.

Do you use anything to get discounts on the road?

We make extensive use of both Good Sam and AAA on the road. Good Sam is normally regarded as a discount card for RVers at campgrounds and Camping World but anyone can use the 5 cents off a gallon at the pump at both Pilot and Flying J. Click here to get a Good Sam membership. We have had AAA as long as we have been married and it has more than paid for itself in discounts at hotels, aside from the peace of mind of having roadside assistance. Add in paper maps and the ability to get an international driver’s license and it is more than worth it for any traveler out there. Click here to get a AAA membership.

21 thoughts on “One Month in Italy – Our Comprehensive Itinerary”

Can never go anywhere staying only a day or two. prefer to stay long term in a single region and day trip to towns nearby. For me Florence is a 5 day trip alone. Venice a minimum of 4 days. Having 45 to 60 days helps. Salerno or Sorento is a must for 5 days or more. the ferry takes you to so many beautiful sights. As Americans we tend to equate a great trip with how many “things” we can see in a day. I look for memorable moments and they rarely happen at the pace we set for ourselves. See less enjoy more is my motto. Rushing around destroys the attempted infiltration of life overseas.

We 100% agree but also know that most folks simply do not have that much time to dedicate to visiting just one city. We could only afford the month we spent by saving for quite a while.

I agree with you Gary, it’s not about quantity, it’s about quality. I find that I need at least a day or two in each city or town (depending on the size) to get a “feel” for the place. The first couple of days all I do is “walk” the town, to get my bearings, and see the daily lives of people throughout the town and try to experience the vibe. I do a lot of people watching from street cafés. It’s only then, after a few days, that I try to start to see the sites and go only when the day trippers and tour groups aren’t there. I’ve been going to Italy annually for four weeks for the last ten years. The best trips have been when I visit the least amount of cities and towns. The average time in a city is about one week for me. I’ve also learned that one wants to repeat visits and patronize those establishments you enjoy being at, like restaurants, and bars (coffee) several times. The reason: the first time you go, your just another customer. the second time you go, they recognize you with better service, and the third time you go, you’re family!

That is a wonderful way to travel. We wholeheartedly agree. The only difficulty we have is time restrictions. As teachers, we only have so much time we can travel. We are lucky that we can spend a month or more on the road. Most folks can’t.

Grant I was wondering, do you have a written budget of your daily expenses? Like for accommodations, meals, transportation, tours/museums/city passes, entertainment, and souvenirs/purchases? That would be a an incredible insight. I understand that everything depends on one’s choices like luxury hotels vs AirBnB, or Michelin rated restaurants vs humble family trattorias. As for me, I don’t ever plan to stay or eat in hotels, I prefer the “real-life” experience of renting a strategically located apartment (a la AirBnB) half way between the main train station and the historical center, and I total avoid ridiculously priced Michelin starred restaurants and try to eat only in simple trattorias that service the locals not tourists.

I actually have a breakdown of how much we spent and how much we budgeted. Please bear in mind that this was in 2013, so you will have to factor for inflation and the difference in exchange rates.

We budgeted $300 per day. We spent about $265 per day.

In terms of accommodations, we spent $3,581 or about 44% of our total. We spent $2,553 on food or about 31% of our total. We spent about $1,236 on transportation or about 15% of our total. We spent $733 on tours/museums/entertainment or 9% of our total.

We stayed in moderate hotels, no hostels and only one AirBnB. We ate in mostly reasonable restaurants but did splurge from time to time.

I hope that helps!

What an exciting and cool trip! I was thinking of taking our family (3 of us) to Italy this coming summer, and renting an AirBNB as a ‘central point’ and doing day trips from there (what city, I’m not exactly sure). We could stay an overnight or two, but feel like it would be better if we have one jumping off point and don’t have to keep packing and unpacking. In your experience, do you think this is a feasible idea? Thanks in advance 🙂

Thanks for the question!

I think you could (and should) do one location if you are planning on exploring a particular region. If we were planning on spending a lot of time exploring Tuscany, this is exactly what we would do.

That said, if you are planning on seeing a lot of the highlights of Italy, you are gonna see travel times are really burning up how long you can spend in these cities. Let’s assume you are planning on renting a car. If you use Florence as your home base, you are looking at a 6-hour round trip to visit Venice, a 6-hour round trip to visit Rome, a 5-hour round trip to visit Monterosso al Mare, etc.

While I would rent a car to explore Tuscany and the island of Sicily, I would not want a rental car for most of my trip. I would much rather just ride the train, which is far more convenient.

We saw all these places on your list but it took us about three months. We made Lucca as our base ( not on your list). We live like locals and we have made lots of local friends at Lucca. We go every year to Italy and rent apt thru VRBO.We love to cook, buy local produce and invite friends. We stay inside Lucca’s walled city. Each town as its own characteristics. As somebody says it is quality and not quantity. Due to the pandemic we have not been back since 2019. We are looking into buying an apartment but in Abruzzo region close to the Adriatic coast. Lucca’s real estate has gotten very high like here in California since we visited last. We plan to discover this region perhaps this summer 2022 and stay about 8-10 weeks or more. We are both retired and love to travel.

That’s outstanding! We have not been to Lucca, yet, but hope to when we return to Italy in the future.

Being retired sure makes longer travel a lot easier!

This sounds fabulous. My wife and I are planning a 2 month trip next spring and looking to stay for 4 2-week stays split between Italy and Spain. We have done a few trips and covered lots of ground so looking for something more like what you did. Any suggestions for base camps?

A two-month trip to Europe sounds wonderful! We personally love Tuscany and would highly recommend spending some of your time there. Florence is our favorite big city anywhere. But, the small cities offer a lot more charm and opportunity to really feel like a local. Cortona is one of our favorites and we would definitely recommend it. Sienna was a great mid-size town. That said, there are still MANY cities in Italy that we haven’t been to and I really don’t think you can go wrong anywhere in that region.

From there, it really just depends on where all you want to visit and how far you are willing to spend for day trips. We loved Salerno, Sorrento and Positano. Any of those would make a good base. Or, you could go north towards Venice, Verona or Milan.

We haven’t been to Spain, yet, so really can’t offer any advice there.

Whatever you decide, I hope you have a great trip!

if you’re going to stay in American chain hotels and rush from one place to the other, really why bother? The whole tone of your article was pretty negative- Naples is dirty and unsafe, ‘nothing to see here’, little to do! Why bother writing about it at all? Why bother going? It’s easy to see where the term Ugly American really comes from. You didn’t do any one a service and I’m sure that the locals in those ‘small towns with nothing to do’ we’re glad when you left. The whole point of travel is to see other cultures with different food and architecture and art and look with childlike-wonder and appreciation. it’s an opportunity to meet other people with other perspectives and share a moment when we appreciate our similarities and celebrate our differences. If you can’t do that why go at all?

First, thanks for your comment. I will say this is a first, being called an “ugly American.”

If you read our article, you would see we did not stay exclusively at American chain hotels, but did enjoy various local hotels and B&Bs, including the Hotel Piazza Bellini in Naples, which remains one of our favorite hotels in Europe to this day. We did enjoy several small towns, including Cortona and Ravenna, and, if we could afford it, we would move to Tuscany. We love it that much. We made some mistakes on planning out this trip. We wrote the article in the hopes our readers would see our mistakes and make up their own minds. That said, our trip to Italy was a month long. Most folks in the US get a week or two for a vacation and the cost of flying across the Atlantic is prohibitive. I would hardly argue we did not do our best to enjoy Italian culture and learn from it. We spent a month doing just that. You seem mostly concerned about our coverage of Naples. We did not enjoy Naples at all. We found the city to be dirty and devoid of charm, in contrast to every other city we visited in Italy. While we did not really enjoy Milan all that much, it was mainly due to the nature of the city’s attractions, not the city itself. We stand by our observations with this caveat: we visited in 2013. That said, a quick search of the internet confirms that Naples has not improved. While we get your concerns, if you want Naples to be better, clean up the city, eliminate the graffiti and crack down on street crime. Until then, we simply cannot recommend the city to our readers and would remiss in not warning them to steer clear.

Well said..

Enjoyed your month in Italy. I would live there given a choice. Loved Lucca n the Tuscany. Was interested in the prices which I expect would be double now in 2023.

Thanks so much, Ginny! We agree! There are several towns we visited in Italy we would gladly live in!

In terms of prices, I was surprised. I did a quick search for prices for the Hotel San Luca in Cortona (which I am guessing is what you are referring to?) and the prices came in at less than $100 USD/night in the summer. I think this partly is due to the decline in tourism over the past few years due to COVID. I would also attribute that to a favorable exchange rate for euros vs dollars. When we were there, it was not favorable to folks with dollars and that made the trip a bit more expensive for us.

I loved reading this! Thanks so much for sharing your story. What time of year did you do this trip? Thanks!

Thank you! We were there from early June to early July.

Hi, I have been contemplating trips to Europe for many years and was wondering if this itinerary be safe for a single woman traveling ? my fiends are either married or dont quite have the funds Thank you

In our experience, solo travel in Europe is generally very safe, with the appropriate precautions. Based on our experience in 2013, I would not necessarily recommend Naples as a single female, though. That said, a lot could have changed in this time. I suggest that you look for blogs by solo female travelers for more information and specific tips.

Leave a Comment Cancel reply

I accept the Privacy Policy

Amazing 1 Month Family Vacation Road Trip Across the USA with Kids (Itinerary and Activities)

This article may contain affiliate links and I may receive compensation if you purchase something through one of these links

During the summer of 2021, our family set out on a 5 week epic, adventure road trip across the United States. You can see our complete itinerary and experience below. If you aren’t ready to commit to this long, you can easily break this up into several smaller family vacation road trip itineraries (such as a 2 week road trip USA Rocky Mountains or Utah National Parks).

You could also extend this into a 2 month road trip across the USA by adding more time at each destination or going further south or west. If you wanted to make this into a 1 month road trip (USA) you could leave off the time in McCall, Idaho, or if you aren’t driving all the way from the East coast you would save a few days of driving.

We also have plenty of ideas on how to plan a successful road trip with kids, tweens and teens and lots of information on different destinations .

• How to Have the Best Road Trip with Teens and Kids (find planning information and kid’s road trip essentials)
• 20 Not Boring Things to do on a Car Trip with Teenagers (find fun things to do in the car with kids and teens)

Quick Look at our 5 Week Family Vacation Road Trip

Here’s a quick look at our itinerary. Note that we’re including 5 weeks of travel here since we needed to drive out and back. This is really a 1-month road trip itinerary.

Week l – Drive from our home in New Hampshire west over several long days. Stop to see friends in Wisconsin. Camp at the Badlands and hike. Drive from here to Mount Rushmore and Crazy Horse – camp in Red Lodge Montana. Drive over Beartooth Pass into Yellowstone. Spend 2 days in Yellowstone .

Week 2 – Drive to the Grand Tetons for 3 days to hike and explore. Drive to McCall Idaho via Craters of the Moon National Par k. Spend 5 days at a rental house in McCall, Idaho with family.

Week 3 – leave McCall and do an overnight at Sawtooth and Alpine Lake in Idaho. Drive down for the night to Antelope Island . Rock climb in Cottonwood Canyon. Continue on to Capitol Reef NP for a night and on to Kodachrome State Park for several nights. Hike slot canyons and visit Bryce NP .

Week 4 – Spend 3 days in Zion NP exploring. Drive to Mesa Verde NP for a day. Drive up to Boulder to visit friends. Hike the Flatirons and explore the Rocky Mountains – overnight backpacking trip into the mountains.

Week 5 – camp at Rocky Mountain NP and do day hikes into the mountains for 3 days. Start driving east. We drove pretty much straight home with a stop at some family in New York

Highlights of this Itinerary

• Seeing 8 National Parks
• 2 Overnight Backpacking Trips
• Having our Bikes to Explore near the campgrounds
• Seeing friends along the way
• The variety of landscapes including canyons, mountains, geysirs and more

Complete Details For Your Own Family Vacation Road Trip

This itinerary includes camping and an emphasis on hiking and other outdoor activities. We also started our trip in NH and drove out west and back, but I’m only including the portion of the road trip that starts in the Badlands and ends in Rocky Mountain National Park. If you’re going to follow this itinerary, you will want to adjust your starting and ending locations – the days listed below allow for some extra time to get to the start of the trip and back home at the end.

Day 1 – Arrive at the Badlands in time for sunset and visit some of the overlooks on your way to your campground at Cedar Pass inside Badlands National Park .

Day 2 – Get an early start to see the Badlands in the morning light. Hike the challenging and fun Notch Trail and then explore the Castle Trail (we did this as a point to point as two-person didn’t want to hike so could pick us up). After your hikes drive through the Badlands Loop Road. Stop at the Fossil exhibit for a short walk and then stop along the way at any of the overlooks that strike your fancy. Leave the Badlands and stop off at Wall Drug then drive to your campground for the night near Mount Rushmore. Camp at Sheridan Lake or Roosevelt Inn Mount Rushmore.

Day 3 – Visit Mount Rushmore and Crazy Horse . You need just about an hour at each location. I recommend watching the welcome video and snapping some photos at both these sites. You still have a 7 hour drive, so hit the road and head to Red Lodge. There are lots of places to stay – we camped at Parkside campground, but you can also check out the Red Lodge Inn .

Day 4 – Get an early start (we left by 5:30). Drive over Beartooth Pass. Pack some breakfast and eat on the way up or find a breakfast picnic area once your up there. This is an AMAZING drive so enjoy it! You will descend into Yellowstone National Park just in time to see Bison as you drive into the Lamar Valley. Stop at Mammoth Spring and Norris Geyser Basin on your way to stay at the Old Faithful Inn. You can see old faithful and stay here for the night.

Day 5 – Head out to the Grand Canyon of Yellowstone and hike either the North Rim or the South Rim Trail, drive through the Hayden Valley and visit 1-2 geyser basins. Check out the Grand Prismatic Spring or West Thumb, then drive south to the Grand Tetons. There are many excellent places to stay near the Grand Tetons. We camped at Gros Ventre, but you can also check out Wyoming Inn at Jackson Hole .

Day 6 and 7 – Explore Grand Tetons National Park . Choose one of the longer hikes for one of the days. We loved hiking Cascade Canyon. We also recommend renting boats at Jenny Lake or biking along the trail to Jenny Lake. You can eat in Jackson or Moose.

Day 8-13 – Drive to Craters of the Moon and spend a few hours exploring this unique place. We took a break during the next few days to stay with family. You can either skip ahead to the next section from here or choose a place to explore and set up camp for a few days or rent a house. We stayed in McCall, Idaho , and loved the variety of things to do including white water rafting, hiking, climbing, and biking.

Day 14 – Backpack to Sawtooth and Alpine Lake in Idaho. This is an amazing backpack to Sawtooth, but we recommend staying a little closer at Alpine Lake and hiking up to Sawtooth from there. Stay the night by the water and watch the sunrise the next morning.

Day 15 – Backpack to the car and head south to Antelope Island for the night. We stopped for lunch in Ketchum and then headed right to the campground. Get there in time to see the sunset.

Day 16 – Before you leave the campground, go for a drive, hike or bike around Antelope Island and look for the wildlife that lives here including bison. You are heading south from here to Capitol Reef National Park . You can head straight there or we stopped outside Salt Lake City to go rock climbing. If you get to Capitol Reef in time take a short sunset hike – we explored Grand Wash. Camp right in the National Park at Fruita campground.

Day 17 – Enjoy Capitol Reef in the morning and then drive to Kodachrome State Park. Stop on the way at Peek a Book and Spooky Gulch. You can also take a hike at Kodachrome on one of the many trails. We camped here for 2 nights.

Day 18 – Get an early start and head to Bryce Canyon National Park . Hike down into the Amphitheatre – try the Navajo Trail. Spend the whole day here or head back to quieter Kodachrome for the afternoon and evening. Try hiking or biking at Kodachrome .

Day 19 – Hike Willis Creek Slot Canyon and then drive 1.5 hour to Zion National Park . We stayed in two different places during our 3 nights in Zion. We stayed at Springdale Suites by Marriot and loved the pool. We also camped for a night at Zion Ponderosa Ranch Resort and had a blast playing mini-golf and swimming in the pool.

Day 20 and 21 – Explore Zion National Park. We did the Zion Narrows, Emerald Pools, and did some bike riding. Zion is crowded with a shuttle service so getting an early start here is important.

Day 22 – Get ready for a driving day to Mesa Verde . There are several options of places to stop at along the way including Lake Powell, 4 corners and more. The drive is about 6 hours. We stayed at the Morefield campground.

Day 23 – drive and explore Mesa Verde. If you can book a tour and check out one of the houses. Leave here and drive up to Boulder. We spent the next 2 nights with friends.

Day 24 – Get out and explore the Front Range. We hiked the Flatirons.

Day 25 – head up into the mountains and hike and camp for the night. We stayed at Golden Gate State Park

Day 26 – Backpack into Jasper Lake for the night and camp in the woods at the lake. Get there early as the parking lot does fill up and enjoy a night out under the stars.

Day 27 – Backpack out and then head to Rocky Mountain National Park. We spent 3 nights at the Hermit Park Campground and loved it.

Day 28 and 29 – Explore Rocky Mountain National Park . Make sure you get in some good hikes while you’re here. We loved hiking to Nymph and Emerald Lake and also the longer hike to Sky Pond via Glacier Gorge . Even at the end of August it was cold here, so pack well!

Day 30 – that’s a wrap – we headed east from here but you can head on to your own home or your next destination.

What we Loved About This Family Vacation Road Trip

This road trip was amazing and while our kids are well travelled in general they still hadn’t seen much of the country. This trip pushed them out of their comfort zones and gave them a new perspective. Here are some of the things we loved about our trip:

• Since we drove, we saw parts of the country that weren’t on our list but gave us a fresh perspective on the United States
• The National Parks are amazing and we can’t wait to visit more!
• We loved the time together as a family
• We were able to keep the trip relatively inexpensive by camping, cooking and doing free activities
• We enjoyed breaking up the travel with some stops to see friends
• Our kids were highly motivated to adventure since that was the only option!
• We tried to drive during the middle of the day when it was hot and explore early and late when possible
• It was a very active trip with not much downtime which worked well for us, but might not for everyone

Some of the Challenges of This Road Trip with Kids

• Since we were in a mini-van with lots of adventure gear, it was tight and difficult to get to everything we needed
• We loved having the bikes with us, but the rack on the back meant we couldn’t open the back of the car which was challenging (we also got 8 flat tires on our bikes during one bike ride)
• Balancing time together as a family and time to ourselves

We loved this road trip and are inspired to plan another big US road trip. The United States has so many extraordinary places to see and we can’t wait for our next adventure!

About the Author: Gretchen Stuppy Carlson

A passionate adventurer dedicated to getting families outside and exploring. Gretchen is an expert in adventure travel with 15+ years of experience working in outdoor education and travelling with her own family.

View all post by Gretchen Stuppy Carlson | Website

What's Your Next Adventure?

15 Amazing North Conway Winter Activities

How to Stay in the Black Mountain Cabin NH

Hiking Doublehead Mountain NH: One of the Best 52 with a View

13 comments.

Pingback: 5 Week Summer US Road Trip - Bucket of Bliss

Pingback: A Complete Guide to the Best Road Trips with Teens and Tweens (2022) - Chasing ADVNTR

Pingback: 20 Not Totally Boring Things to Do on a Car Trip for a Teenager - Chasing ADVNTR

Pingback: The 100 Best Road Trip Snacks For Kids and Adults - Chasing ADVNTR

Pingback: Everything you Need to Know Visit to Kodachrome Basin State Park in Utah - Chasing ADVNTR

Pingback: A Badlands National Park Itinerary: The Perfect Way to See the Park in 1-Day - Chasing ADVNTR

Pingback: How to Plan a Trip: The Exact 11 Steps We Use - Chasing ADVNTR

Pingback: Alpine and Sawtooth Lake Hiking and Backpacking Guide (Idaho): Everything you Need to Know - Chasing ADVNTR

Pingback: 7 Things to Know About the Sky Pond Hike via the Glacier Gorge Trail: Complete Hiking Guide - Chasing ADVNTR

Pingback: 11 Epic Things to do in McCall, Idaho in the Summer - Chasing ADVNTR

Pingback: 7 Wonderful Things to Do at Antelope Island, Utah - Chasing ADVNTR

Pingback: 3 Amazing Zion National Park One Day Itineraries - Chasing ADVNTR

Simplify your airport transfer from LAX to Orange County with our dedicated transportation services. Count on our reliable SNA airport transportation for a smooth and timely connection, ensuring a hassle-free travel experience.

Comments are closed.

7 Epic USA Itineraries: Planning The Perfect US Trip

Plan the perfect USA itinerary with this guide. Whether you have one week, 10 days or 1 month, I have you covered. 

Planning a trip to the USA ? The possibilities are endless. 

Do you want to scope the chilled-out vibes of the Southwest, or do you prefer a glimpse of the hustle and bustle in the Northeast? Maybe you’re planning a 1-month USA itinerary where you can see the highlights, or perhaps you only have 10 days in the USA. 

Let’s get a few things straight: with so much ground to cover, planning the perfect USA itinerary can be a tough gig. I travel to the States quite a few times a year, and it’s always difficult to balance wanting to see as much as possible during the course of a trip with the sheer scale of the place. However you plan to visit the USA, you’ll want to plan where to stay, what to do, and choose a few locations you can’t live without. Not to worry, I’m here to help. These travel itineraries for the USA will help you plan a straight-up banging trip so you can kick back, relax, and enjoy the ride. 

USA Itineraries

West Coast Road Trip

Looking to see the best of the USA in 10 days? A West Coast road trip is a bucket list holiday for so many people. – Start driving down the PCH, and you’ll figure out why before your first exit. Start in San Francisco by taking the Golden Gate Bridge south (a bit of a detour, but well worth the vistas). 

On your way down Highway 1, prepare to stop a lot more than you planned. The views are epic, the towns often have their own unique charm, and there are plenty of amazing family-run restaurants (and In-N-Out burgers) you can access with a short detour.

You can take your time over 2 weeks, but if you want to do a 10-day USA itinerary, I suggest starting in San Francisco and choosing 2-3 overnight stays like I map out in this itinerary.

Route Summary

San Francisco >> Carmel-by-the-Sea >> Santa Barbara >> Los Angeles >> San Diego 

Distance: 625 miles (1,000 km) 

Length of Trip: 10 Days to 2 Weeks  

How to Do It: Car 

Highlights of the Trip

San francisco.

When it comes to San Francisco , I like to veer a bit off the beaten path here and spend a couple of days exploring the street art in the Mission District, epic views of the Golden Gate Bridge from the Presidio (a former military post that’s now a national park) and take an urban hike through the sprawling Golden Gate Park. 

Save room for incredible cuisine at the best neighbourhood joint in SF – Nopa . 

Suggested Stay: Argonaut Hotel

Carmel-by-the-Sea

Hit up white sand beaches, secret gardens, and charming boutique shops in this vibrant coastal city just before the famous Big Sur . It’s a perfect jump-off point for exploring the epic coastal hikes in Big Sur and Point Lobos .

Suggested Stay: Carmel Bay View Inn

Santa Barbara

I love the laid-back vibes, excellent beaches, and surprisingly vibrant downtown in Santa Barbara . Check out Sama Sama for excellent Southeast Asian cuisine in a youthful, trendy setting on your 10-day trip out west. 

Suggested Stay: Kimpton Canary Hotel

Los Angeles

The Hollywood Hills, Downtown LA, Santa Monica Pier – whichever part of sprawling Los Angeles in SoCal you decide to stay in, you’ll love every minute of your star-studded stay. 

Be sure to eat all the street tacos you can, shop til you drop, and visit the iconic Venice Beach for the best people-watching and chill California vibes. 

Suggested Stay:   Mama Shelter Hollywood  

Spend a chunk of your California itinerary in San Diego , where you can enjoy a day in the sprawling open space of Balboa Park, hit up Old Town for some handmade tortillas and fiery salsa, and end your evening in the Gaslamp Quarter or North Park for craft beer and nightlife. 

Don’t forget to check out Coronado, Pacific Beach, and Mission Beach for the best fun in the sun.

Suggested Stay: Hotel Indigo

Best of the USA

How can you see everything the USA has to offer in 1 month? I’m not going to lie. You won’t. But you can definitely get a feel for how different each region is with this round-the-map trip throughout the United States. Start in NYC (because why not?) before moving your way west and discovering the Great Plains, Wild West, and American South. Get ready for some of the best cuisine you’ll have anywhere and everywhere, along with some epic hiking, brilliant beaches, and plenty of nightlife on this 1-month USA itinerary.

You’ll need to take a few flights on this journey to fit everything in but plan to hire a car for the national parks portion of this United States trip.

Route Summary 

New York City >> Chicago >> Yellowstone >> Utah’s Mighty Five >> Grand Canyon >> Las Vegas >> Los Angeles >> Phoenix >> New Orleans >> Miami

Distance: 6,200 miles (10,000 km) 

Length of Trip: 1 Month 

How to Do It: Plane and Car 

New York City

Start your trip off in the most iconic city in the United States, New York City. If you’ve never been, you’ll want to check out the bright lights of Times Square, shop along Fifth Avenue, and mosey through Central Park. Walk across the Brooklyn Bridge and shop in Williamsburg before grabbing a slice at Best Pizza.

Suggested Stay: The Wallace Hotel  

Add a stop to this great Midwest city located on one of the iconic Great Lakes – Lake Michigan. Chicago is a great place to shop along The Magnificent Mile, watch a Cubs game at Wrigley Field, and try a local dish like Italian Beef or Chicago-style hot dogs.

Suggested Stay: Thompson Hotel

Yellowstone

Next up is one of America’s great national parks – Yellowstone. Check out the roaming bison, sky-high geysers, and epic hiking trails in Yellowstone National Park.

Suggested Stay: Elk Country Inn

Utah’s Mighty Five

For the most adventurous travellers, you can fit in all of Utah’s Mighty Five National Parks. But if you’re short on time, you can hit Arches National Park before visiting Zion and Bryce Canyon for natural bridges, sandstone and red rock formations and epic stargazing.

Suggested Stay: The Advenire

Grand Canyon

Want to know my favourite national park in the US? Grand Canyon. Visit the massive canyon along the Colorado River and take a hike around the South Rim Trail for the most stunning views. 

If you want a more challenging hike and have the time, Bright Angel allows you to hike into the canyon, but it’s a gnarly trek with 5,000+ miles of elevation change and can be extremely hot. 

Suggested Stay: El Tovar

Visiting the Grand Canyon? Here’s What You Shouldn’t Miss

Now that you’ve had some time in the best national parks in the USA, it’s time to party. Whether you head to the luxury resorts and world-class entertainment along the Las Vegas Strip or want to explore hipster coffee shops and historic hotels Downtown, Las Vegas is a winner on your USA itinerary.

Suggested Stay: Circa Resort & Casino

Head to the Hollywood Hills and bask in the California sun, with a few days in one of the best cities along the West Coast. Los Angeles offers great shopping in areas like Beverly Hills and pristine beaches in Malibu and Santa Monica. 

The (already stellar) food scene has taken off in the past few years, so try local favourites like the 2-Michelin-starred Mélisse Restaurant.

Suggested Stay: The Hoxton, Downtown LA

You can’t leave the American West without stopping by Phoenix for some desert-chic vibes in the Valley of the Sun. I found some seriously cool bars and restaurants last time I was there. 

Check out the Southwestern flavours at Valentine before hiking at Camelback Mountain and seeing a show at the historic Orpheum Theatre.

Suggested Stay: Rise Uptown

New Orleans

Ready to enjoy the best food in the USA? Head to The Big Easy to enjoy heaping plates of jambalaya, the rich and tangy flavours of muffulettas, and, of course, a plate of the famous fried dessert treat, beignets. 

Spend some time people-watching in the French Quarter and catch a jazz show at Palm Court Jazz Cafe for the perfect New Orleans trip.

Suggested Stay: The Pontchartrain Hotel

Want to find the best beaches in the USA? Head to Miami Beach in Miami to explore the white sands, and warm waters in this vibrant Florida city. When you’re ready to explore the city, check out the street art at Wynwood Walls and the vibrant bar scene in South Beach.

Suggested Stay: Esme Miami Beach

Music Trail

Rock and roll, the blues, country, R&B, jazz… you get the picture. Visiting America’s South is full of rich history and culture dating back centuries – and music is a big part of that history. 

You can explore some of the big cities in the South and watch a show at storied theatres, visit iconic recording studios, and maybe catch an impromptu show in a park (check the Musician’s Corner Calendar). Save your appetite, the food in the American South is ridiculously good. Staples like fried chicken, collard greens, mac and cheese, and bread pudding show up often and are usually incredible. 

If you have more time, make stops in small towns along the way, like Tupelo, Mississippi (the birthplace of Elvis), or Jackson, Tennessee, for Sun Studio and the Rock-a-Billy Hall of Fame.

Nashville >>  Memphis >> Clarksdale >> Jackson >> New Orleans

Distance:  630 miles (1015 km) 

Length of Trip: 1 Week

Start your one-week vacation in the USA in Nashville. If you’re a country music fan, you can mosey over to the Country Music Hall of Fame and Museum for a history lesson before seeing a live show at the legendary Grand Ole Opry .

Suggested Stay: The Hutton Hotel

Memphis 

Is there a more iconic rock and roll studio in the USA than Sun Studio? For $15, you can tour the “Birthplace of Rock & Roll,” where Elvis, Jerry Lee Lewis, and Johnny Cash recorded many of their hit songs. 

If you’re not content as a spectator, book a recording session at the world-famous studio. And of course, no music tour of the South is complete without a visit to Graceland. 

Suggested Stay: The Guest House at Graceland

When I think of music in the American South, the Blues immediately come to mind. Clarksdale is home to this unforgettable genre of music, and legends like Muddy Waters got their start right here. The history is very much alive in places like Ground Zero Blues Club and the Delta Blues Museum, where you can learn all about the artists, their stories, and songs.

Suggested Stay: Travelers Hotel

Visit the Mississippi Civil Rights Museum to learn more about slavery, the Jim Crow laws, and the heroes who fought for equal rights and freedom in the American South. 

Suggested Stay: Fairview Inn

End your 1-week USA itinerary in New Orleans. The home of Jazz music, New Orleans features dozens of excellent jazz clubs. I like the idea of stopping by Sweet Loraine’s, where you can check out some of the best jazz music and grab a Po Boy sandwich for a taste of The Big Easy.

Plan your next great travel experience!

Sign up for insider tips straight to your inbox.

Southwest National Parks 

You’re getting the best of the American Southwest with this epic 14-day USA itinerary. Buckle up; this road trip sets you off from Salt Lake City through Utah’s Mighty Five before exploring the deserts and canyons in Arizona and New Mexico . I love this as an idea for a USA itinerary because you learn more about indigenous history and culture and sample delicious flavours of the Southwest. And, of course, you get to tick the most famous national park in the USA – the Grand Canyon .

Arches >> Canyonlands >> Bryce >> Zion >> Grand Canyon >> Saguaro >> White Sands

Distance:  1,3712 miles (2208 km) 

Length of Trip: 2 weeks 

Moab (Arches and Canyonlands)

Between your visits to two of Utah’s Mighty Five, you can bed down in Moab, where you’ll find plenty to do around town. Of course, most of your time here will be spent exploring natural bridges at Arches and hiking around the vast trail system in underrated Canyonlands.

Suggested Stay: Red Cliffs Lodge

St. George (Zion and Bryce Canyon)

Cross off another two of Utah’s Mighty Five when you stay in St. George. Try epic hikes like Angel’s Landing in Zion and explore the hoodoos and rock formations at Bryce Canyon . Visit Bryce Canyon on your way to St. George and return to Zion the next day.

The Grand Canyon is over 1,900 square miles of beautiful red-rock canyons along the Colorado River, and visiting Arizona is the most popular way to see it. 

I think hitting the South Rim along Desert View Drive is the perfect way to see the sweeping canyons from above along several different viewpoints.  

Suggested Stay: The Grand Hotel at the Grand Canyon  

Saguaro National Park

Next up on your trip around America’s Southwest is Saguaro National Park . 

Where else can you see cacti the size of redwoods? Ok, they might not be that tall, but the candelabra-shaped thorned beauties stretch over 40 feet high, and a hike along King Canyon or joy ride along Bajada Loop Drive are the perfect ways to take in the beauty of the desert.

Suggested Stay: The Ritz-Carlton, Dove Mountain

White Sands National Park 

Last but not least, you’ll want to head to White Sands National Park for one of the most unique landscapes you’ll see anywhere on your USA itinerary. Take the 13-mile Dune’s Drive loop to bask in the rolling snow-white sand dunes that stretch as far as you can see. 

Suggested Stay: Home2 Suites

East Coast Itinerary

Planning a USA East Coast Itinerary over 2 weeks? Check out this non-stop tour of the iconic cities and hidden gems along the Northeast United States. 

One thing I love about this trip is that it’s the rare USA itinerary in 2 weeks where you can rely on trains and public transportation to get to most destinations. 

Along the way, you’ll see the nation’s capital, the Big Apple, and the scenic coastline of Maine. You’ll want to hire a car for the final stretch, but the drive is gorgeous – especially if you’re lucky enough to see the trees change colours in Autumn. 

Washington DC  >> Annapolis >> Baltimore >> New York City >> Hartford >> Boston >> Portland

Distance:  600 miles (1,000 km) 

Length of Trip: 1 Week 

How to Do It: Train and Car

Washington DC

You can’t plan a US travel itinerary over two weeks on the East Coast and not hit the nation’s capital. 

The Washington Monument and Martin Luther King Jr. Memorial makes the National Mall well worth a visit, but underrated gems like Blind Whino – where local artists collaborate and host weekly live events are a fun way to experience DC like a local. 

Suggested Stay: The Normandy Hotel

If you want the chance to truly chill out during your 2 weeks in the USA, there are plenty of charming towns – especially in the Northeast. Annapolis is one of my favourites, and the boutique hotels, seafood restaurants, and cobbled streets will transport you to another time. 

Suggested Stay: Historic Inns of Annapolis

Catch a baseball game at Camden Yards, eat as much blue crab as you can in one sitting, and visit the Civil War landmark Fort McHenry National Monument and Historic Shrine for a piece of American history. 

Suggested Stay: Ulysses

New York City 

The food, the culture, the museums…NYC is the city you need to pencil into any United States itinerary. I love Manhattan, and it’s probably the most walkable city anywhere in the USA. Checking out the East Village for the best restaurants and bars, visiting Central Park or The High Line when you need a bit of fresh air, and exploring the bustling urban marketplace, Chelsea Market , are a few things you won’t want to miss. 

Suggested Stay: The Wallace Hotel

The small city of Hartford, Connecticut, is the perfect stop on your USA itinerary, with some standout landmarks like Mark Twain’s former residence, the beautiful gardens at Elizabeth Park Conservancy, and the large collection of European and American artwork at Wadsworth Atheneum Museum of Art .

Suggested Stay: The Goodwin

Take the train up to Boston and explore the world-class universities like Harvard, dine on some fresh seafood, and grab a New England-style IPA at Trillium Brewery, one of the best craft beer spots you’ll find on your USA itinerary.

Suggested Stay: The Revolution Hotel

Visit this charming New England town and photograph the iconic lighthouses, eat freshly caught lobster at Portland Lobster Company , and take a whale-watching tour if you’re around in May or June.

Suggested Stay: Portland Harbor Hotel

California Itinerary 

Rent a nice set of wheels for this 21 day USA itinerary, you’re going to rack up more than a few miles. Start off in San Diego and drive your way up the coast, stopping by some of my favourite locations along the way. Get your hike on in the Santa Monica Mountains before exploring charming towns like Pismo Beach and Sausalito on your drive north. 

But you’ll also see everything California offers away from the Pacific Ocean, like Yosemite National Park , Lake Tahoe, and Wine Country. Top Tip: You can always plan a great 1 week trip in the US in California, so feel free to just tackle part of this itinerary.

San Diego >> Santa Monica  >> Pismo Beach >> Sausalito >> Sonoma County >> Lake Tahoe >> Yosemite

Distance:  1,000 miles (1,610 km) 

Length of Trip: 3 weeks 

Start off in San Diego , where you can hit up the sandy shores of Coronado and Pacific Beach before an evening out exploring bars and restaurants in Hillcrest or Downtown San Diego.

Santa Monica

Before you head to some of the best hikes in Southern California , explore Santa Monica’s beaches and nightlife. I love hanging out at the Santa Monica Pier and riding the Ferris Wheel by the beach before strolling through the shops and restaurants on the lively 3rd Street Promenade.

Suggested Stay: Shutters on the Beach

Pismo Beach

Once you reach Pismo Beach , you’ll fall in love with the small-town beach vibes in this Central California coastal gem. I don’t blame you if you want to just hang out at the state beach and pier, but you can also explore wineries in nearby Paso Robles, check out a monarch butterfly grove, or relax at Avila Hot Springs. Your call.

Suggested Stay: The Cliffs Hotel and Spa

Just across the Golden Gate Bridge from San Francisco is the charming coastal village of Sausalito. Explore the artsy town full of charming boutiques before digging into a seafood lunch at Scoma’s. You can’t visit Marin without checking out the redwoods, so reserve a spot for hiking in Muir Woods National Monument.

Suggested Stay: Cavallo Point

Sonoma County

You can’t explore Nor Cal without making a stop for wine tasting in Sonoma County. Santa Rosa is a great home base to explore amazing wineries – Patz & Hall and Gundlach Bundschu Winery are two of my favourites. Russian River Brewing Company is a great option if you’ve had enough wine tasting.

Suggested Stay: Vintners Resort

Where else can you paddle out in crystal clear waters overlooking snow-capped mountains on a sunny day in California? Not many places sum up a grand Alpine Lake experience quite like Tahoe.

Suggested Stay: Edgewood Tahoe Resort

Yosemite National Park

No trip to Northern California is complete without a visit to Yosemite . Make your way into the valley, park, and look up in awe at Half Dome, El Capitan, and the iconic Yosemite Falls.

Suggested Stay: The Ahwahnee Hotel

USA Itinerary: Practical Tips for Planning Your Trip 

• Weather can play an enormous role in your USA itinerary. Check the forecast before you leave, and pack for all seasons if you’re planning a longer itinerary in any season but summer.
• Summers get extremely hot in the USA. Bring lots of suntan lotion, lightweight clothing, and wide-brimmed hats. 
• There are a lot of hotel options in the USA, but the most popular locations fill up fast on the weekends and in the summer. Book ahead for the best rates and the most options. 
• If you’re visiting from outside the USA, apply for an Electronic System for Travel Authorization online well ahead of your holiday. 

Read All USA Country Guides

Add these to Your USA Itinerary

• 55 Things You Should Have on Your USA Bucket List  
• Ridin’ Along the West Coast – A Step by Step Itinerary  
• The Ultimate California Road Trip

Love This? Save and Share on Pinterest

I’m Julianna Barnaby - a professional travel writer and geek extraordinaire. I started The Discoveries Of to help you to discover the best of new destinations from around the world.

Discovering new places is a thrill - whether it’s close to home, a new country or continent, I write to help you explore more and explore differently.

Related Posts

The Ultimate Texas Road Trip to Prada Marfa – A Sample Itinerary

Where to Stay in San Diego: The Best Areas + Hotels For Your Trip

The Denver Mural Guide: Exploring Denver’s Street Art Scene (Complete With Self-Guided Tour + Map)

The Best Time to Visit Death Valley National Park

Follow me on Instagram for travel inspiration, tips, and guides.

The Only 1 Month Korea Itinerary You Need

While I’ve already written ways to spend two weeks in Korea , I thought I’d make one giant Korea itinerary guide for a month.

I do think one month isn’t nearly enough to see all of Korea, but I’m obviously quite biased ;).

I decided to make this itinerary a bit faster than I’d normally travel just so I could fit in as much as possible. If you only can ever come to Korea once, this should help you feel like you saw everything you could see.

Quick Korea Travel Tips

• Getting in: If you’re coming from abroad, you’ll most likely fly into Incheon International Airport (ICN). It’s about an hour from Seoul and extremely easy to take the subway to get to your hotel. However, you can also get a taxi or book a transfer beforehand.
• Stay Connected: While Korea is pretty well connected wifi wise, I always recommend getting a SIM card! Even better, Korea offers e-SIMs! You can buy ahead and not even have to take out your normal SIM.
• Getting Around: All major cities have some sort of subway system and there’s a pretty robust bus system all around the country even in more rural areas. Download KakaoMap for the most up to date information. In between cities, you can take the train or bus. For trains, I always use Let’s Korail to buy tickets ahead of time as they can sell out. For buses, I usually just show up to the terminal and buy tickets, but my friend told me you could use TxBus , Kobus , or Bustago to order online.
• Language Help: While major tourist points are pretty okay with English, I’d say the rest of Korea you’ll want to have some sort of translation app on hand. And I recommend learning Hangul at least a little bit so you can read. Papago is better than Google translate for Korean.
• Travel Insurance: Korea can be expensive if you wind up in the hospital! I recommend getting either World Nom a ds or SafetyWing . I personally have an annual plan with Allianz.

For more advice, check out my Korea travel tips and my Korea trip planner .

The Ultimate Korea Itinerary Guide for 1 Month

Fly into: incheon international airport.

Assuming you’re coming from abroad, you’re most likely going to fly into Incheon Airport ! Incheon has spoiled me because it’s seriously one of the best airports in the world , even if the “ice rink” is a lie. Seriously, this place even has arrows on the ground to make sure you’re going in the right direction to the subway!

Days 1 – 4: Gangwon Province

So, you’re not actually going into Seoul just yet. Nope, you’re going to the Northeast coast to Gangwon-do! In fact, this is the northernmost province in South Korea.

You get there in one of two ways:

• Take an airport bus from Incheon to Sokcho ( Check the schedule here )
• Use the subway to first go to Seoul Station. Then take a train from Seoul Station to Gangneung Station. Forom there take a bus from Gangenung to Sokcho (Airport – 1 hour, KTX – 2 hours, Bus – 1 hour)

Stay: By the beach! Top spots include Heavenmark , Sokcho Beach’s House , or Sokcho & Guesthouse

Day 1: Sokcho

I’d base myself in Sokcho (속초) for this Gangwon trip. This is the main spot for anyone visiting the area as it’s a gateway city for Seoraksan National Park and has quite a few scenic things to do on its own.

Take the rest of the day to get over jet lag and sleep because your schedule is about to be packed .

Day 2: Hike or visit Seoraksan

Spend the day hiking Seoraksan , one of Korea’s most important mountains. Or you could take the cable car up, I won’t judge.

Day 3: Sea Train

Take the sea train and stop off at some of the main beaches in Gangwon, including Gangneung , Donghae , and Samcheok . Wander around, relax on the beach, and just enjoy. A good day to rest if you did actually hike Seoraksan. If you do want to do some sightseeing, you could do this Gangneung Taxi Tour .

• Seasonal Options: Goseong Lavender Farm in June, surfing and SUP at Surfyy Beach, or any of the ski resorts in winter

Days 5 – 9: Seoul

Time for one of the coolest cities in the world! I’m not kidding. I’ve been to so many cities in my travels and Seoul still tops the list for me. The biggest thing you should know is that it’s massive . Much bigger than what you’re expecting and unless you want to drain your bank account taking taxis, you’re going to want to give yourself more time than you think to get around via the subway or bus.

Getting back: For your time in Seoul, I recommend staying in Insadong . It’s the best location for everything you’ll want to do below! To get to Insadong from Sokcho, you’ll want to take a bus from Sokcho Bus Terminal to Seoul Express Bus Terminal. From there you can take the subway to the closest station to your hotel.

Stay: I’ve personally stayed at the Grid Inn which is in SUCH a good location. If you want to experience a hanok, try Charm Hanok Guest House .

Day 5: Seoul – Insadong

Once you’ve arrived to Seoul and dropped your things off at your hotel, just walk around and enjoy Insadong! This is probably my favorite neighborhood of Seoul because it’s the most historic area.

If you’re up for some walking, spend the afternoon strolling through Bukchon Hanok Village. It’s really such a pretty place as it’s where all the traditional houses are located! Be sure to go to the main view point, which is someone’s house, and see over the tiled roofs to Namsan Tower. Another good stop is the cool cafe, Green Mile Bukchon ! Also my favorite incense shop, Granhand has a location here.

When it comes time for dinner, hop over to Gwangjang Market to sample all the delicious Korean food you can. If it sounds familiar, it’s because the market was featured on Netflix’s “Street Food” series.

Day 6: Storybook Day Tour

There are a few different day tours you can do from Seoul , but I personally love the nearby storybook-esque visits ! You could take the subway to Gapyeong and do the Gapyeong shuttle bus or you can book a tour that will take you to each of the spots throughout the day.

I’ve personally only visited via a tour. Most will take you to the Garden of the Morning Calm , Nami Island , and Petite France . Sometimes the tours have one other stop, but I think doing all three is a good amount for one day without feeling overwhelming. Check this tour for prices + availability

Day 7: Changdeokgung & Deoksugung

To start, there are five official grand palaces of Seoul , and on this trip I have you seeing three of them. It sounds like overkill, but I promise these three are particularly different. Gyeongbokgung is the largest of the palaces (more below) while Changdeokgung is known for its Secret Garden and Deoksugung is much smaller and known for having some European style buildings mixed in. I promise they’re worth it!

On this day, you’re going to start off early and go straight to Changdeokgung . It opens at 9, and you want to make sure you get tickets to see the Secret Garden. If you visit during the fall, the line will be long! This whole palace area will take at least 2 hours to see everything.

For lunch and the middle of the day, you can go around Insadong (there’s plenty of good restaurants to pop into) or you can venture over to Seoul University to see all the restaurants and cafes near there.

In the afternoon, head to Deoksugung . Visit the palace grounds themselves before going up to the observatory to get a cool bird’s eye view. This is a particular must if you visit during peak fall foliage season.

Day 8: Full Day Tour to Suwon Hwaseong or the DMZ

Use this day to tour either the DMZ or Suwon Fortress . Both will take you the better part of the day and will showcase an interesting part of Korea’s history. Book a tour to Suwon here or book a DMZ tour here

Seasonal Option: Hike Bukhansan for its fall foliage.

Day 9: Gyeongbokgung + Cheonggyecheon

Start off early and head there to see the changing of the guards and then head in to walk around. Gyeongbokgung is massive , so you’ll probably spend a good few hours there. You can also stop in and visit the National Folk Museum of Korea.

From Gyeongbokgung, walk along Cheonggyecheon , Seoul’s very pretty manmade river. Depending on when you’re visiting, they sometimes have really nice exhibits. You’ll also pass through Gwanghwamun , which has the big statue of King Sejong and usually some sort of event going on.

From Cheongchyecheon, you can walk over to Jogyesa .

Days 10 – 16: Jeollanam-do and Jeollabuk-do

Time for my favorite provinces of Korea! Jeollanam and Jeollabuk (from here on just combined into Jeolla) are a deeply underrated part of the country. I think they’re home to some of the most incredible scenery and, most importantly, the very best food.

I know, I know. I’m biased because this is exactly where I lived for three years, but I promise it’s worse spending at least six days of your month in Korea here.

To get to Jeonju, the first stop in Jeolla, do one of the following:

• Take a KTX, and it’ll be about 90-minutes from Yongsan Station
• The slow train will be closer to 3 hours from Yongsan Station
• A bus will be around 2 1/2 – 3 hours from the Express Bus Terminal

Day 10: Jeonju

Stay overnight in Jeonju’s Hanok Village and get a proper hanok sleeping experience. I personally loved Ssamok Ssamok Hanok Guesthouse when I stayed overnight.

The main thing to do is to enjoy the hanok village. Compare it to Bukchon and let me know which one you like better, I’m personally more partial to Jeonju’s version.

Depending on how active you want to be, you can also visit Deokjin Park , especially if it’s around summer with the lotus pond, and/or visit Jeonju’s Mural Village .

The biggest thing to try here is bibimbap. I was a big fan of 종로회관  (Jongno Hoegwan) but you can’t really go wrong no matter where you go here. At night, climb up to Omokdae (오목대 ) to get a cool view over the village.

Seasonal Options: If you’re visiting in the fall, don’t go straight to Jeonju! Get up super early and take a bus to Naejangsan or Daedunsan ! You can hike or take the cable cars up *cough*. From either of those places, you can get a bus back to Jeonju.

Day 11: Namwon

Of course, I have to add Namwon . You can either stay another night in Jeonju and just do a day trip here or stay overnight. Either way, take a bus instead of the train as the bus terminal is right in town while the train station is a little ways out of town.

If you’re an avid hiker, then I’d plan to hike to Jirisan’s peak or one of its many trails, like Baemsagol or Guryong Falls .

Otherwise, wander around Gwanghallu , along the river, and eat . People say Jeonju has the best bibimbap, but I think Namwon does ;)

Seasonal Options: If you’re here in May, hike Baraebong instead to see all the royal azaleas.

Day 12: Damyang

Damyang is home to Korea’s famous bamboo forest! This should be another full day trip as you’ll be able to see Meta Provence and the metasequoia trees as well. Trust me, the bamboo forest is huge .

If you’re staying in Namwon, a reader just let me know there are now direct bus routes from Namwon to Damyang that take under an hour – hurrah! (Just check Bustago for times – Kakao didn’t seem to have a bus route option listed).

Day 13: Suncheon

For the rest of your time in Jeolla, Suncheon is the best spot to stay in both because it has a ton to do but also because it’s very easy to get around. I recommend staying around the train station; Sunshine Divine Hotel looks like the nicest option.

Once you’ve dropped off your things, head for the Suncheon Bay Wetland Reserve ! If you get in on time, you can hike up and see the sunset over the bay, and it should be gorgeous. The hike is around an hour maybe less and pretty easy if you’re in shape (only a little hard if you’re not). I’ve done it at least… 4 or 5 times in tennis shoes and skirts!

Day 14: Boseong Green Tea Fields

From Suncheon Bus Terminal, you can get to Boseong in about an hour. It’s an easy day trip that will have you trekking around the tea fields, eating all the green tea flavored food, and, if you have time, soaking in a green tea bath near Yulpo Beach. Just check the last bus back from Boseong to Suncheon so you get back in time.

Day 15: Suncheon

Take a breather in Suncheon and visit Naganeupseong , a pretty fortress village about an hour by local bus from downtown Suncheon. It’s a nice afternoon trip, so sleep in and go around golden hour. There’s also the very fun Open Film Location if you want to see what Korea was like in the 1950s-70s.

Alternatively, you can hike between Seonamsa and Sogwangsa if you still have a bunch of energy.

Day 16: Yeosu

Yeosu is one of Korea’s main port cities, and it’s only 30-minutes away from Suncheon via train! There’s a ton to do but the city is pretty spread out, so you’ll want to splurge on some taxi rides to make it more efficient.

The first thing to do is to go over to Hyangiram on Dolsan Island, a really gorgeous seaside temple that’s worth all the steps, I promise! From there go to Angel Alley to see all the murals and get a coffee at either Nangman Cafe or Cafe Duu. Both have pretty views out to the main Yeosu bridge.

Make your way back into town and enjoy Odongdo , a small island near-ish to the expo. If you’re feeling adventurous, there’s a gejang restaurant near Odongdo where you can try raw crab. I personally LOVE it, but it’s not the best for weak stomachs.

Days 17 – 20: Busan

Time for Busan ! If Seoul is NYC , Busan is LA but nicer. Actually back when I was planning a month-long trip to Korea pre-pandemic, I was planning to spend a solid week in Busan to get to know it better. Most of my trips have been day trips or short weekend trips from Suncheon/Namwon.

To get to Busan from Suncheon, your best bet is to take either a train or bus. They both should be between 2 and 2 1/2 hours. From there you can use the subway to get to your hotel.

Stay: Book your hotels in or around Haeundae to be the most central. Can’t go wrong with Park Hyatt Busan . MS Hotel Haeundae and Ekonomy Haeundae also have nice ocean views.

Day 17: Busan

The first day I’d go to Haedong Yongungsa and then hang out around Haeundae . If you have time, visit Spaland and experience the granddaddy of all jimjilbangs in Korea.

I highly recommend making sure you’re at Haeundae for sunset. It’s gotta be one of the prettiest sunsets I’ve seen in Korea.

Day 18: Gyeongju

Do a day tour of Gyeongju ! There’s SO much to see in this town as it’s got a ton of historical sites related to the Silla dynasty . If you really want to do DIY this, I’d rent a car because everything is super spread out and I remember the buses not being reliable (no idea if it’s gotten a major update). Otherwise we wound up paying a taxi driver to stay with us the whole day. You’re much better off just booking an actual day tour from Busan, like this one.

Day 19: Day Trip or Enjoy Busan

On this day you have to options depending on how you’re feeling. If you do want to rent a car, this is a good day to do a day trip to Tongyeong ! Otherwise, it’s quite hectic trying to get around with the public transportation and/or taxis.

Otherwise you can do a nice hike up Geumjeongsan , relax at either Haeundae or Gwanghalli all day, or see some of the islands close to Busan.

Seasonal Option: If you’re visiting during cherry blossom, get your butt to Hwagae or Jinhae at the crack of dawn!

Day 20: Busan

Start the morning over in Gamcheon Culture Village . It’s less busy in the mornings and easily one of my favorite places in all of Korea. The colorful buildings are so super charming and it’s just the perfect area to spend a few hours walking around.

From Gamcheon, you can head over to Nampodong and check out the different markets and alleyways. It’s also close to Jalgachi Fish Market for lunch and/or dinner.

Days 21 – 27: Jeju

Now for my favorite place in all of Korea – Jeju! For such a small island, you’d be surprised by just how many things there are to do . Depending on how you want to explore the island depends on how you’ll figure out where to stay. I’ve been a few times and while the bus system is really good, I do think if there’s one place to rent a car it’s here. If you do rent a car, you can just base yourself in one place the whole time. Otherwise I’d split my stays between the west and east so you’re not spending too much time in public transport

Getting to Jeju: From Busan, you’ll want to fly to Jeju! Don’t even think of taking a ferry. The best one is in Mokpo, which is 4-5 hours from Busan, and even from there it’s 4 hours by ferry. By the time you figure it all out you’ll wish you’d just flown.

When it comes to where to stay in Jeju , my favorite area is the Northeast. PLAYCE Camp is a really cool spot with sort like its own town center vibe. I also LOVED Baco Home 3 & Slow Mansion which is right next to the smaller port for Udo and by a beach that’s basically private with a view of Seongsan from afar. Another favorite was this super rural stay called Romantopia in Southeast Jeju. You really can only stay at these latter two if you have a car, though. Otherwise finding the bus or taxis will take up half your time!

Day 21: Northwest Jeju

If you’re going the bus route, stay around Hyeopjae for two nights. This is a little under an hour from Jeju Airport. For super budgeters Hyeopjae Guesthouse is nice and on the beach and if you can splurge a bit, Dyne Oceano Hotel looks lovely.

For your first day in Jeju, just enjoy the coast! Before you check in, you can actually stop off at Aewol which has a beautiful sea walk as well as some very cute cafes. If you’re feeling up to it, you can even do some sea kayaking.

Once you’re settled in Hyeopjae, you’ve GOT to go to Donato’s for pizza. It’s on par if not better than some slices I’ve gotten in Italy.

Day 22: Hike Hallasan

Hiking day! Hallasan is still one mountain I’ve yet to hike simply because it was either too hot when I went to Jeju or I just didn’t have time. It’s the tallest mountain in the country, and you’ll want to set aside the whole day to do it. Stop off at a convenience store to pack up some kimbap and snacks for the hike.

Day 23-25: Southwest Jeju + Seogwipo

For your next leg you’ll want to go towards Southwest Jeju and stay somewhere in Seogwipo. All the luxury resorts and hotels are in this area if you’re looking for a splurge. When I did my first trip, I stayed at this really cute hostel called Lemon Tree Guesthouse 2 , and I’ve always wanted to stay at Hidden Cliff Hotel & Nature.

There’s a lot to see in this area, which is why I recommend spending 2-3 days here. Some of the things you can see include Camelia Hill , O’Sulloc Tea Fields , the three major waterfalls, Yeomiji Botanical Garden , and Daesungeolli Cliffs . Seogwipo is the next largest city next to Jeju City but way cuter and more charming. There are also lots of cute cafes sprinkled around this area!

Day 26-27: Northeast Jeju

Next, head over to the east coast! Like I said the Northeast is my favorite area but you could also stay somewhere along the central eastern coast and still get around pretty easily. Spend one of these days moseying your way all around the even tinier island of Udo and at least one sunrise and sunset around Seongsan Ilchulbong! Sunrise is a must and if you go at the right time you’ll see the hanyeo emerging from the morning catches. Sunset, though, is my favorite time. Instead of hiking up to the peak, walk away along the water and look at it from afar. Truly magical.

Some other things to do include Bijarim Forest, Manjanggul Cave, and way more!

Days 28 – 30/31 – Seoul

From Jeju, you can easily (and fairly cheaply depending on when) fly up to Seoul! I’d stay around Hongdae just because it’s right on the same line as the airport, and it’s a fun area to end your trip on.

Stay: RYSE , L7 Hongdae , and Hotel Baroato are all near subway exits and lovely

Day 28: Seoul – Hongdae

Since Hongdae caters to three different universities (Hongik, Yonsei, and Ehwa), it’s bustling with energy and fun things to do. If you want to relax a bit, I’d spend the day at the Trick Eye Museum which holds the X-rated Love Museum, the actual Trick Eye area, an Ice Museum, and CaFace. There’s also the very fun Yeonnam-dong area which is where a ton of trendy cafes in Seoul are located.

You can also take the subway one stop over to Sinchon and Ehwa to visit those areas as well! Ehwa and Hongdae have really fun shopping if you’re hoping to indulge in some Korean fashion.

Day 29: Seokchon + Lotte World

If you don’t mind the trip across the city, you can squeeze in a trip to Seokchon Lake, Lotte World , and Seoul Sky Observatory. This is especially a must-see during cherry blossom season.

Day 30-31: Any Last Minute Visits or Shopping

Use your last day or two to do any last minute sightseeing or souvenir shopping. I know I don’t include Namsan Tower, so this is a good day to go up there!

Last Day: Fly Out of Incheon

If you’ve stayed in Hongdae, it’s a very easy hour ride to get to the airport from Hongdae Station. If for some reason you can’t use the subway, you may want to book an airport transfer .

Hope this guide helps you plan the perfect, month-long Korea itinerary! There’s so much to see and do, it might have pained me a little that I couldn’t recommend all of it.

SHARE THIS ON PINTEREST

want to support?

I’m always grateful when friends and readereach out wanting to support There She Goes Again . Truthfully, I’m just happy my posts are helping people travel! If you’d like to support the blog, here are some companies and brands I’m affiliated with. Simply click the links, and I receive a small commission at no extra cost to you!

• Booking (Hotels)
• Sixt (Car Rental)
• Klook (Tours)
• Viator (Tours)
• Get Your Guide (Tours)
• Trazy (Korea Tours)
• Tiqets (Entrance Tickets)

BLOGGING / SOCIAL MEDIA

• WPX Hosting (Advanced)
• Bluehost (Beginners)
• Lezé the Label (Clothing)
• Printfresh (Pajamas, etc)
• Promptly Journals
• Encircled (Clothing)
• Girlfriend Collective (Athleisure)
• Birkenstock (Sandals)
• Bookshop (For Local)
• Amazon Books

49 Comments

Hello! Thanks so much for the helpful guide.

We have 3 weeks in South Korea, arriving late May. I am not sure we can see both of Jeolla province and Gangwon province in this time… What do you think of the itineraries below? We like walking, food, and happy to take buses/trains where we can. Interested in how tricky it would be to go from Gangwon -> Busan as this isn’t in your plan above.

Option 1 (Gangwon): Arrive in Seoul -> 4-5 nights in Seoul -> bus/train to Gangwon province -> 3-4 nights in Sokcho -> bus/train south to Busan (a whole day?) -> 3-4 nights in Busan -> fly to Jeju -> 3-4 nights in Jeju -> fly to Seoul -> 2-3 nights in Seoul

Option 2 (Jeolla): Arrive in Seoul -> 4-5 nights in Seoul -> bus/train to Jeolla province -> 3-4 nights in Jeonju -> bus/train south to Busan -> 3-4 nights in Busan -> fly to Jeju -> 3-4 nights in Jeju -> fly to Seoul -> 2-3 nights in Seoul

Hi! These both sound great! I’d personally go with Option 2 but I’ll admit I’m not as familiar with Sokcho as I am with Jeonju and Jeolla is my favorite province, so I may be biased. However, I’d still vote Jeolla just because it’s more countryside vibes vs coastal like Sokcho. And you’re already going to get the coast with both Busan and Jeju!

Hello! So glad to find you!

I am heading to Korea for 2 months (basically March and April 2024). I have to say that this one month guide is perfect! I will go more slowly but love how you have helped minimize the travel times. I hate wasting my vacation going back and forth from place to place.

I like nature, beautiful but easy – medium hikes, and cultural/artsy things. If you could add a few days here and there to your itinerary, where would you add? I’ll probably spend about 2 weeks in Seoul before I am done and can do some day trips.

I also do not want to rent a car or use a tour company unless there is a don’t miss thing that really requires a car or tour.

Anyway, appreciate hints AND really really really appreciate this sort of itinerary tool.

Oh such gorgeous months to go!! Definitely add more time in Jeollabuk + Jeollanam – this itinerary is really full on for those provinces. For two months, I’d also build in at least a day or two for jimjilbangs and rest – maybe even a little pampering with a hair appointment or facial. You’ll also be here for the cherry blossoms, so you’ll want to spent a time visiting those areas! Take a day for Hwagae Cherry Blossom Festival and a day for Gwangyang’s Maehwa Festival. Plus Gurye’s Sansuyu and Namwon’s Baraebong Royal Azalea hike… Spring is SUCH a gorgeous time to be here!

Hi Sam! I hope you are doing well. I just want to thank you for all the South Korean guides, trips, and tricks you shared. I have fun doing one month of solo traveling in Korea with it. I’m used to planning, but It was my first time flying solo, so I tend to plan thoroughly, and your blog has been a big help! I went there from last October to November, enjoying the autumn and getting the first snow there before returning! All the destinations are nice, and the food recommendations are delicious (The only sad thing is a lot of restaurants in Namwon are closed due to renovation! I didn’t get to try their naengmyeon) I love Suncheon the most. I got lucky and got to visit Suncheonman for free! Because their 2023 expo was a big success, the government showed its appreciation to the people by opening it free for one week before closing it until 2024. It’s a must visit for everyone visiting Suncheon! It was very very very very very beautiful. Also, have fun hiking in Seoraksan in autumn! I only have the energy to hike Ulsanbawi, but It will be a memory I will never forget. Once again, thank you, and have a great 2024! :)

Hi Jenn, this makes me so happy to read!!! I’m so glad you enjoyed your trip, it sounds like the perfect introduction to Korea! I’ll be visiting Namwon again later this year, so I’ll have to check on those restaurants!

Hi Samantha!

How are you?

I booked a summer 3 weeks for South Korea (big kpop/kdrama fan) but I booked with little knowing of what you can do. I am now reading up on it and feel that I might not love it as much as 3 weeks’ worth.

I booked a non-refundable stay in Seoul for my first 3 nights limiting me. Is there any advice you can give?

So far, I’ve liked the look of Seoul, Jeju Island, Busan but wondering where else I could go? Is there a direct way to get to Busan from Jeollabuk-do? Finding it quite hard to use the suggested Kakao maps (not in English as far as I can tell) and Google maps is useless. Or if you can suggest an itinerary for 3 weeks that’s quite public transport friendly?

I like to get out in nature, very much a scenic person but don’t mind unusual things like the poop cafe etc or anything else quite quirky! Not too much into history so I am wondering if I’ll enjoy the palaces.

There’s so much to do and see in Korea that I feel like even 3 weeks isn’t enough, but I’m obviously biased. Jeollabuk-do is a huge region but I imagine you’d at least want to go to Jeonju. There are both direct buses and trains that go. However I do recommend you use the Papago app to help you translate (you can screenshot maps and upload).

3 nights sounds like a great first time in Korea – how do you think it’s limiting you? I’d start with 3 days in Seoul and then end with 2-3 days in Seoul. You can do day trips, check out each neighborhoods, find filming locations, etc.

Jeju is my favorite place in Korea so I could easily spend a week there but you’d want at least 4-5 days especially if you want to do any of the Hallasan hiking.

I think the palaces and whatnot are gorgeous even if you’re not interested in their history but I guess that’s up to the person. Summer is VERY hot in Korea and Seoul, so plan wisely because there’s not a ton of shade.

This whole one month itinerary is designed to be public transport friendly, so I would pick from that or look at my other posts to see if anywhere else catches your fancy.

If I have 4 days for GANGWON PROVINCE, JEOLLANAM-DO AND JEOLLABUK-DO, how would you recommend I split it? I’m thinking 2 days for Sokcho/Seoraksan, not sure how to spend the other 2 days.

Will be going in late November too, so will be closer to winter

Ok, so just so you know if you go in late November, it’s not closer to winter, it IS winter. That’s when I went and I remember wearing heavy knit sweaters and my down jacket the whole time. There might be some leaves but fall foliage season is usually over, and it’s just very cold. It might even be ski season by late November, though I’m not sure. If you do want to stay up there, other good parts in Gangwon are Odaesan National Park, Donghae, and Gangneung. If I remember correctly Samcheok is supposed to be a cute village, but I haven’t spent enough time in Gangwon to know all the spots first hand!

If you go to Jeollnam & Jeollabuk, I have two options:

2D2N Jeollabuk, 2D2N Jeollanam – 2N in Jeonju – 1 day for Jeonju Hanok Village and Jeonju in general, 1 day for Namwon & Jirisan National Park – 2N in Suncheon – 1 day for Suncheon (lots of options) and 1 day for Boseong, Damyang, or Yeosu

1D1N Jeonju, 3D3N Jeollanam – 1D1N for Jeonju and the Hanok Village – 3N in Suncheon (use as base) – 1 day each for Boseong, Suncheon, and Damyang

Hope that helps!!

I’m planning to go to Seoul in early November, would you recommend going Sokcho/Seoraksan straight after then?

I was originally planning to go Seoul, Jeju, Busan, then the other cities. But if it makes a difference in terms of seeing fall leaves, and not as cold weather, I’ll change to Sokcho/Seoraksan first before Jeju and Busan. Or does it not make any difference?

Wrote this reply before but it’s not showing up here

From memory, fall foliage in the Gangwondo peaks in mid-October. If you’re trying to catch the leaves changing colors, in early November, your best bet is to head along the west coast (Naejangsan, Mudeungsan, etc) or to Jeju. Even looking at the forecast from last year, other places saw their peak the last week of October while the west coast areas were still colorful into the first week of November.

This is phenomenal!! Thank you so much. I love reading all of your pages – I am going to try and read them all before we go. We have booked to visit in mid march to go for 21 days! I am so excited. I have two questions below:

1. We have a late night flight arriving at Incheon airport at 8:30pm, where would you recommend we stay in Seoul if we want to head to Sokcho early in the morning? 2. Do you recommend booking things early in advance, we would like to be the most cost efficient and also stay in the best hostel/hotels?

1. Hmmm how are you planning to get to Sokcho? Bus or train? 2. I think you should be ok regardless. It never hurts to book early but don’t feel stressed that you have to. Cherry blossom season gets a little busier in Seoul, so if there’s anything you want to do around then, I’d book earlier, but I’ve never had any issues doing or booking anything last minute during March or April!

Hey Samantha! I’m planning on going to Korea for a month in September. You mentioned you planned this a little faster than you would normally travel… do you think it would be wise to split some of it into more trips to Korea and instead spend some more time in some places? If so, where would that be?

Hi Cosima! If you can, I would 100% slow it down and split between multiple trips. Give yourself a few extra days in each location – honestly you could spend 2 weeks in Seoul alone and still have left you want to see and do, especially if you factor in day trips.

I am preparing a one month trip to korea and found your article : its so well planned and includes all the places i wanted to go so ill probably follow it step by step ! I just had a question regarding the suitcase, how did you do ? Did you just travel light with a back pack ? Or did you leave your suitcase in some sort of locker ?

Hi! Usually when I travel to Korea I do a carry-on and a backpack for my laptop and camera (currently I use Paravel and Troubadour Goods, to give you an idea of the size). I’ll tuck in a tote bag and smaller bag/crossbody for daywear.

It’s pretty easy to navigate with that set-up! If I don’t have my hotel room, I usually find a locker to put my things in. (All major Seoul subway stations have them and nearly all train stations I’ve been to have them too)

Hi :D First: Thanks for the amazing blog! You put so much information into one page – its amazing!

I’m going to South Korea in about 2 weeks for 22 days. Which parts would you say can be skipped as I will not be able to do the full month like you describe it here. I have to admit that I did not do a ton of research before booking the flight. It was more a spur of the moment kind of thing :P

Thanks a ton!

Hi Claudia; I hope you enjoy your trip!!! I would cut out Gangwon and Busan altogether OR cut out Jeju.

Hey this is awesome. Thanks! I know this is really subjective depending on accommodation types etc but do you have a rough idea of budget? If you stayed in hostels/ mid range hotels. Any suggestions of a rough budget would be awesome

Hi! I would say anywhere from 50,000 KRW – 100,000 KRW a night will get you a decent mid-range or budget hotel or nice Airbnb. To give you an idea of the higher end, I stayed at some nicer hotels in Seoul last spring and I remember it coming out to around 250,000 KRW per night. Hope that helps!

What a amazing itinerary! I am planning to go there from 30 April to 29 May, and look here and there on the several website, I am glad to found your blog. Thank you so much for to share with us your trip, full of interest point. Did you use some pass for all the transfert?

Hi Valeria; I’m glad it was helpful! I’ve never used a pass besides a T-money card for subways and local buses. You can easily by all inter city buses and train tickets at stations!

Going to South Korea May 1-22. Planning to be in South Korea including Seoul May 19-21 for Lantern Festival – other than that pretty flexible. I am over 75 years old woman independent traveler. Although I am a good walker, I never was a hiker, particularly if hilly. Greatest interests are in people, culture, music, food ,history and much less so in scenery . Also I prefer not being on tight schedule. Moderate budget – with some splurges if worthwhile.

What modifications in your itinerary you would recommend for this senior woman?

Besides taking out the hikes in this itinerary, I’d be sure to take it easy and give yourself plenty of time. Korea is more mountain than flat land, so the whole country is basically hilly and even places that aren’t advertised as a hike will likely involve some incline.

I love this blog because it gave me an idea of where to visit when I travel to Korea around Spring time next year. Planning to stay there for at least 1 to 2 months. I just want to know if there is a need to declare and submit this one don’t itinerary to the Korean Embassy as part of their requirement?

Also, how many weeks or months in advance should we submit the application for Korean Visa?

Thanks in advance!

Hi Nina! What country is your passport? I know for Americans, we just have to have a K-ETA which just needs to be done a few days in advance (it can take anywhere from 15 minutes to 2 days for approval). We don’t need an itinerary or anything!

Hi! Thank you for your interesting article. We took a lot of inspiration from it to our trip. We are currently in Suncheon and we wanted to go to the bamboo forest in Damyang. But it seems like a 2 to 3h trip to go from there suncheon to damyang. How did you manage to go there by public transport?

Thank you for your answer! Have a great day!

Hi! If memory serves, it should be under two hours if you do Suncheon – Gwangju (~1hr) and then Gwangju – Damyang (~30mins). It goes pretty quickly and buses are frequent.

Hi Mirana! I’m seeing the same thing trying to go from Suncheon to Damyang…. Did you guys do this trek, and approx how long did it take you each way? 3-4 hrs round trip in a day seems pretty hectic (especially when you consider doing the transfers itself and getting back to the hotel) – if you did it, do you think it’s worth it?

Sam – may be worth editing this guide and suggesting it as a daytrip from Namwon. There’s a direct bus and it only takes 45min each way!

Good to know – there wasn’t a direct bus route when I lived in Namwon so I had no idea one existed now!

Great blog, do you by chance have a map with these points of interest on the map? I guess I can create my own but was wondering if you already had one. I’m not familiar with all these places

Hi! I don’t. The map I recommend – KakaoMap – doesn’t have an integration feature like Google Maps does.

hii!!! this looks like an awsome plan!!! is it also ideal if im going to this in the winter (mid jan to mid feb)?? im doung this as a part of a 4/5 months trip to the far east!

Hi! I just re-checked, and yes I’d say it does! Winter hiking is quite popular in Korea, so most of the popular trails should be okay to hike. If you like skiing, you may just want to re-adjust so you can spend more time in Gangwon!

This post guide got me sooo excited to visit South Korea!! I am especially grateful that you included places outside of Seoul too because I would love to see the countryside! I plan on making a one-month trip to SK in October 2023, hopefully, so I’ll be revisiting this guide. Thanks again!!!

Amazing!! I’m glad you found it helpful. October is one the BEST months to visit :D!

Hi , My dream country is south korea. And I really wanted to visit there.😄 I wanted to ask that I want to experience the weather where little breeze blowing and the sun is not so bright. And the surounding is green.. Can you help me in which month should I visit. And I love your guide. 🌈✨

Hi! Such a great country to love :) I’d say for that kind of weather, late September-mid October is your best bet or late April – mid May. Depends on where you are, of course The more north, the longer it stays cold and the more south, the longer it stays warm!

Love this! I’m going to South Korea for 6 weeks in the winter (i know not so smart lol)!! I’m so excited+terrified. This is my first solo travel and I would really like to explore more than Seoul. however I still book one Airbnb located at Seoul for my whole trip 😂 probably not the best idea, but I got the place pretty cheap with good reviews. I’m terrified for my life to be homeless in a foreign country. I’m thinking maybe I can do 1-day trip outside Seoul and commute back. Good idea, bad idea? 😅

Yay! Omg you couldn’t pick a better place for your first solo travel! I DEFINITELY recommend getting out of Seoul — that’s a long 6 weeks even though there’s a ton to do in the city. It’s pretty easy to arrange ski trips to Gangwon-do (most slopes will have shuttles from Seoul). It’s also super easy to hop on the KTX or an intercity bus to one of the towns nearby. Jeonju is such a fun spot, and I’m partial to my old hometowns of Suncheon and Namwon!

Wonderful post! Thanks so much – it’s really helpful.

Thank you for posting this as I will be staying in South Korea for a month in March/April. I have booked a Airbnb for in Seoul for the whole month but would love to see other parts of S Korea. This post has helped with figuring a few other cities. I was looking in what would be the best option for traveling with the country but not just limited to just 3-5 days. Any suggestions on what would be the best option for seeing other cities? Any other must see cities in S Korea?

Soooo many places! Korea is really easy to travel in and since it’s so small, nothing is really *that* far away by train or bus. Jeju is literally an hour flight from Seoul, so if you’re feeling really crazy, you could do a whirlwind day trip there.

Check out the other Korea posts on my blogs to get more ideas :) Might help you to narrow down where to go.

Awesome thank you! Question is the KTX/ or korail (maybe the same) is there a monthly purchase ticket or is just the 3-5 days? Or is it better to buy the reservation tickets as you go?

Hmm I’ve never bought multi day KTX tickets. I don’t take the KTX that often since the slower trains are still quite nice and the only difference you see in time is for longer distances (for example Suncheon to Namwon is a matter of maybe 20 minutes but the ticket is 2,000 KRW vs 8,000 KRW).

I don’t think you really need them based on the prices I’m seeing on letskorail. I’d just buy tickets as you need them.

This is amazing! How much would you say this would all cost?!?

Hmm good question! I’m not a good budgeter, so I’ve never broke down the costs. I’d say if you’re being careful with money, but you’re not totally on a shoestring budget, you could do about $50 USD (55-60,000 KRW)/day including hostels, food, and transportation. Let’s say you spend $20/night on a hostel bed, put aside $15 for transportation (some days might only be $5, but longer trips between cities might be more expensive), and $15 for food (maybe if you’re eating light for 2 meals and spending a bit more for one big meal — a good meal should be around $10 or less if it’s a mom and pop Korean place), that should even out.

If you’re super-super-super shoestring budgeting, you could maybe get by on $20-30/day. That would mean a lot of $2 kimbap and ramen, cheapest transportation options, and couchsurfing or sleeping in saunas.

Leave a Reply Cancel reply

Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed .

IN-DEPTH ONE MONTH CALIFORNIA ROAD TRIP ITINERARY ~ BUDGET CAMPING EDITION

9 Jun 2022   ||    UNITED STATES

The outdoors is forever calling in California; with record-breaking trees and deserts, jaw dropping coastlines, volcanoes, and high-altitude lakes; it is one of the most astoundingly diverse places on Earth. If you want to experience all of this in a single, budget trip, a California road trip with camping is the solution.

Have you already visited the popular California sites like Yosemite, the Pacific Coast Highway, San Francisco, and Los Angeles? Maybe you just crave a quieter, outdoor-oriented road trip; if so, then this is the itinerary for you. It includes lesser known but equally as remarkable destinations where the crowds are (often) thinner, but the adventure is just as breathtaking.

CALIFORNIA HIGHLIGHTS

RECORD BREAKING TREES  – TALLEST: REDWOODS; LARGEST: SEQUOIAS; OLDEST:  BRISTLECONES

TALLEST SAND DUNES  – THE EUREKA DUNES IN DEATH VALLEY AT 207 M

HIGHEST MOUNTAIN  – MOUNT WHITNEY IN THE SIERRA NEVADA RANGE 4421 M (14,505 FT)

CRAFT BEER  – EVERYWHERE (SERIOUSLY)

DEEPEST LAKE – LAKE TAHOE, WITH A DEPTH OF 501 M

NUMBER OF NATIONAL PARKS  – NINE, THE HIGHEST OF ANY STATE IN THE U.S.

LOWEST POINT  – BADWATER BASIN IN DEATH VALLEY AT 86 M BELOW SEA LEVEL

SEARCH CAR HIRE IN THE U.S.    

THE CALIFORNIA ROAD TRIP ITINERARY

Honestly, there must be enough ‘Cali Road Trip’ posts for everyone in the world to have one each, so this itinerary takes a different, more ‘outdoorsy and quiet’ perspective instead. 

Each location has camping suggestions. If you would like more general camping information, check out our tips for national park camping . Every location mentioned on the itinerary has hotels, motels and lodges available if that is your preference. 

This itinerary can be cut into segments and include the more famous California locations along the way. See the coloured routes on the map below.

Included are some suggestions for things to do around the major cities that involve less ‘city’ too. 

TIP:  pop into the visitor centre for any parks you visit. The rangers are always super knowledgeable and can provide maps, suggestions, and updates on road and trail conditions. 

TIP:  as this itinerary is heavy on National Parks, it is worth purchasing an ’ America the Beautiful ’ pass that provides free entry to all lands managed by the National Park Service. Individual parks cost $10-$30 for entry and the pass costs $80 per car per year. It’s a no-brainer.

CALIFORNIA ROAD TRIP MAP

THE BEST TIME FOR A CALIFORNIA ROAD TRIP

As the climate and terrain varies so much across California, there is no perfect time to visit the entire region. It also depends on what type of weather you are comfortable camping in. I have done the above road trip itinerary several times, always between May – October. My favourite months are September into October. Here are some things to consider:

The southern itinerary (in orange on the map above) is better towards the wintertime; the green northern route is better either side of the summer months. 

As a camping trip, it is important to have three-season gear , almost all year around, due to the high elevations. To see what we use, check out our lightweight backpacking and camping gear . In the wintertime, it will be almost impossible to camp in the mountains without specialist four-season equipment.

Southern California , especially inland, is scorching hot in summer. If you intend to do any extensive hiking, avoid the warmer months. Choose the direction of your trip to coincide with the weather. Ensure the desert segment is done in the coolest time of your chosen month(s).

Crowds are greatest in most places during July and August. Shoulder seasons can still be busy in some popular regions, like Yosemite, Tahoe and Joshua Tree. Winter is by far the quietest (apart from the southern California deserts). Peak summer can be extremely challenging to acquire camping reservations and permits for too.

There is the risk of forest fires after the summer season. The National Forests shut, permits were cancelled, and campgrounds closed during our 2021 trip. Visibility can be reduced as far south as Joshua Tree and further north than Tahoe during particularly bad years (although awful, the smoke makes for epic sunsets).

May – June is an excellent choice for this road trip, but some higher elevations can still have snow and the Tioga Pass access to Yosemite is sometimes shut until late June (requires a long diversion).

CALIFORNIA ROAD TRIP COSTS

CAMPSITE:  $10 – $25

HOTEL/MOTEL:  $75 – $200

BEER AT A BAR:  $3 – $8

GAS PER GALLON:  $5 – $7

CAR RENTAL PER DAY:  $60 – $100

A LARGE PIZZA:  $10 – $20

COFFEE:  $1 – $5

CHEAPEST LITRE OF RUM WE FOUND:  $12

KEEPING TO A BUDGET ON YOUR CALIFORNIA ROAD TRIP

Camping keeps the costs down, as does cooking for yourself at campgrounds. A campsite costs between $10-25 total a night for up to six people.

Car hire (if you do not use your own) is expensive, especially at the moment due to the pandemic. Avoid paying for Satellite Navigation and just use Google Maps – it works perfectly in the United States. Also check with your rental company that you are not being charged automatically for tolls.

Gas is also particularly pricey cross-country due to the  ongoing war in the Ukraine, and California is the most expensive state. Using apps like GasBuddy can help find the cheapest gas station in your area.

Restaurants and bars are not cheap in California, but there are some places that are worth splurging on (especially the California craft beer scene!).

Groceries are more expensive than in Europe, but not excessively so. Walmart is cheapest; Trader Joes and Whole Foods are nicer.

Spirits/Liquor is the cheapest way to drink from a supermarket, although basic beer like Keystone is cheapish too.

As mentioned above, buy your National Park pass to save on entry fees.

CAR HIRE FOR THIS USA ITINERARY

We always rent our vehicles all over the world, including our recent trips in USA, with Discover Cars . They’re often the most affordable, plus they paid out immediately on an insurance claim we made when our car took some heavy damage in Sicily. We fully recommend them.

If you book through the link below, we make a small profit, at zero cost to you, which helps us write these posts with no advertising! We only endorse products and companies we *actually* use regularly. For more information, read our position on affiliates .

TAKE A LOOK   →    BOOK CAR RENTAL  

IN THIS SECTION

Northern California – The Trees and Mountains Itinerary

SAN FRANCISCO

REDWOODS NATIONAL PARK VIA AVENUE OF THE GIANTS

DETOUR – CRATER LAKE

LAVA BEDS NATIONAL MONUMENT

Lassen volcanic national park.

DETOUR – YOSEMITE

MAMMOTH LAKES VIA MONO LAKE

Big pine to lone pine.

Northern california

This route traverses the northern half of California and begins in San Francisco. It can be done alone or combined with the southern deserts itinerary. The trip winds and twists through unique forests, alpine lakes, volcanoes and the Sierra Nevada mountains, all while avoiding the Disneyland/Yosemite crowds.

No California road trip is complete without San Francisco! Here are some suggestions that keep you outdoors and slightly away from the crowds.

Marin Headlands: this is a great option if you like to spend time outside the city. The area has beaches, sweeping views, hiking, and camping. Rodeo Beach is great for a picnic and there are views of the Golden Gate Bridge throughout the area.

Muir Woods: if you continue north past Marin headlands for around 12 miles on the 101 and 1, this National Monument has beautiful redwood trees and is a lovely quick stop with six miles of hiking trails. 

Palace of Fine Arts: before you leave the city, check out this relic of the 1915 world’s fair. The beautifully designed complex is a fantastic place to take a wander plus it’s pretty photogenic (and free). You can find it just off the 101 towards the Golden Gate Bridge, near Crissy Field and the Presidio area (also worth a stop). On the opposite side of the 101 are several beaches with alternative views of the bridge, including Baker and Marshall’s Beach.

CAMPING NEAR SAN FRANCISCO

Kirby Cove has a particularly fun campground if you can reserve a spot (try to get site 1, it’s competitive!). The highlight is the view of the Golden Gate Bridge and city at night – read more in our comprehensive guide of Kirby Cove campground . There are three other campgrounds in the Golden Gate Recreation Area, the most accessible being Bicentennial campground. All others involve hiking in. All require reservations. 

Heading to Marin Headlands from the Airport means passing through the centre of San Francisco and over the Golden Gate Bridge (in the non-toll direction!). Be aware of the toll in the southbound direction heading into the city. It costs around eight dollars, check up-to-date information on paying the fees .

Suggested number of nights: 3

REDWOODS VIA AVENUE OF THE GIANTS

Leaving San Francisco northbound, the first thing you notice is the thinning of the crowds. Relative to the Pacific Coast Highway heading down to Los Angeles, this route is so peaceful. It takes you up the California coast to the border with Oregon to hang out with the world’s tallest trees. 

This leg of the California road trip takes you to multiple sites where you can visit these magnificent, mist-topped trees and have some epic camping alongside them. The national park encompasses a cluster of state parks, starting just above Eureka and following the coast up to the northern boundary with Oregon. 

Avenue of the Giants in Humboldt State Park: On your way north after Fort Bragg (stay overnight here if you need to cut the drive in half), you have the option of checking out Avenue of the Giants. This is a 31-mile road through some of the most impressive redwood groves with walks, fishing, swimming, and picnic areas. If you want to explore the area in more depth, stay overnight at one of the three campgrounds available in Humboldt Redwoods State Park (no entry fee, camping fees apply).

Redwoods National Park: With the tallest redwood in the world towering at 379 feet tall, many often have their heads in the clouds. To get the most immersive experience in this park, hike some of the 170 miles of mostly easy trails, bike some of the 40 miles of coastline and keep your eyes peeled for bears and other wildlife.

CAMPING IN REDWOODS NATIONAL PARK

There are four developed campgrounds and seven backcountry ones within Redwoods National Park. 

Jedediah Smith is my personal favourite campground, surrounded by old growth redwoods which soar above your tent and make you feel miniscule. I also like Gold Bluffs Beach Campground; it is lovely, adjacent to a beach and surrounded by hills. Be aware that the access road is unpaved so your hire car insurance will be invalidated. Reservations  are recommended all year round for campsites.

It is a long-ish five-hour drive to the Fort Bragg area where it is possible to stay overnight on route to Redwoods, or camp at Humboldt Redwoods State Park.

Taking route 1 is the most scenic option and I would suggest this over the 101, but it depends on how much time you have. This route takes you along the Pacific Coast Highway and has tonnes of beautiful stops to stretch your legs along the way. I’ve done the entire journey to Redwoods in a day before along the 1, skipping Fort Bragg, so it is doable (but way too long to be fun). 

After Fort Bragg, it is two hours to Humboldt Redwoods State Park and another two hours to Redwoods National Park. 

The coastline is stunning but sometimes moody so be aware it can get a little bit damp and cold. Bring a jacket.

Suggested number of nights: 2-3

OPTIONAL DETOUR - CRATER LAKE NATIONAL PARK

Although technically not in California, if you have time on your road trip, do not miss Crater Lake National Park. It’s the deepest lake in the United States situated inside a dormant volcanic crater.

The park is a three-hour drive from the Redwoods area. There are two campgrounds. I have stayed at Manzama campground which is large with decent facilities and reservable for July, August and September. If you want a real treat, stay in Crater Lake Lodge on the edge of the volcanic rim. It’s expensive and only open from May through October, but the views are outstanding (book a year in advance). 

Suggested number of nights: 2

This park, near the border with Oregon, is perched on the north face of one of the largest volcanoes in the Sierra Nevada area. Often, in national parks you must take an escorted tour for any cave-type activities. Here though, you can roam and wander through tubes made from lava all on your own. There are quite a few and are split into easy, moderate and challenging. It makes for an exciting (and budget) stop on your California road trip.

CAMPING AT LAVA BEDS NATIONAL MONUMENT

There is one campground which operates on a first-come first-serve basis and is on the cheaper side at $10. Backcountry camping here is free if you do not need facilities.

The national monument is a four-hour drive inland across northern California, through sprawling pine forests and winding roads. The caves themselves are dark and cold, so make sure you have a decent torch and warm clothes.

Suggested number of nights: 1

California's National Park Entry Fees - why you need a pass

YOSEMITE:  $35 (3 or 7 days)

SEQUOIA & KINGS CANYON:  $35 (7 days)

JOSHUA TREE:  $30 (7 days)

DEATH VALLEY:  $20 (7 days)

CHANNEL ISLANDS:  Free

REDWOODS:  $5 day use (state park fees)

LASSEN VOLCANIC:  $30 (7 days)

PINNACLES:  $30 (7days)

Despite having national park status, this place is astonishingly quiet. For some reason it passes under the radar of most California road trip tourists, and I’ve never visited when it’s been even the slightest bit busy. 

The area is centred around Lassen Peak, a volcano that you can see from numerous angles in the park. The hiking opportunities are fantastic with masses of geological and hydrological features – think Yellowstone without the crowds. 

One of the most popular hikes is Bumpass Hell which leads to the largest hydrothermal area in the park. There are many other trails in this park too, leading to remarkable features such as bubbling lakes and waterfalls. If you’re up for an achievable challenge, take on Lassen Peak itself which shows off views of the Devastated Area, a region destroyed by an eruption in 1915. If you’re not able to hike far, there are stunning blue lakes, meadows, and hydrothermal features next to the main road throughout the park.

CAMPING AT LASSEN VOLCANIC NATIONAL PARK

There are a several campgrounds to choose from; the most developed is Manzanita. It is $26 a night, so on the upper end of the camping budget for this road trip, but the sites are spacious and right next to Manzanita Lake. It has reservable and first come first serve sites, plus a few cabins.

Lassen is an easy two-hour drive south of Lava Beds National Monument on this California road trip. Be aware of the altitude – most of the park is over 6000 feet and Lassen Peak itself is over 10000 feet. This means it can get a bit chilly overnight so pack sensible camping gear. In the winter, the main road is not ploughed so check the website for access and conditions.

Okay, so this entry on the California road trip itinerary sneaks into Nevada (the lake intersects the boundary between the two states). About two thirds of the lake is in California so that’s how we can justify it! It’s also not that quiet (super busy in summer) but on a northern California road trip through the Sierra Nevada mountains you can’t miss it. Tahoe is also the start of the incredibly scenic California route 365 which stretches all the way down to Death Valley.

Tahoe is a spectacular high-altitude lake, doubling as a world class ski resort in winter and a beach and water sports haven in summer. I’ve never visited in winter, so this itinerary entry is more focussed on outdoorsy stuff in spring, summer, and fall. We’ve always wanted to go skiing there though!

THINGS TO DO IN LAKE TAHOE

The best beaches are, in my opinion, on the Nevada side.  There’s even a nudist one if you’re into that! The nicest ones take a bit of walking to get to and others are state parks so have a small fee for entry. Check out Secret Cove, Hidden Beach, and Creek Beach (clothing optional although I hear the authorities are cracking down on this?). 

Emerald Bay State Park is impossible to miss on the California side. It is a stunning, beautiful azure blue and a fantastic place for water sports (you can kayak or paddleboard to the little island in the middle!). Be warned, it gets very busy and there is minimal parking. Sometimes people just stop on the side of the road. Don’t be one of those people – get there early.

The Heavenly Gondola in South Lake Tahoe delivers remarkable views from the top of Heavenly Mountain. Here you get views of the entire lake, weather permitting. There’s a lodge, observation deck, activities, and food. Be warned – it is pricey. Coffee is mind-blowingly expensive, activities cost a fortune and the gondola ride is ski-pass rates. Unless you already have your ski pass paid for, you must really want those views to fork out the cash. You can buy tickets online or from the village kiosk.

OPTIONAL STOP - RENO, NEVADA

This California road trip route can take you through Reno, NV if that is your jam, so there is an opportunity to stop there. Reno is a cheap, elderly version of Vegas (in our opinion) and is worth a little time if you are all natured out or need to stock up on supplies. Lodging can be moderately cheap here so it’s a great place to grab a shower and a comfy bed for the night after a camping marathon.

CAMPING AROUND LAKE TAHOE

There are various camping locations all around the lake perimeter, but my favourite one is General Creek in Sugar Pine Point State Park on the California side – average campground, amazing location. It’s a 13-minute drive from Emerald Bay which means you can get there early! Be careful of bears; always use the bear lockers provided.

It is a straightforward 3.5-hour drive from Lassen to South Lake Tahoe, where most of the accommodation, restaurants and facilities are. In South Lake Tahoe, you’ll immediately see the border between the states – the Nevada side has giant casinos! The north of the lake is far quieter if you prefer that.

OPTIONAL DETOUR: YOSEMITE NATIONAL PARK

This detour is only possible if you are travelling in summer as the Tioga Pass to Yosemite is shut seasonally (it is above 10000 feet!). If it is open though, the drive is beautiful. If you’ve never been to Yosemite before, this might be a good optional stop – do not go without a plan though. Accommodation can be tricky to secure and the park is jam-packed during summer. Consider using the shuttle service YARTS to avoid traffic congestion.

Camping in Yosemite is exceptionally competitive, so reservations are essential. Unless you get particularly lucky with first-come first-serve campgrounds you will not find anything at all during summer. There are occasional cancellations online so check regularly – we have obtained reservations this way. The campgrounds are nicest outside of the valley – often more spacious and without fire restrictions.

If you cannot get a campsite, consider Housekeeping Camp instead. It’s a bit like camping but in basic structures and costs a fair bit more so doesn’t sell out as quickly.

Other accommodation options include the lodges inside the park boundaries, such as The Ahwahnee Hotel and Yosemite Valley Lodge. These are beautiful but very expensive.

Suggested number of nights: 3-4

A renowned ski resort in winter, Mammoth Lakes transforms into an exhilarating summer destination full of outdoor activities like fishing, camping, backpacking, hiking and biking. There are so many routes of various difficulties around the high-altitude lakes – the Welcome Center has maps and details for each. Mammoth has over 300 miles of trails in total – it is an outdoor adventurer’s dream. 

Devil’s Postpile National Monument , a wall of basalt columns 60 feet high (like the Giant’s Causeway in Northern Island) is worth a trip from Mammoth Village.

Mono Lake is a great place to take a break between Tahoe and Mammoth but don’t count on swimming! It is a saline lake (2.5 times saltier than the ocean) and is great for bird watching and short walks. It has these crazy calcium-carbonate towers which look super alien!

OPTIONAL DETOUR - BODIE GHOST TOWN

Bodie Ghost Town – a California State Historic Park preserving an old gold-mining town. The settlement ‘boomed’ when small amounts of gold were found in the hills around Mono Lake in 1876 and grew to encompass around 2000 buildings. By 1880 though, the population began to decline and by 1915, Bodie was first described as a ghost town. It costs $8 per adult without an annual California State Park Pass and is reached by a turning off the 365 which ends in a three-mile dirt road. If you are renting a car this road may invalidate your rental insurance, but many tourists do it with no difficulties.

CAMPING AROUND MAMMOTH LAKES

Mammoth has a lot of car camping options. Lake Mary is my favourite developed campground – the views are lovely, the location is central and there are exceptional facilities. Another beautiful campground is at Convict Lake , which I think might be the prettiest lake of all! Be aware that this area can get busy, and campgrounds can fill up in summer. Reservations recommended.

The drive from Tahoe to Mammoth is under three hours and goes directly via Mono Lake (and the turn off to Tioga Pass for Yosemite). At Mammoth, check in with the Welcome Center to confirm the state of the roads if there is any uncertainty around the weather. Most of the places you will visit are above 6000 feet in this area – be prepared for the weather and altitude.

During summer, you will need to get a shuttle to Devil’s Postpile National Monument from Mammoth Village which costs $8.

Big Pine and Lone Pine in the Inyo National Forest are not at the forefront of most to-do lists for a California road trip, but that would be an error. With the Sierra Nevada Mountains as a backdrop, the area is stunning, there’s loads to do and it isn’t all that busy. 

There are too many hiking possibilities to list for this post. Highlights include the John Muir Trail , which cuts through the area on route to Yosemite and the Big Pine Lakes ; a priority for any backpacking enthusiast. Hiking Mount Whitney is another very popular activity – it is the highest mountain in the contiguous United States at 14,505 feet and should be on any hardcore hiker’s itinerary. All these activities require permits – check out recreation.gov for more information.

The Ancient Bristlecone Pine Forest in the White Mountains is another focal point of the region (I have a tree obsession). At over 4000 years old, these are the oldest living trees on Earth and absolutely floor me every time I see them. There are several hikes, some more family friendly and accessible than others (all above 10,000 feet so can be a bit exhausting).

The scenery around Lone Pine has been used as the location for hundreds of films, such as Django Unchained, Gladiator and several Star Treks. The Museum of Western Film History provides a fascinating overview of the town’s involvement in the film industry and is well worth a visit. 

Manzanar National Historic Site is also an important stop that gives an overview of the Japanese internment camps during World War two. Manzanar was one of ten detention centres in the United States and held 10,000 Japanese Americans.

CAMPING AROUND BIG PINE AND LONE PINE

There is an absolute tonne of camping – too many campgrounds to list. To look through them all, check out the Inyo National Forest site. My favourite campground is Big Pine Creek (perfect for the Big Pine Lakes hike), followed by Whitney Portal and Lone Pine (both great if you are hiking Mount Whitney).

They’re all decent and facilities are generally good – check the website if you are after something specific. They cost in the region of $20-28 and I would recommend reserving a site , especially in summer.

The drive from Mammoth (which is also part of Inyo National Forest) is only around two hours to Lone Pine. Highway 395 is a lovely drive parallel to the Sierra Nevada mountains and the little towns along the route are full of quirky restaurants and places to stay. Take your time on this part of the road trip, it’s beautiful!

Suggested number of nights: 2-4, depending on hiking choices!

Southern California: The Desert Itinerary

DEATH VALLEY NATIONAL PARK

DETOUR – LAS VEGAS, NEVADA

MOJAVE NATIONAL PRESERVE

Joshua tree national park.

ANZA BORREGO DESERT STATE PARK

OPTIONAL DETOUR – SAN DIEGO AND LOS ANGELES

PACIFIC COAST HIGHWAY

PINNACLES NATIONAL PARK

southern california

This segment of the California road trip continues from Lone Pine into the deserts of southern California. This section can be done separately (Los Angeles is a good starting point) or combined with the trees and mountains section above to make one large loop. These have some of my favourite camping backdrops on Earth.

I could write for days about Death Valley .

There is so much to do. The giant Mesquite Flat Sand Dunes; astonishing views from Dante’s View and Zabriskie Point; the lowest point in the U.S. at Badwater Basin; a 600-foot volcanic crater only 300 years old; the ‘geological rainbow’ called Artists Palette; more Canyons than you can count. These are just some of the sites you can reach with a normal low-clearance car. 

This itinerary only provides an overview and I strongly suggest you plan your trip using the National Park Service website (with some assistance from Google Maps). It gives you up-to-date weather and road conditions along with seasonal guidance on what to expect. The visitor centre at Furnace Creek is a particularly good one, and during summer, check the enormous thermometer outside for the temperature!

OPTIONAL DETOUR - RHYOLITE GHOST TOWN

Rhyolite, an abandoned mining town which at its peak had a population of around 5,000, has been unoccupied since 1920. It has some seriously quirky artwork, remnants of the old town buildings and a pretty weird house made of bottles! There are no tourist traps or entry fees, and I personally felt a curious sense of isolation. It is 35 miles from Furnace Creek and a perfect stop off on route to Las Vegas if you head that way.

CAMPING IN DEATH VALLEY

Campground selection is seasonally dependent.

The most central campsites are Furnace Creek, Sunset and Texas Springs, which have an elevation between sea level and several hundred feet below. This makes them exceptionally hot during the summer. I’ve stayed at them all during this season; they were empty – the benefit of uncomfortable temperatures (we also did not have to reserve in advance or pay).

In winter , reservations are available and recommended. There are also first-come first-serve sites available (all open campgrounds are FCFS in summer).   

In summer , if you don’t fancy overnight temperatures in triple digits, check out higher altitude campgrounds that are cooler (but busier). There are five in total, none take reservations and four are free. Several need a high-clearance vehicle to access. Check the official website for more detailed information (including elevations) for all Death Valley campgrounds .

O ther options for accommodation include a nice lodge in Furnace Creek if camping seems a bit much.

Death Valley gets hot. I have only ever been in July, August and September (because I’m just a glutton for punishment apparently) and can confirm this. Be prepared – it does not cool down much either (often over 100 F overnight). Camping can be a sticky, uncomfortable experience. The winter is prime season to visit but be aware – other people know this too, so you won’t be alone. 

If you visit in summer, pack extra food and a few spare gallons of water. This seems like overkill, but your car could break down, your aircon could give-in, you could get caught in a flash flood that sweeps all the roads away (these have all actually happened to us in Death Valley). 

Death Valley is unforgiving in summer and people do die.

The number of nights you choose to stay will depend on your car too – there are some seriously cool things to do if you have a decent off-road vehicle (or are willing to rent one with suitable insurance).

Fill up on gas before you enter the park. There is a gas station in the park at Stovepipe Wells but it is justifiably pricey.

OPTIONAL DETOUR - LAS VEGAS

If you need supplies, a nice restaurant, pool, or comfy hotel room, then Las Vegas is great for a stopover before continuing your California road trip around the deserts. It is a two-hour drive from Death Valley and has a bunch of outdoor activities worth doing while you are there (it’s not all casinos!). Check out Red Rock National Recreational Area and if you want a challenge, climb Charleston Peak (this is a nice respite from the heat during summer).

Tip to keep costs down : only stay in Las Vegas on weekdays. The price tag for hotels often triples (or more!) on Friday and Saturday. Also watch for those sneaky resort fees that can double the price of your room (currently loving the new Virgin Hotel just off strip for having free parking, no resort fee and free WIFI). For more, check out our Las Vegas money saving tips .

We often camp through the weekends when in Las Vegas, generally in the Mojave Preserve or Death Valley , to avoid these costs.

Sandwiched between the two main interstates in the area is the huge Mojave Preserve, encompassing a harsh, moon-like desert landscape. Depending on hiking preferences and season, you could easily only spend one night here, just pass through and see the main sites. However, with a four-wheel drive vehicle or a few days backpacking (no permits required!) you could take far longer. The Mojave has some wonderful campgrounds, singing sand dunes, the best Joshua tree forests (better than Joshua Tree National Park!), and some quirky installations, like the Mojave Road Mailbox.

CAMPING IN MOJAVE

On the I-40 side of the Preserve, Hole in the Rock is a cool little campground that we regularly use. It’s pretty open but has amazing scenery and is off a paved road (so no worries about clearance). It is also budget-friendly at $12 a night. At an elevation of 1341 metres (4400 feet), the temperatures are excellent in summer. There is easy access to some of the better hikes in the area, including the popular Rings Loop.

Mid Hills is the other campground in the Preserve but does not have paved access. All campgrounds are first-come first-serve.

Call into the Visitors centre in Kelso (Kelso Depot Visitor Center on Google Maps). There’s loads of leaflets and information on the things to do here. Update: this visitor centre is closed until Spring 2023, use the Hole-in-the-Wall one instead. 

The region is unpopulated; apart from a few other cars passing through, you are not likely see many people. 

This is another area, like Death Valley, that is more accessible with a high clearance vehicle. However, on this California road trip itinerary, you do not need one. Just driving through the preserve is spectacular, with scenery that makes me think of the moon.

There is no gas in the preserve, fill up before in Baker, Cima or Primm on the I-15; Ludlow or Fenner on the I-40. For this road trip itinerary, Baker or Primm makes the most sense.

This park gets busier, year-on-year, but as with the other desert areas in this California itinerary, it depends on the season. Many Los Angeles residents love this region as a getaway from the city, especially outside of the summer season. Visit during the warmer months to avoid this issue – prepare for very hot days but perfect evening temperatures. 

Despite the name, the park is not only about Joshua trees. There are lots of awesome-looking rock formations, perfect for climbing and scrambling, or simply hiking around. Climbing and bouldering is super popular here, with thousands of routes and problems available. If this is your sort of jazz, add an extra day or two onto the itinerary.  

For a full list of hikes, check out the official website . If you are interested in climbing, read the park service information .

CAMPING IN JOSHUA TREE NATIONAL PARK

Camping is first-come, first-served during the quiet season (June to September) and is often mostly empty. For the rest of the year, the 500 sites across the park can fill up, especially at weekends and in the spring. Reserve ahead where you can and if you can’t, try for a first-come, first-serve site. This can be competitive, particularly at weekends. The official site has a full list of the campsites .

My favourite campground is Jumbo Rocks . The scenery is amazing, it is $20 a night, reservable and is centrally located, right next to the Skull Rock hiking loop.

Joshua Tree takes longer to reach and drive through than it looks like it should on a map. It is about three hours from the Mojave Preserve to the centre of Joshua Tree, through some amazing but very stark scenery.

Make sure to get gas and supplies in Twentynine Palms before heading into the park. For a park leaflet, stop in the Visitor Center – be aware that it is outside the park on route 62 just past Twentynine Palms.

It is very hot in summer, take more water than you think you will need.

ANZA BORREGO DESERT and AROUND

While everyone is flocking to Joshua Tree during peak season, California’s largest state park remains (relatively) under the radar, although that is slowly starting to change. There is an entry fee of $10 (without the California State Park Pass) with various camping options depending on facilities required. 

This is another park that relies on off-road capable vehicles for some areas. If you only have a two-wheel drive car, fear not, for there are lots of things to do in the surrounding area as well visiting the park itself. 

OPTIONAL DETOURS

There is some really interesting stuff in the surrounding area outside of the park. 

Julian is a town that exudes charm; as small places go it is up there with the best, but not in a fake, touristy way. It is famous for apple pies; there are at least four cafes and bakeries that serve them all year round! 

Slab City is located on the opposite side of the Salton Sea (also worth visiting – it won’t be there forever). Described as ‘lawless’ and labelled ‘one of America’s last free places’, it is Slab City’s art installations that motivate most people to visit. A community with no water, electricity or trash removal can sound unappealing to some, but the man-made Salvation Mountain has become a huge draw for anyone searching for a unique experience. In fact, the entire community is rather distinctive! If you are considering a visit, read up on the history and culture that surrounds Slab City. Bring a book or two to swap at the library.

Galleta Meadows in Borrego Springs has some seriously cool metal sculptures. I thought they were just magic! There are more than 130, made by Ricardo Breceda, including a dragon, giant tortoises, a woolly mammoth and dinosaurs. It’s just so so weird, but excellent. You can drive between the statues, many of which are marked on Google Maps and the visitor center can give you a map of them.

The whole region surrounding Anza Borrego and the Salton Sea is just really wild and empty. Small settlements dot the landscape, with an utterly un-Californian feel to it. Everyone who spends time on a California road trip should witness rural life surrounding Anza Borrego, it is honestly eye-opening. I felt like we were in Mad Max at times.

CAMPING AROUND ANZA BORREGO

The state park has four developed and eight primitive campgrounds. Borrego Palm Canyon Campground has the easiest access and best facilities, if a little expensive at $35 (state parks are often quite pricey to camp in). Three campgrounds are available to reserve online outside of the summer season.

There are many areas for dispersed camping in this park and surrounding region, so if you don’t need facilities, this is a good option. 

It is a couple of hours drive between Joshua Tree and Borrego Springs. This journey is one of my favourite parts of the road trip, especially along Box Canyon Road; the area has excellent hiking in the Mecca Hills Wilderness if you have more time in your schedule. There are loads of camping and hiking opportunities off the Borrego Salton Sea Way too.

When leaving Borrego Springs, Montezuma Valley Road has remarkable views from the top of the mountain. The drive is fun too!

Anza Borrego Desert State Park is a tricky one to navigate. Pop into the visitor center to get all the information you need.

Suggested number of nights: 1-2

OPTIONAL DETOUR - SAN DIEGO AND LOS ANGELES

If you have not visited either of these, please consider it! The laid-back ambiance of San Diego and the rough-meets-glamour vibe of Los Angeles call me back time and time again. There is no space for guides to these two epic cities here but attempt to include them on your California road trip if you have not been. They’re detours-only on this itinerary, mainly because they don’t fit the theme.

The road trip along the coast between both is also worth your time; take a break at the Orange County classics of Newport and Laguna Beach .

Around the Los Angeles area, Pasadena and Glendale often have cheaper accommodation options (in our experience). Santa Monica is amazing if you can afford it! In San Diego, the La Jolla area north of the city is our favourite area to stay,  or alternatively we stay in centrally located Coronado (expensive though).

The Santa Monica Mountains are epic for outdoor activities like hiking and biking in the Los Angeles area. Escondido Falls is an easy hike but has heavy foot traffic. Also consider hiking sections of the Backbone Trail, which is 67 miles long and traverses the area from east to west with top-notch views of Los Angeles, the Channel Islands and the San Gabriel Mountains. There is also camping offered by nearby state parks but getting a spot can be competitive. If you need accommodation, stay in Thousand Oaks or Calabasas for *slightly* cheaper rates. 

Further north in Ventura and Oxnard is the jumping off point for the Channel Islands National Park . This park is comprised of five islands off the California coast with unique wildlife and a wild, rugged landscape. There are campgrounds on each island that cost $15 a night. Advanced reservations and pre-organised transport from the mainland are essential.

THE PACIFIC COAST HIGHWAY

From Los Angeles, the most scenic route for the road trip back to San Francisco is via the Pacific Coast Highway . This is the slower but far more picturesque route, so it depends on how much time you have.

At a minimum, I would spend a night in the Morro Bay/Pismo Beach area and then a night around Monterey. This gives you a full day to explore the northern section of the coast which includes the highlight of Big Sur. Any spare time spent in the lovely town of Monterey is never a chore either (our recommendation – Fieldwork Brewing Company – order a flight). 

On route, check out the famous elephant seals (Elephant Seal Vista Point on Google Maps); see the giant rock of Morro Bay and eat some saltwater taffy; stop at the numerous viewpoints and beaches along the way and take your time. The most famous view on the route is McWay Falls , in Julia Pfeiffer Burns State Park. There is dedicated parking but costs $10 (you can park on the street but it’s a little sketchy).

In the far north near Monterey, Point Lobos State Natural Reserve is a beautiful place to stretch your legs with lots of hiking (entry fee of $10). If the weather is good, the water here has a bright aquamarine hue, and you can see sealions and many types of bird.

CAMPING AND LOGISTICS ALONG THE PCH

Camping is difficult along the coast; it books up fast and there isn’t all that much of it compared to demand. Pfeiffer Big Sur Campground is the trickiest so reserve as far ahead as possible. Limekiln State Park is another great choice. 

Logistically, this is the easiest section of the California road trip, although it could be amongst the most expensive too. Fill up your gas before getting to Big Sur; there is gas available, but rates are sky high. The total drive time is around eight hours, which doesn’t sound like much over several days, but the amount of stopping makes it take far longer!

It is hit or miss with the weather. Three times we drove this stretch of road and didn’t see a single cloud, another time we were engulfed in fog.

Pinnacles NATIONAL PARK

This is a small volcanically formed park, the beauty of which is that it’s nearly always quiet with no need for reservations. There is hiking, bat caves, California condors and renowned rock climbing too if that’s your jam. In my opinion, this park has some of the best hiking anywhere, with a few trails leading straight off from the campground. Some hikes lead through cool caves too. 

CAMPING IN PINNACLES NATIONAL PARK

The park has one campground, which has a few nice private sites (the rest are a bit open). Weirdly for a national park, this campground also has a pool. It is not the best campground ever, but rarely fills up, costs $23 and provides excellent access to the east side of the park. In September, we were the only people there apart from two other groups (it was very hot though). Beware of raccoons at the campground – they steal your stuff.

This park is split into east and west; it is not possible to reach each side by road directly within the park. Check on your GPS to make sure you are going to the side you intend! From Monterey, it is less than 90 minutes to the west or east entrance.

This is also one of those parks with four weather seasons, so is very hot in summer but can freeze in the evenings during winter.

The final leg of the California itinerary is an easy 2.5-hour drive back to San Francisco through the Garlic capital of Gilroy (you can smell the garlic in the air!). 

FINAL THOUGHTS - CALIFORNIA ROAD TRIP

This California road trip is an ambitious, epic journey. If you have a month and want to experience all the natural diversity California has to offer, then this itinerary provides that in droves, along with some more off-beat options to check out along the route. It is even better suited if you are on a budget road trip and love camping! 

We hope this aids your trip planning. Although we don’t write itineraries very often, California is one of our favourite states. Having spent a lot of time travelling it, we thought we’d share the love.

If this itinerary has been your kind of fun, check out our list of favourite alternative national and state parks across the southwest.

Have a great day!

Hi, thanks for visiting our blog! If this post has been of help to you, or you’ve just enjoyed our random ramblings and musings, say thank you by buying us a coffee ! It helps keep The Restless Beans blog up and running without ads.

Thank you, Claire + Nick

2 thoughts on “In-Depth One Month California Road Trip Itinerary ~ Budget Camping Edition”

Thank you for the good writeup. It in fact was a amusement account it. Look advanced to far added agreeable from you! By the way, how could we communicate?

Thanks so much for your comment, glad to be of help! If you ever want to communicate with us, you can send a message through the ‘contact us’ link at the bottom of any page on this website :). Or, email ‘hello @ therestlessbeans.com’.

Leave a Comment Cancel Reply

Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

Save my name, email, and website in this browser for the next time I comment.

12 Beginner Tips for Camping in the U.S. National Parks

Arches vs. Canyonlands ~ which is best if you only have one day?

22 Tips on How to Save Money in Las Vegas (with no Gambling or Comps)

Privacy Policy

SUBSCRIBE FOR A MONTHLY UPDATE. 

NEW POSTS + ROUND-UP + TRAVEL NEWS

Planning a Trip?

BARGAIN  FLIGHTS

CHEAP CAR HIRE

DESTINATIONS

INTERNATIONAL LUGGAGE STORAGE

S.E. ASIA TRAVEL

CASHBACK ON HOTELS

PACKING LIGHT

ETHICAL TRAVEL

If you book through the links above, we make a small profit, at zero cost to you, which helps us write these posts with no advertising! We only endorse products and companies we *actually* use regularly. For more information, read our position on affiliates .

Copyright © 2024 The Restless Beans

Welcome to The Restless Beans!

Sorry for the annoying pop-up. Just click on out if it’s not for you.

Sign up for a monthly round up of new posts, travel updates, guides, tips and quirky travel news – never any junk or spam. We hate that stuff.

 – Upcoming content from: Morocco, Oman, Sri Lanka & Saudi Arabia –

Thanks, Claire + Nick

• Miranda do Douro
• Viana do Castelo
• Corvo, The Crow Island of the Azores
• Faial, The Blue Island of Azores
• Flores, The Yellow Island of Azores
• Graciosa, The White Island of the Azores
• Pico, The Black Island of Azores
• Santa Maria, The Sunshine Island of the Azores
• São Jorge, The Brown Island of Azores
• São Miguel, The Green Island of Azores
• Terceira Island, The Festive Island of Azores
• Central Portugal
• Lisbon and Tagus Valley
• Porto & Northern Portugal
• Portugal Survival Guide
• Entering Portugal
• Guide to Learning Portuguese
• Portugal Holidays
• Average Temperatures in Portugal
• Weather in Portugal
• Portugal Visa Guide
• Golden Visa Portugal
• Portugal Digital Nomad Visa 2023
• D7 Visa Guide
• D2 Visa Guide
• Food & Drink
• History and Culture

What Are Conventual Sweets? A Guide to Portugal’s Delicious Desserts

Countertop dining restaurants: the 28 best counters in lisbon, where to eat on new year’s eve in lisbon, where to eat in lisbon on christmas day, 8 portuguese cheeses to taste on your next visit, romanesque architecture in portugal – characteristics and landmarks, manueline architecture in portugal – 9 iconic manueline landmarks, 12 amazing facts about cristiano ronaldo’s workout, let’s learn about portuguese folk dance, the women who made portugal, 30 day portugal itinerary: explore portugal in 1 month.

Many make the mistake of only spending a week or two in Portugal due to it being a relatively small country. However, they are missing out! The best way to really get to know Portugal is to spend enough time in each city. If you’re reading this, you’ve probably reached that conclusion as well! 

Our 30 Day Portugal Itinerary allows you to explore Portugal in 1 month, stopping at the best spots. It begins in the North of Portugal in Porto and ends in the Algarve.

This itinerary is best traveled by car, so we definitely recommend renting a vehicle. While public transport between cities like Porto and Lisbon works well, this isn’t the case for all regions of Portugal.

Day 1, 2 & 3: Porto

Why not start this 30 day itinerary in the north of Portugal in Porto, rather than in the most visited city of Lisbon? A 20-minute drive from Francisco Sa Carneiro Airport, Porto should be your first stop. 

The breathtaking city of  Porto lies along the Douro river and is home to Port wine, street art, and “francesinhas.” One of the oldest in Europe, Porto’s old town in the city center is a UNESCO World Heritage site since 1996. Along with exploring the historical center, there’s so much to do in Porto.

Porto: Best Things to Do

• Head to the Clérigos Tower , where after climbing the steps you can enjoy a 360 view of the city.
• Go to Livraria Lello, one of the oldest bookstores in the country, founded in 1906 with a beautiful interior. Tickets cost €5. Kids under 3 years old have free entrance.     
• Igreja do Carmo, a beautiful baroque church with a facade of   Portuguese blue azulejos  (tiles) made locally in Vila Nova de Gaia, across the Douro river from Porto. 
• Book this Fado Live Show  in Porto for an intimate setting in Casa da Guitarra near Sé. 
• Visit Palacio da Bolsa, built in the nineteenth century by Porto’s Commercial Association, it used to function as a stock exchange and is a magnificent building.
• Explore the Crystal Palace Gardens. Inspired by the Crystal Palace in London, the Crystal Palace in Porto was inaugurated in 1865 and has about 8 hectares of green space with views of the River Douro.
• Take photos of the Casa da Musica. Designed by the architect Rem Koolhaas, Casa da Musica is an iconic concert hall in the historical center of Porto built in 2005.
• Walk from Porto to Gaia through the 1-kilometer Dom Luis I Bridge, providing one of the best views of the Douro river, as well as easy access to Vila Nova de Gaia. 

We also recommend an afternoon where you can enjoy a tuk tuk tour of Porto. Here are our three favorite tuk tuk tours in Porto:

• Street Art Porto Tuk Tuk Tour
• Porto Half Day Tuk Tuk All Around Porto
• Private Electric Tuk Tuk Sightseeing Tour of Historic Porto

Book Electric Tuk Tuk Tour of Historic Porto

Best restaurants in porto.

• Pedro Lemos
• Arvore do Mundo
• Tasquinha Ze Povinho

Best Hotels in Porto

• NH Hotel Porto Jardim :  This four-star hotel feels like its five stars. It has a 70 cm deep outdoor people, a spa a few meters away, and a gym. It is located within walking distance of main attractions like Bolhão market, Aliados Avenue, and Ribeira. If you have a dog or cat, this hotel is pet-friendly.
• Vila Gale Porto :  Vila Gale is a well-known chain of hotels in Portugal and is always a safe option. This one was built in 1999 and recently renovated. The hotel has a spa with an indoor pool, a gym, a restaurant, and two bars.
• Hotel Premium Porto Downtown :  Located in the old town, this modern 4-star hotel has a sun terrace with views of the city of Porto, the perfect place to enjoy some port wine. You’ll be close to everything you need, Santa Catarina street, Aliados Avenue, and the cathedral.

Book Tours & Activities in Porto

Day 4: Douro Tour from Porto

Close to Porto, you should head to the Douro Valley , which was made a World Heritage Site by UNESCO in the early 2000s. The valley is a cultural landscape of vineyards where Douro wines are grown and produced. Along with delicious wine, the views are striking and a once in a lifetime experience. 

We recommend booking a Douro vineyard “hopping” tour so that you can experience a variety of vineyards. For a unique experience, book this river cruise  from Porto where you will get to stop at various wineries for tastings, with lunch included.

You can also rent your own car and book the vineyard tours yourself. If so, our favorite vineyards to visit are Quinta da Roêda (Pinhão), Quinta do Crasto (Sabrosa), and Quinta do Seixo (Valença do Douro).

Book a Douro vineyard experience

Day 5: Geres 

A 1 month itinerary in Portugal cannot exclude Peneda-Geres National Park, only an hour’s drive from Porto. This hidden gem is a UNESCO Biosphere Reserve, covering over 700 km2 of protected land with stunning mountain trails, river beaches, and historical villages such as Geres.

You can either book a tour from Porto or drive yourself and have more flexibility. If you are driving, we recommend arriving at the park early to enjoy your full day here and perhaps even spending the night.

Start the morning with a hiking trail. One of our favorite trails is the Sao Bento trail (PR7 PBR), a 10-kilometer hike that takes around four hours. The hike stretches along the south-eastern cliffs of the Caldo river and you will get to discover interesting religious sites such as the Basilica of St. Benedict, Portugal’s second-largest sanctuary.

For lunch, Taberna da Ti Ana da Eira in Montalegre is one of the most popular restaurants in the region. The dishes are produced from regional products in the village and the restaurant has large windows offering 360 views of the Paradela reservoir. 

Peneda-Geres National park boasts plenty of natural lagoons. We recommend the Poco Azul, a lagoon with crystal clear waters. However, to get here, you must hike an 8-kilometer trail.

If you are too exhausted from the morning hike, head to Arado Lagoa, which you can reach by car. The lagoon is formed by stunning waterfalls. 

Best Restaurants in Geres

• Taberna da Ti Ana da Eira
• Vai… Vai Geres
• O Abocanhado

Best Hotels in Geres

• Secret do Geres:  Offering one-bedroom treehouses surrounded by nature, each unit comes equipped with wood balconies, a private bathroom, and a double bed. The property also features a swimming pool, garden, and room service for breakfast in bed.
• Pousadela Village:  Pousada Village is located in Vieira do Minho and overlooks the river and valley. The property features a restaurant, bar, garden, and outdoor pool for guests to enjoy. A sauna and indoor pool are also available at Pousada Village

Day 6 & 7: Braga

A 1h30 drive from Porto, Braga is the largest city in the region of Minho and the oldest city in Portugal.  Its original name was Bracara Augusta, having been founded by Romans in the year 16 BC! Even though Braga is not very big, it is known as the “Rome of Portugal” because of its more than 30 churches. 

Braga: Best Things to Do

• The Sanctuary of Bom Jesus do Monte is located on the top of a hill, you will have to climb a large staircase. However, the view is worth it! 
• Behind the sanctuary, there’s a park with several chapels, flower beds, secluded benches, and caves surrounded by vegetation, as well as a lake with rowing boats.
• The Republic Square features a beautiful fountain and a sign with the name of the city welcome visitors, making it the perfect place for a photo.
• Visit Rua do Souto, which begins in the Republic Square. This is the main street of the historic center and closed for pedestrians only, featuring Braga’s main points of interest all within walking distance.
• The Image Museum is a space dedicated to photography within a beautiful medieval tower that opened in 1996. The Image Museum has over 200,000 images taken by classic and contemporary photographers. 
• The Torre de Menagem is also a beautiful sight, as well as the Cathedral de Braga.

Book Tours & Experiences in Braga

Best Hotels in Braga

• Burgus Tribute & Design Hotel:  Located in the heart of Braga’s historic center, Burgus Tribute & Design Hotel is close to popular attractions such as Biscainhos Museum. The modern 4-star hotel provides features a restaurant, private parking, a bar, and a lovely shared lounge. 
• Melia Braga Hotel & Spa:  Maria Braga Hotel & Spa is a luxury 5-star hotel less than 2 kilometers from the city center. This place features a large spa with indoor and outdoor pools, a hot tub, and a sauna. 
• Hotel do Parque :  Located in a 19th century-building surrounded by romantic gardens, the Hotel do Parque is less than 4 kilometers from the center of Braga. The hotel features a spa, a piano bar, and modern rooms equipped with LCD satellite TV and a minibar.

Best Restaurants in Braga

• Casa de Pasto das Carvalheiras
• Bira dos Namorados
• Cozinha da Se
• Naco na Pedra
• Esperanca Verde

Day 8: Viseu

A two-hour drive south and then towards the interior of Portugal, Viseu is your next spot. We recommend spending one day in this often-forgotten city. The capital of the Beira Alta province, less than 60,000 people live here, making it a small but worthwhile city to visit.

Viseu: Best Things to Do

• Visit the Viseu Cathedral, which was founded in the 12th century and is a prime example of Manueline, Renaissance, and Mannerist architectural influences. The interior also includes the Sacred Art Museum with exhibits of religious art and sculpture.
• The Museu de Grao Vasco is worth a visit, housed in the former bishop’s palace and displaying major works of Vasco Fernandes of the late 15th century.
• Explore Viseu’s downtown to uncover the beauty of its parks, plazas, cobbled narrow lanes, and scenic facades. 
• Stroll around Fontelo Park, one of Viseu’s best places to commune with nature. Here you will find a campsite, swimming pools, tennis courts, football pitches, a gym, and a jogging circuit.

Book Tours & Experiences in Viseu

Best restaurants in viseu.

• Old Tavern Viseu
• Cantinho do Alex

Best Hotels in Viseu

• Montebelo Viseu Congress Hotel: A 5-star hotel, Montebelo Viseu Congress Hotel is just a 20-minute walk from the center of Viseu. This spa features a spa and wellness center where guests can enjoy a professional massage and a Turkish bath, as well as an indoor and outdoor pool.
• Pousada de Viseu:  Pousada de Viseu is a 4-star establishment located in a 19th-century building, a 5-minute walk from the green park Florestal de Fontel.
• Bemyguest: A 4-star guesthouse, Bemyguest is located in an early 19th-century building in Jardim das Mães (mothers’ garden) that was renovated in 2015. 

Day 9 & 10: Monsanto

Known as a village within stones and once titled “the most typical Portuguese village of all” in a 1938 contest during the Estado Novo regime, Monsanto is a special place we believe is worth visiting.

A 2 hour drive from Viseu, it is near the city of Castelo Branco, which is also worth the visit. Monsanto is on the official route of Portuguese historical villages. Its history dates back to the country’s foundation, later on belonging to the Order of the Knights Templar.

In late 2022, it was announced that the Game of Thrones prequel House of the Dragon  was filmed in the iconic village of Monsanto! 

Monsanto: Best Things to Do

• Monsanto Castle is the main attraction of the village. Sitting on top of the hill, this fortified castle was built in 1165 by Gualdim Pais, master of the Knights Templar. You will get views of Serra da Estrela and Spain. Next to the castle, you will find unique ruins of a Roman chapel.
• Check out the Lucano tower, also known as the watch tower. This building features the famous “Galo de Prato” which is a symbol of its achievement during the Estado Novo. 
• Monsanto has incredible spots to enjoy the best views. In Portugal, these are called miradouros, translating to viewpoints. Our favorites in Monsanto are Miradouro da Praca dos Canhoes and Miradouro do Toucinho. 

If you want a guided tour, we recommend  booking this full-day tour of Monsanto , Idanha-a-Velha, and Penha Garcia. This tour from the city of Castelo Branco lasts around 8 hours, stopping in the historic village of Idanha-a-Velha on the way to Monsanto.

Best Hotels in Monsanto

• Casa da Villa
• Casa da Ti Maria Pereira

Best Restaurants in Monsanto

• Taverna Lusitana
• Casa da Velha Fonte
• Adega Tipica o Cruzeiro

Day 11, 12 & 13: Coimbra

A 2-hour drive from Monsanto,  Coimbra should be your next stop. We recommend staying for two days at least, but three days is perfect! Home to one of the oldest universities in the world and close to the serra of Lousa, Coimbra is one of our favorite cities in Portugal.

Coimbra: Best Things to Do

• Visit the University of Coimbra through a guided tour . Do not miss the  Joanine Library, a Baroque library situated in the center of the University of Coimbra, by the university tower. The library was built in the 18 th  century, and it is considered a national monument with priceless historical value.
• We also recommend taking a walk in the Botanical garden, one of the oldest in Portugal from the 18th century featuring 13 hectares of beauty.
• Visit the Santa Cruz Monastery and the Convent of Santa Clara, built in 1314.
• Head to Quinta das Lagrimas. This estate has been the setting for the forbidden romance between King D. Pedro I and Inês de Castro. 

Best Hotels in Coimbra

• Hotel Quinta das Lagrimas :  A 5-star hotel, Hotel Quinta das Lagrimas is located in a historic medieval palace that was recently renovated. Featuring botanical gardens and a luxurious spa with views of the city, as well as a 9-hole golf course, this hotel has all the facilities you need and more.
• Solar Antigo Luxury Coimbra :  Located in the heart of Coimbra, only 400 meters from the University of Coimbra, Solar Antigo Luxury Coimbra is a 4-star boutique hotel that features views of the city. A historical building, its traditional architecture has been kept intact while including all the modern amenities necessary for a comfortable stay. 

Best Restaurants in Coimbra

• Ze Manel dos Ossos
• Solar do Bacalhau

Day 14: Fatima

A 1-hour drive from Coimbra,  Fatima is a hot spot for religious tourism and a place of unique cultural value, even for those who are not religious. We recommend spending a day there, but if you are not religious, avoid the first week of August of 2023 as W orld Youth Day will be taking place and the Pope is set to visit. There will be hoards of tourists then.

Fatima: Best Things to Do

• Naturally, visit the Sanctuary of Our Lady of Fatima first. The main square of the Sanctuary of Fátima is huge, larger than the square of the Vatican and can hold thousands of people.
• Find the “Basilica da Nossa Senhora do Rosário” in Portuguese, a limestone church built between the 1920s and 50s. It has a 65-meter bell tower and a statue of Our Lady of Fátima. at the entrance to the church. The church is decorated in Baroque style.
• Visit the “Gruta de Moinhos Velhos,” a cave that is over 9 kilometers in extension and a 20-minute drive from the sanctuary. It is the biggest cave found in Portugal. 
• Discover the Natural Monument of Dinosaur Footprints is also a great activity. This dinosaur track site was discovered in 1994 by João Carvalho, a member of the local archeology association. 

Best Hotels in Fatima

• Hotel Santa Maria:  This four-star hotel is a 2-minute walk from the sanctuary. Hotel Santa Maria has a modern interior, spacious rooms, as well as a meditation room and chapel. The terrace on the fourth floor provides amazing views of the sanctuary. 
• Steyler Fátima Hotel Congress & Spa:  Steyler Fátima is only 100 meters away from the sanctuary. The four-star hotel has large modern rooms with terraces, a Portuguese restaurant, a chapel for praying, and even a kids club. 
• Hotel Dom Goncalo & Spa:  This four-star boutique hotel is less than a 10-minute walk from the sanctuary. You can enjoy the wellness center here, as well as the outdoor garden with a playground for the kids. 

Best Restaurants in Fatima

• Arcos de Fatima
• Restaurante O Leque

Day 15: Obidos

While most enjoy visiting during the winter holidays due to the famous Christmas Village, the town of Obidos is beautiful all year round. A one-hour drive from Fatima, Obidos Óbidos is situated in the  Center region of Portugal , in the district of Leiria. The town is known for its wonderful castle and walled city that immerse you in a medieval environment, making you feel like you are back in the 1600s.

Obidos: Best Things to Do

• Obidos Castle is a must-see. Considered Number two of the Seven Architectural Wonders of Portugal, the Castle is placed on a cliff, and inside the city is at the end of Rua Direita. Today, it’s completely restored and is one of the most beautiful castles open to the public, functioning today as a hotel. 
• The Walls that surround the town are one of its main attractions! Its perimeter is 1.565 meters (around 5134 ft), totally surrounded by a walking path on one side and a battlement on the other. You can actually walk around the walls.
• Take a photo of the Village Door, or “Porta da Vila”, the main entrance to the interior of the walled city. It was built in 1380 and it’s all adorned with the beautiful Portuguese “ azulejos ”, with an engraving dedicated to the Virgin Mary.
• Explore the Rua Direita. This is the main road in the city, connecting the Village Door to the Castle. Most of the buildings on it are souvenir stores, restaurants, and town attractions along this beautiful cobbled street.
• Try the ginjinha drink! One of the most famous Portuguese liquors, the Óbidos’ Ginjinha is world renown and makes everyone fall in love with it. Usually served in a chocolate cup, this type of drink has been present in Portugal for centuries, with the oldest record of it being in the 1st century.

Book Tours & Activities in Obidos

Best Hotels in Obidos

• Vale do Grou Natura: Located 13 kilometers from Obidos Castle, Vale do Grou Natura features a shared lounge, a garden, and a large communal kitchen with traditional materials. 
• Casa Picva: Located near the medieval wall, Casa Picva is a traditional guest house with a large garden for guests to enjoy.
• Hostel Argonauta: 200 meters from Obidos Castle, Hostel Argonauta offers both private bedrooms and shared dormitory rooms. 

Best Restaurants in Obidos

• Pretensioso
• A Nova Casa de Ramiro

Day 16 & 17: Ericeira

A one-hour drive away from Obidos, Ericeira is a seaside town in Mafra and is known to many as the surfing capital of Europe. The only World Surfing Reserve in Europe, Ericeira has the perfect coastline conditions for surfing, but also so much more! It has, in recent years, become an expat and digital nomad hub due to its picturesque streets and amazing cuisine.

Ericeira: Best Things to Do

• For surfing, we recommend booking a surf class ! The official Ericeira World Surfing Reserve spots are Cave, Pedra Branca, Reef, Crazy Left, Ribeira D’Ilhas, Coxos, and Sao Lourenco.
• For a regular beach day, Ericeira also has some amazing beaches. One of our favorite beaches in Ericeira is Foz Do Lizandro, 3 kilometers from the center of town.
• Another great beach is Praia dos Pescadores, the most central beach in Ericeira. Along with being within walking distance from the center, the “Fishermen’s beach” features beautiful fishing boats and is a family favorite.
• Enjoy a hike in Ericeira by checking out the official trail maps or asking the locals. One of your favorite hikes is over 10 kilometers, starting in Ericeira and going through Santo Isidoro, Paco de Ilhas, Marvao, and ending finally in Ribamar.
• Explore Mafra, a beautiful city located a 10-minute drive from Ericeira. Mafra is best known for being the home of the Mafra National Palace, a UNESCO World Heritage Site constructed in Baroque style.

Best Hotels in Ericeira

You and the sea, chill in ericeira surf house, villa ana margarida hotel , laneez ericeira surf house, best restaurants in ericeira, mar d’areia, mar das latas, gig – green is good , mar a vista, avo restaurante, day 18, 19 & 20: lisbon.

We wouldn’t forget the capital of Portugal, Lisbon. We recommend staying at least three days in the city center and leaving at least one day to explore neighboring Sintra and Cascais. The capital has so much to offer, from its proximity to beaches and the cosmopolitan feel of the city. 

Lisbon: Best Things to Do

• Castelo de Sao Jorge: Open every day of the week, Castelo de São Jorge is located in Santa Maria Maior and open to visitors. The medieval castle overlooks the historical center of Lisbon. 
• Santa Justa Lift: The Santa Just Lift was completed in 1902 by Raoul Mesnier du Ponsard, an architecture student of the man who built the Eiffel Tower. From the top of the lift, you can enjoy a view of the Baixa Pombalina.
• Lisbon Cathedral: Often simply called Sé, this cathedral located in Baixa was built in 1147 and is the oldest church in the present-day capital.
• Jeronimos Monastery: This former monastery in Belem constructed in Portuguese Late Gothic Manueline style that was made a UNESCO World Heritage site.
• Belem Tower : Built in the 1500s, the Belem Tower has a great view of the city. You can go up to the roof terrace and enjoy a stunning view of the river and Belem, as well as get a guided tour of the inside of the tower. 
• Alfama: Explore the oldest neighborhood in Lisbon and the home of fado. Explore the neighborhood and look out for Fado spots, as this is the home of Amalia Rodrigues.
• Bairro Alto: At night, explore the Bairro Alto area, a popular area where people socialize and drink outside. We recommend Ze dos Bois Gallery, a musical center that has live music and serves tasty drinks. 

Save an afternoon for a tuk-tuk tour, such as these:

• Lisbon 3-Hour Sightseeing Tour by Tuk Tuk
• Lisbon Hop-On Hop-Off Bus Tour  
• Lisbon 3-Hour Tour by E-Bike

Best Hotels in Lisbon

• Inspira Liberdade Boutique Hotel:  Awarded the Best Luxury Green Hotel in 2019, Inspira Liberdade provides a relaxing Feng-Shui vibe for its guests. The hotel has a SPA, fitness room, bar, and a restaurant with Portuguese food called Pen Brasserie Mediterrânica.
• Selena Secret Garden :  The hostel also has a rooftop deck, CoWork space for professionals, and a movie room. In the heart of Cais do Sodre, you are close to contemporary art galleries, bars with riverfront views, and within walking distance to Chiado.
• Bairro Alto Hotel:  This hotel is situated in the best location in Lisbon, between Bairro Alto and Chiado in an 18th-century building in central Lisbon. The hotel features a restaurant with award-winning Chef Nuno Mendes and Executive Chef Bruno Rocha.

Best Restaurants in Lisbon

• A Cevicheria
• Adega da Tia Matilde

Day 21: Day in Sintra & Cascais

A day trip to Sintra  and  Cascais is a must. We recommend spending the morning in Sintra and the afternoon in Cascais.

A UNESCO World Heritage site,  Sintra  is a town known for its forested terrain, astonishing palaces that once belonged to royal families, and the delicious “Travesseiro de Sintra”. 

Located on the Portuguese Riviera,  Cascais  is one of the richest municipalities in the whole of Portugal. Offering a relaxing day trip away from the chaos of the capital, the port city is known as one of the most pleasant places in the country with the best food, hotels, and  beaches. 

Let’s take a look at the best things to do on your day trip to Sintra and Cascais. However, If you prefer a guided tour, this  tour of Sintra and Cascais  takes you to all the best spots. It also includes a guided ticket to the Pena Palace, allowing you to skip the long lines.  

Sintra: Best Things to Do

• Grab a “travesseiro”, a Sintra delicacy at Piriquita, in the heart of the city.
• Walk toward the Castle of the Moors, a medieval castle that sits on a hilltop and was built by the Moors in the 8th century.
•  Visit Palacio da Pena. The exterior of this palace is painted in multiple colors and is in a romanticist style. You can also wander around the castle and see the beautiful green area that surrounds it.
•  Explore “Quinta” was designed in the early 1900s and has overgrown gardens, caves, and buildings with romantic architecture.
• For lunch, drive towards Cascais and stop at a restaurant called Furnas do Guincho.

Cascais: Best Things to Do

• Have lunch in Cascais, stopping at a restaurant called Furnas do Guincho. This is one of the best seafood restaurants in the area, but it is quite pricey. For a more affordable alternative, drive to the center of Cascais and eat at Baia do Peixe. 
•  Head to “Praia da Rainha,” a secluded  beach  with a wonderful view, perfect for a family photograph.
• Walk toward “Frederico Arouca” street. This is essentially the high street with the major stores, as well as smaller vendors selling Portuguese souvenirs. 
• Find the City Hall of Cascais in “Praça 5 de Outubro”. This beautiful building with traditional Portuguese architecture stands in the middle of the commerce square which features a cobblestoned pavement. 

Day 22, 23 & 24: Comporta

After over 20 days of traveling around and discovering the cities, it’s time to relax! A 1h30 hour from Lisbon lies the often forgotten by tourists town of Comporta.  Comporta is located in the old district of Setubal, at the base of the Troia Peninsula. This is a popular place for vacationing in Portugal, but that is a lot less busy than the Algarve.

The main activity in Comporta – the incredible beaches. You might even see some dolphins. Spend the next three days relaxing on the beach and discovering amazing restaurants.

The best beaches to visit in Comporta are the classic Praia da Comporta and Praia do Pego. Praia da Comporta is hidden behind pine forests and sand dunes and features a beach bar with a DJ.

Best Restaurants in Comporta

• Comporta Cafe
• Gomes Casa de Vinhos & Petiscos

Best Hotels in Comporta

• Spatia Comporta:  The 4-star hotel features a restaurant, swimming pool, bar, and shared lounge. You can get a room or a fully equipped villa.
• Quinta da Comporta:  The 5-star hotel has a restaurant, swimming pool, and gym, and offers both rooms and suites, as well as a villa with a private pool on the beach.
• Sublime Comporta: A 5-star hotel featuring a beautiful outdoor pool, spa, and lush green surroundings. 

Day 25 & 26: Vila Nova de Milfontes

A one-hour drive from Comporta, Vila Nova de Milfontes is located on the mouth of the Mira Riva and is surrounded by the Southwest Alentejo and the Vicentine Coast Natural Park.

The town has some of the best beaches in Portugal, as well as a picturesque village and harbor with fishing boats.

Spend the next two days relaxing on the Vila Nova beaches, while taking time to explore the town.

Vila Nova de Milfontes: Best Things to Do

• The best beaches to visit in Vila Nova de Mil Fontes are Praia da Franquia, Praia das Furnas, and Almograve, 10 kilometers away.
• Visit St. Clement Fort, a fort built in the 17th century that is now an exclusive hotel.
• Discover the great restaurants, artisan shops, and patisseries in the town center and enjoy the Moorish architecture of the buildings. 

Best Hotels in Vila Nova de Milfontes

• Raminhos Guest House:  Located a 10-minute walk from Franquia Beach, the rooms feature a desk, TV, private bathroom, and luggage storage available.
• Monte da Corca Nova :  The 4-star hotel features a swimming pool, bar, garden, and water sports facilities. They offer large rooms in traditional stoned houses. 

Best Restaurants in Vila Nova de Milfontes

• Tasca do Celso
• 100 Espinhas
• Porto das Barcas
• Patio Alentejano

Day 27, 28 & 29: Tavira 

Another 2-hour drive away, stop in Tavira in the Algarve. This is where you will spend your last few days in Portugal. Tavira was built alongside River Gilão, in an intricate of narrow roadways and white houses, and features golden beaches with warm water. Since you are in the Algarve, you are also close to other cities which are worth a visit.

Tavira: Best Things to Do

• Beach day: Our favorite beach in Tavira is Praia do Barril. The beach features a wooden path over the golden sand, which provides a gorgeous contrast with the dark blue waters. Praia de Tavira and Praia da Terra Estreita are also great alternatives in Tavira.
• Walk through Tavira, explore the chapel of Sao Bras and the hundreds of other churches. 
• Book this 100% electric 1-hour tuk-tuk tour if you want a tour of the city from a local’s perspective. 
• Visit Vilamoura Marina, a popular marina, a 40-minute drive away in Quarteira. You will find loads of shops, restaurants, and even a worth-while beach called Praia da Falesia.
• Travel to Albufeira where you can get a  Dolphins and Benagil Caves Tour. This boat tour allows you to discover dolphins, marine life, and Benagil caves in an inflatable boat. A stop for a swim is included!

Best Hotels in Tavira

• São Paulo Boutique Hotel:   São Paulo Boutique Hotel is located less than 5 kilometers from the beach and features an outdoor swimming pool, bar, shared lounge, and large garden for guests to enjoy. 
• OZADI Tavira Hotel:  A 4-star hotel AZADI Tavira Hotel is 3 kilometers away from the beach and features a large outdoor pool, a fitness center, and two restaurants. 
• Quinta Dos Perfumes:  An 8-minute walk from the beach, Quinta dos Perfumes is an 88-acre farmhouse that features beautiful orange groves and a salt-water outdoor pool.

Best Restaurants in Tavira

• Tasquinha da Paula
• Come na Gaveta
• Ponto de Encontro
• A Barquinha

Tours in Tavira

Day 30: Travel Home from Faro

Now that you have ended your 1-month Portugal itinerary in the southern region of the country, makes sense to travel back from the Algarve. Fly home from Faro Airport, a 30-minute drive from Tavira. You can return car rentals at Faro airport. Just make sure to ask about this before booking your rental.

Receive the latest news, travel information, stories, offers and more!

Join our FB group  Portugal Travel & Living  for all things Portugal and news updates

Related articles, time required to get portuguese citizenship reduced by 12-18 months, spain vs portugal: which golden visa program is best, life after nhr: latest 2024 update.

The 30 day excursion in Portugal looks amazing. Do you have an estimate as to the cost?? Thanks. Sherrie G.

good question Sherrie. I want to do this but have no idea about cost.

LEAVE A REPLY Cancel reply

Save my name, email, and website in this browser for the next time I comment.

Most Popular

Latest articles, what is the portuguese nif and how does it work, march was earth’s 10th warmest consecutive month on record, portuguese nurses will go on strike.

Portugal.com is an independently owned and operated tourism portal about Portugal. All information should be considered informational and for entertainment purposes. Some content may be promotional and/or have affiliate relationships where Portugal.com earns revenue promoting the content.

Want to advertise on Portugal.com? Would you like to write for us? Something else? Please feel free to Contact Us!

© Portugal.com

• Privacy Policy

Subscribe to our newsletter below to get the latest news, reviews, info and more!

Thanks, I’m not interested

Subscribe & get your free guide to going abroad!!

3 Perfect Balkans Itinerary Options: 10 Days, 1 Month, and More [+PDF]

Traveling and backpacking in the Balkans is an extraordinary experience that offers the best of Europe on a backpacker budget. This Balkans itinerary will deliver the best of Europe. Delicious, Italian and Turkish-inspired food and drink. World-class beaches and Rivieras. Towering alps and the southernmost fjords in Europe. The Balkans backpacking experience offers so much to love in such a small area and at a great price that it should be top of every traveler’s list.

Read on to discover the best of the Balkans, the essentials for a perfect experience wandering the Balkans, including the best route and itinerary for 10 days, 2 weeks, 3 weeks, and 4 or more weeks.

My experience exploring Croatia, Montenegro, Albania, Bosnia, Serbia, and more was one of the highlights of my European backpacking experience. Amazing food, plenty of great drink (wine and Rakja), never-ending parties, captaining a boat, extraordinary nature of towering mountains in bays, fantastic beaches, plenty of friends and friendly locals, and more. In this Balkans itinerary, I’ll share the must-see sights and experiences and how to make them happen to help you craft the perfect Balkans backpacking experience for you.

CONTENTS OF THIS PERFECT BALKANS ITINERARY

• Quick Balkans Itinerary for 10 Days to 14 Days
• The Full Balkans Travel Itinerary (3+ Weeks)
• Why The Balkans
• Balkans Tour Options to Consider
• Slovenia : Fairy tale like nature, lakes, and forests
• Croatia : Castles, Game of Thrones, wine, Italian inspired cuisine, an exquisite coastline
• Bosnia and Herzegovina : History, Ottoman influenced culture and cuisine
• Serbia : Never ending parties on the riverfront, fusion foods, rakija culture
• Montenegro : Norwegian styled fjords in warm, welcoming waters
• Albania : The Albanian Riviera’s amazing beaches and the Albanian alps
• Bulgaria : Artsy neighborhoods, nature, and gourmet locavore food culture for cheap

The Additional Balkans Destinations

• Kosovo (Optional)
• Macedonia (Optional)

Logistics of Traveling the Balkans

• Balkans Travel Budget & Tips
• Visas and Crossing Borders in the Balkans
• Travel Insurance: Do You Need It In The Balkans?
• When To Visit The Balkans
• Tips for Staying In The Balkans On A Budget
• Balkans Packing List Essentials
• How To Get Around The Balkans
• Balkans Travel FAQ

BALKANS ITINERARY HIGHLIGHTS: THE TOP 10 THINGS TO EXPERIENCE IN THE BALKANS

• Montenegro: The southernmost fjords in Europe and beautiful waterways
• Albania: Undiscovered escapes, beautiful rivieras that rival the Greek isles, Albanian Alps
• Croatia: Medieval architectural beauty and a “Balkans meets Venetian Italy” vibe
• The Albanian Riviera
• The Albanian Alps
• The fjords of Montenegro
• The castles of Croatia
• National Parks throughout
• World-class beaches in Albanian, Croatia, and Montenegro
• Scandinavian style fjords and towering mountains in Montenegro
• Rich food and amazing wine influenced by the Italians, the Ottomans, and Eastern Europe
• Medieval castles and city centers along the entire Balkans backpacking route

WHAT TO SEE AND DO WHILE YOU’RE IN THE BALKANS

KEY BALKAN ITINERARIES

THE TWO PERFECT BALKANS ITINERARY OPTIONS FOR YOUR TRIP: 10 DAYS AND MORE

The Balkans is such an impressive destination for backpackers and travelers because it offers so much for every type of traveler – and it just so happens to be budget-friendly too. Any one of the core Balkan countries could easily be a multi-week destination.

To balance maximum experience with enjoyment, we’ve created 2 separate itineraries.

The first option is the Balkans itinerary for 10 days , which focuses on the highlight destinations and experiences of the Balkans that no one can miss and skips the countries with redundant views or experiences.

The second is the full Balkans itinerary for 2-3 weeks or more , the itinerary achieves the same (maximum enjoyment and unique experiences), but at a slower, more enjoyable pace and more sites in each country added to ensure constant enjoyment. This itinerary includes everything you need to see in the Balkans if time is no issue and you’re one of the lucky backpackers on the long trail. If you’re backpacking in the Balkans, this full Balkans itinerary is the option you need.

CLICK HERE TO DOWNLOAD A FREE PDF OF THIS GUIDE!!

BALKANS ITINERARY (10 DAYS)

Balkans travel is something that every traveler should experience, but not all travelers have the full month necessary to backpack and slow travel the Balkans. This Balkans itinerary for 10 days packs the best sites, tastes, and experiences of the region into a smooth, 10-day jaunt.

With this 10 day Balkans itinerary, every single day will be mind-blowing and enjoyable and leave you wanting to return to the Balkans very soon.

If you are pressed for time, this 10-day itinerary delivers the best of the Balkans – beaches, food, Roman ruins and architecture, and more. However, if you have more time to spare, I highly recommend spending a month or more moving slowly through the Balkans and staying a little longer anywhere that catches your interests.

Read on to discover the places I recommend for a full Balkans itinerary of a few weeks or more.

THE FULL BALKANS TRAVEL ITINERARY (2 TO 6 WEEKS)

The Balkans has just as much richness, beauty, and culture as much more popular and crowded Western Europe, without the crowds and at a far cheaper price tag – fjords, mountains, and national parks as good as any in Scandinavia, wine that rivals Italy and France, rich hearty food that is unmatched, ruins that rival Rome, beaches that are on par with the islands of Greece, Spain, and France, and nightlife that puts Barcelona and Majorca to shame.

If you have a month or more to spare, I highly recommend backpacking the Balkans with this full Balkans travel itinerary.

This itinerary traces a trail through the Balkans, traversable by bus with manageable stops along the way every few hours, giving you a “best of the Balkans” tour, doable on a budget easily by bus.

For those travelers with more time for wandering and backpacking the Balkans, this itinerary shares every place you need to visit and see.

HOW TO USE THESE ITINERARIES

Both of the itineraries above, the Balkans 10-day itinerary and the itinerary, are perfect. Which itinerary you choose obviously depends on how much time you have to travel. For the longer itinerary, you should choose or eliminate destinations based on your own travel style – backpacker, budget traveler, outdoorsy, or party hungry.

If you only have ~10 days, stick to our 10-day itinerary, and you’ll hit the highlights of the regions and the best thing that each country has to offer.

If you’re traveling for 2+ weeks or backpacking, use the full itinerary omitting Kosovo, Macedonia, and Macedonia if you need to save time. Otherwise, hop the bus and enjoy each destination on our list.

If you find a city or country that you particularly enjoy, you should absolutely stay longer in that city or country.

Stay longer in countries where you love the sights, food, people, and lifestyle. As you travel, if you find a country/culture you love, stay longer and add more cities from that country to your itinerary (I recommend a few for each country).

The experience will change drastically once you leave each country as each Balkan country is very unique, so soak it up while you’re there – food, drink, people, architecture, and nature.

Plus , you can always go back and explore other destinations, so live in the moment as much as possible when you travel.

WHY I HIGHLY RECOMMEND THE BALKANS

If you’re looking for some of the most diverse (in culture, religion, language) and untouched parts of Europe, Balkans is a great place to go. The Balkans region has seen it all: from Macedonia’s Roman ruins and stunning mountain ranges in Kosovo to Croatia’s stunning shades of blue lagoons and epic beaches. What attracted me and my experience backpacking the Balkans

• European experience on a Southeast Asia travel budget
• Plenty of “ vacation nature ” and natural beauty – fjords, rivieras, waterfalls, and alps – within a short ride
• The best beaches in Europe for extremely cheap
• “Old World” and medieval cities and architecture bring Game of Thrones to life with castles and walled city centers.
• The varied and rich food : everything from Italian-inspired Istrian, hearty Slavic, and Ottoman/Middle Eastern -inspired Bosnian.
• The drink: Croatian, especially Istrian, wines are underrated, and world-class thanks to Italian influence, and the Rakija (local firewater) is interesting, complex and varied across the Balkans
• Compact and accessible traveling : most of the adventures are hours away from each other by an easily booked and cheap bus or train
• Easy visa situation: whereas the rest of Europe in the Schengen zone only allows 90 days per six months in all of the European Union, each Balkan state offers easily renewable and free visas from 30 days to 6 months
• Less crowded than the rest of Europe with all of the experience
• Plenty of history intact with cities built by Roman emperors , recent wars, and recently opened borders (Albania)

The Balkan region – Croatia, Montenegro, Albania, Slovenia, Serbia, and Bosnia & Herzegovina – offers amazing food, hearty and rich, that will satisfy any taste buds and wine as good as anywhere else in Europe. If you are looking for a “European vibe” but want an experience that’s cheaper, less crowded, and less touristy than the typical destinations, then the Balkans is a perfect place to visit.

The Balkans will give you an unforgettable experience – just make sure to pack your swimsuit, hiking shoes!

BEST BALKANS TOUR OPTIONS

If you’re not in the mood for indie travel, or if you’re pressed for time and want to see all of the Balkans in two weeks but want to skip the logistics planning, I highly recommend attending one of these reputable Balkans tours.

THE FULL BALKANS ITINERARY

Click to Jump to The itineraries

| SLOVENIA | | CROATIA | | MONTENEGRO | | BOSNIA AND HERZEGOVINA | | SERBIA | | ALBANIA | | BULGARIA |

———-

THE ADDITIONAL BALKAN TRAVEL ITINERARY DESTINATIONS

| MACEDONIA | | KOSOVO |

Quaint European towns and Insta-worthy lakes, forests, and caves

For nature lovers and sober travelers, Slovenia is a picturesque and green destination that may be worth adding to your itinerary.

Ljubljana, Slovenia’s capital and Europe’s greenest city, is a charming and quintessentially European city – walkable with cobblestone streets and a Riverwalk with plenty of coffee shops to enjoy the cool weather and peacefully picturesque views.

One hour away from the capital Slovenia’s biggest tourist destinations – Bled and Lake Bled – are nestled in the Julian Alps and deliver tons of Insta-worthy views. Hike up to Bled castle, boat to a church on an island, visit the charming village of Ribcev Laz on the shore of Lake Bled and take a cable car ride to the top of Mount Vogel for a panorama view.

End this leg of the trip by visiting the most toured cave in Europe (Postojna cave) and seeing the castle built into it (Predjama Castle) on your way to Croatia.

If you want to jump right into sunny beaches and lively nightlife, I suggest going straight to Croatia.

TIME NEEDED:

3 Days (1 Day in Ljubljana, 1 Day in Bled, 1 Day visiting Postojna Cave And Predjama Castle)

ESSENTIAL FOOD & DRINK

• Kremna rezina
• Kranjska klobasa
• Bograč
• Idrijski žlikrofi
• Pogača
• Štruklji
• Prekmurska gibanica

SLOVENIA VISA

Slovenia is part of the Schengen zone, so the Schengen visa applies – 90 days in a 180 day period, shared with all of the Schengen zone / EU countries

BUDGET/PRICES: ~$50 per day

• Hostel Dorm: $25/night
• Budget Hotel: $45/night
• Food: $15/day
• Transportation: $10 to $15 per day average, to visit attractions
• Attractions: ~$25

MOVING ON: From Ljublana, or anywhere else in Slovenia, if you are on a shorter itinerary (2 weeks or less), hop a bus (~8 hours) or a train (~10 hours + $38) to Split, Croatia, from Ljublana . If you are on a longer itinerary, hop a 5-hour bus or train (~$15) to Pula, Croatia and enjoy Istria .

GETTING THERE: As Slovenia is the start of many travelers’ and backpackers’ trails in the Balkans, the cheapest option is to fly into Bupadest, Hungary, enjoy the beauty of Budapest for a few days and then travel from Budapest, Hungary, to Ljublana, Slovenia by 7-hour train (~$30) or 7-hour bus (~$30) .

SLOVENIA ITINERARY

Slovenia has some amazing natural beauty that is world-class and that travelers rave about – but so do Montenegro, Croatia, and Albania, without being as far from the central Balkans backpacking route. Additionally, Slovenia offers very little outside of nature – while the rest of the Balkans offer rich food, drink, entertainment, and history.

Though Slovenia is remarkably beautiful, if you’re short on time traveling the Balkans, I recommend skipping Slovenia and starting your tour further south, closer to the action.

The Ljubljana city center was planned like an old baroque town, with cobbled streets and a Roman-style canal, catering to a day of walking and a leisurely lifestyle. This is a city that has been preserved in its original form, with buildings from all periods represented, all the while still moving forward. In 2014, Ljublana was awarded the Greenest City in Europe for its dedication to and advancements in sustainability, proving that Ljublana’s soul matched its surrounding beauty of turquoise lakes and sprawling forests.

Ljubljana also has a rich literary and artistic tradition, possibly cultivated by its welcoming cafes, with writers such as Nobel Prize winner Ivo Andric and poets like France Preseren make it their home for much of the 19th century. These literary giants influenced not just Ljublana but also much of the Balkans region as well through their work and by inspiring other writers.

WHAT TO DO IN LJUBLJANA

• Preseren Square and Tromostovje Triple Bridge
• Ljubljana Old Town, walking its two main streets
• Visit the Ljubljana Castle by funicular or hike
• Dragon Bridge
• Walk the riverfront
• Visit Congress Square
• Tivoli Park
• Museum of Illusions

TIME NEEDED: 1 Day

RECOMMENDED RESTAURANTS LJUBLANA:

WHERE TO STAY IN LJUBLANA

The hostel or hotel standards in Slovenia are great, so just choose one that fits your style. However, be choosy about the location to maximize your experience – either the Old Town or the Modern City Center are where you should look for accommodation. H20 Hostel comes highly recommended.

LAKE BLED / BLED

Bled, Slovenia, is a charming little town tucked up in the Julian Alps with the farily tale like Lake Bled situated right beside it. For those backpackers and travelers that love calm, pristine outdoor beauty and just the experience of strolling through a new place, Bled (just like the rest of Slovenia) will capture your heart.

Visitors can enjoy a stroll through the historic and beautiful city center, eating traditional Slovenian cuisine at one of many cafes or restaurants, or just picnic on flat rocks that jut out into the lake. Bled’s historic core is the winding castle on the hill on one side of the lake and the church on top of the hill on the other side of the lake. There are also many tours to take to explore the tiny, hidden, and less well-known, but still equally if not more stunning, parts of Slovenia that are offered by many different tour operators.

On the other side of the lake, on an island in the middle of the Krasna zalza (beautiful grove), stands a small, beautifully constructed church. It is said to be one of the most photographed churches in all of North-Eastern Europe.

Bled Castle was built in the 13th century by the Habsburgs as a summer residence. It has medieval turrets, and its view can be seen from throughout Slovenia. The castle is richly furnished and houses many treasurers; one that should not be missed is called “Prince Luitpold’s Treasure.” The treasure becomes more interesting because it contains some of Napoleon’s personal effects, including a memento made for the French emperor by a craftsman from Bled.

• Postojna Cave and Predma Castle inside
• Visit the town of Piran – full of Venetian architecture and coastline the rivals Italy and Croatia + Tartans Square, Saint Georges Church, and amazing seafood.

WHAT TO DO IN BLED, SLOVENIA

• Boat to the Church of the Mother of God on Lake Bled
• Hike to Bled castle
• Cable car to the top of Mount Vogel

RECOMMENDED RESTAURANTS AND CAFES

Sun-soaked beaches, Game of Thrones-style walled cities, and Venetian influence culture

Croatia’s Dalmatian coast is filled with countless amazing beaches and medieval-style cities worthy of Game of Thrones. The Croatian islands are party havens in the summertime that give you the must-experience opportunity to rent and captain your own boat for about ~$50 per day.

Between wanderings in Croatia, the rich food inspired by Italy just across the Adriatic Sea, and the great wine a rakija culture will keep you entertained. You could easily spend an entire trip in Croatia alone.

Croatia’s capital city, Zagreb, is a contemporary wonder. Its pedestrian-friendly streets lined with galleries and interesting shops hold fantastic treasures to be discovered at every turn. Foodies delight in the wide array of restaurants where one can sample everything from the old regional delicacies (try ćevapčići Slavinski) to original Southeast Asian fusion combos.

Endless nightlife options throughout Croatia offer partying high atop skyscrapers, in underground subterranean nightclubs nicknamed ‘catacombs,’ to islands that exist solely for nightlife and run until sunrise when they morph into normal beaches.

From its regal castle in Dubrovnik on the coast to modern marvels like The House of Croatian Parliament (Sabor) by architect Vjenceslav Richter, Croatia is filled with cultural riches that dance along pristine, unspoiled coastlines.

The Balkans are not only about wild mountains and alpine vistas – but they’re also home to some of Europe’s most spectacular coastline – the Dalmatian Coast of Croatia. The Dalmatian Coast, with its countless islands (think Hvar or Vis), packs in everything from laid-back fishing villages to cosmopolitan beach resorts. And did we mention the water? Well, it’s just turquoise, but it’s warm, clear, and everything you hope for in a riviera paradise.

No matter what kind of traveler you are, Croatia has something for you.

CROATIA ITINERARY

CROATIA TRAVEL INFO

HIGHLIGHTS OF CROATIA

• Cheap truffles
• Great wine in Istria inspired by the Italian style, and heavier, “Balkan style pasta.”
• Castles and medieval cities
• Rocky beaches with warm, clear water
• Never-ending nightlife

ESSENTIAL FOOD & DRINK ACROSS CROATIA

• Istrian cuisine
• Raznijci (meat skewers),
• Zagrebacki odrezak (veal stuffed with ham and cheese)
• Janjetina (lamb and herbs)
• Istrian wine
• Raznijci (meat skewers)

GETTING AROUND CROATIA:

Throughout Croatia, your travel mode of choice will be either by bus or rideshare. https://www.buscroatia.com/ is your best option for researching bus routes, and Rome2Rio.com is your second best option for researching routes, times, and prices. In both cases, book your ticket at the bus terminal as listed times can change and there are usually more routes and times listed than on these sites.

MOVING ON FROM CROATIA

From Croatia, I highly recommend going into Montenegro then Albania if you are on a shorter trip (less than two weeks). If you are traveling for longer (more than two weeks), travel by bus into Bosnia and Herzegovina (Mostar, then Sarajevo), up to Belgrade, Serbia, then back to Croatia, and continue south into Montenegro and Albania.

Leaving Croatia, you are perfectly situated in the Balkans to go anywhere – Slovenia, Bosnia, Montenegro, or a little further to Albania. If you travel to one of the adjacent, nearby countries (Bosnia, Montenegro, or Albania), traveling by bus is your best option, and you can research routes on Rome2Rio and book accordingly. Be sure to read the country sections in this guide to find out visa guidelines for each country.

For travel to Slovenia (Ljublana) and Serbia, a flight (~$90) is your best bet, as the bus to Ljubljana is 14 hours and the bus to Belgrade is 8 hours.

VISA: No visa is required for tourist visits less than 90 days – Croatia is not part of the Schengen zone

BUDGET/PRICES:

• €10-15 for a dorm bed in a hostel, ~25 per night for a private hostel room or budget hotel room

PULA, CROATIA

Pula is a low-key highlight of Croatia. Whereas the rest of Croatia boasts Game of thrones vibes and never-ending nightlife, Pula has a uniquely Istrian feel, heart food that combines Italian influence with Croatian traditions, fantastic wine (in the Italian tradition), low key beaches, and plenty of ruins.

Pula has been occupied by exactly 22 countries, and each has left its mark, although now the area feels very much like forgotten Italian countryside as the city was part of Italy up until 1942. Many of the residents do still speak Italian.

The colosseum that sits in the middle of town, a remnant of the Roman Empire’s occupation, is one of many ruins and archeological sites to explore. Last, there is a vast, still unmapped underground tunnel network beneath the city.

HIGHLIGHTS OF PULA, CROATIA

• Roman ruins and restored Roman empire era structures
• Rocky Beaches and cliff diving
• Food: Cheap truffles, great wine in Istria inspired by the Italian style, and heavier, “Balkan style pasta”
• Malvasia – The local white wine – normally the house wine

WHAT TO DO AND SITES TO SEE IN AND AROUND PULA

• See the Roman Coliseum (The Amphitheater), walking distance from downtown Pula.
• Pula – Built in the 1600s by the Venetians, designed by a French architect
• Roman Temple in Town
• The Triumph Arch
• Pula Daily Market from 7am to 3pm
• Archeological Museum of Istria
• Hop a bus and take the Nr1 line to Stone for 11 Kuna (1.5€) or take an Uber for 5€. Take the bus from the bus station is in front of Corso Kavana & Tapas Bar / Your Private Kingdom Cocktails.
• Go to the café in the campground behind the bus station in Stoja for decent Calamari (60 Kuna) and cocktails.
• Rt Kamenjak – rent a bike in the city at the last bus stop in the city of Premantura. Pick a bike shop at any place in that city.

WHERE TO EAT IN PULA

• Jupiter: Delicious, hearty, Istrian cuisine at an amazing price. Great wine selection too. The Local Wine (Malvasia), Istarski odrezak, and gnocci were the highlights
• Vodnjanka: Great seafood
• Parabuto: Call for reservations as it books up quickly each night
• Tappo: Next to the coliseum. Great for wine and tapas
• Hook & Cook: “Sea to table” restaurant
• Kod Kadre: Meat Restaurant. LOTS of meat

BEST CAFÉ’S IN PULA Have coffee in the main square, in view of a Roman Temple and Ruins. These were my favorite café’s

• Cjvajner Café
• Bistro Nonno
• Caffe Djana

GOING OUT AND NIGHTLIFE IN PULA If you’re planning to party, then you may want to skip Pula. This mellow town is wonderful, filled with great food and wine and plenty of rocky beaches, but the nightlife is scant compared to the rest of Croatia. However, if you plan to go out, these places are your best bet:

For the local scene, go out Thursdays. Start with drinking in the park until about 1 and then move to Uljanik, the local club that specializes in Electronica and Croatian Rock.

For more excitement, go out on the weekends. Pietras Julias – Pizzeria by day, club by night. The music can be a toss-up, depending on the DJ, but this is still the place to go during the weekend.

BARS AND NIGHTLIFE IN PULA

• The Shipyard
• Old City Pub
• Click (the James Joyce Bar)
• Enoteca Istriana – A bar near the Amphitheater that showcases regional wines
• Tapos – next to the amphitheater. Stylish and creative Tapas bar with a very cool/chill vibe

Drinking Tip: Check if the house wine is local; if it is, go for it. It’s usually delicious and always cheap.

PULA WALKING TOUR PATH

• Amphitheater
• Hercules Gate
• Arch of the Surgai (for a family that ruled for 1600 years, the family that won the battle that arose after the death of Julius Ceasar).
• Roman Mosaik – hidden underground House. Punishment of Darci
• Forum (City Center)
• Temple of Augustus
• Front wall from the Middle Ages
• Back Wall from The Temple of Dianna (Goddess of Hunting)
• Sidewall – 1970’s

WHERE TO SLEEP IN PULA

• Crazy House Hostel
• Antique hostel

OTHER TIPS ON PULA

• Summer is the best time to visit, and the most popular restaurants generally close between October and May.

SPLIT, CROATIA

Travelers should visit Split, Croatia, to explore Roman ruins, beautiful beaches, and amazing architecture.

Split is the second-largest city in Croatia, the main port on the Adriatic Sea coast of Dalmatia. The entire town is listed as a UNESCO World Heritage Site, and its most famous landmark is Diocletian’s Palace, a centuries-old historical site that was once one of the most important sites in the Roman Empire. Interesting fact – Roman Emperor Diocletian was the only Roman emperor to leave his station peacefully and avoid being murdered after. He did this by dividing the Roman Empire into fourths appointing a ruler over each so that they may quarrel with each other and leave him in peace. While Diocletian was executing this plan, he built the walled fortress of the palace in Split to retire peacefully and live out the remaining years of his life – as he did – and defend it if necessary. You will see when you arrive that this “palace” is the size of a small town and remained just as peaceful.

A guided tour will take you through its awe-inspiring corridors to some of the highlights, like its vast peristyle with an intricate mosaic floor and golden four-headed animal symbol of old imperial power.

Besides exploring this incredible palace, there are a number of other must-see sights in the area, like the ancient Titus’ Arch on its main promenade and Marjan Hill—a popular park that offers great views of the town.

Moderate to low-budget travelers can still enjoy Split by simply strolling along the seafront promenade where you will see all different kinds of cafes and shops, as well as many outdoor activities including volleyball, table tennis, star gazing or just hanging out on one of many sandy beaches. For those more interested in historical sites or some nightlife and partying, there are plenty of clubs where nightly events featuring both local DJs and international acts. The city’s Old Town is also jam-packed with restaurants offering some great Dalmatian cuisine; however, it can be for the more expensive side.

After soaking up the history and views of Split, hop a boat to the island Hvar to purely soak up the sun, party through the night, and captain your own boat…literally.

WHAT TO DO IN SPLIT, CROATIA

• Visit Diocletian’s Palace
• Enjoy a great, local lunch or dinner on the oceanfront boardwalk – aim for the north end for better prices.
• Specifically, eat at Konoba Matejuska or Hvar Harbor Restaurant
• Explore the city on foot and see all the sights of Split or with a free walking tour
• Visit Paskval Street in the old town for local jewelry and souvenirs.
• Visit the nearby Paklenica National Park for a little fun in nature (2 hours away)
• Take a boat to one of many Croatia islands like Korcula, Mljet and Vis for a day trip, or overnight to Hvar or Brac.
• Firstly, hop a ferry (1 hour, ~$8) to Hvar island to the sun and sip in a place that exists solely for pleasure. Hvar is a Croatian highlight not to be missed. After Hvar, continue by ferry (3.5 hrs, ~$30) from Hvar to Dubrovnik , or return back to Split and travel from Split to Dubrovnik by bus (~4 hours, ~$25)

HVAR, CROATIA

Hvar is a beautiful island in the Croatian Adriatic with amazing architecture, beaches, outdoor activities, and calm urban centers.

Hvar is a Croatian island located in the Adriatic Sea with some of Croatia’s most incredible scenery.

Hvar is also famous for its wines, handcrafted jewelry made out of volcanic stone & silver sea urchins. Tourists can visit different wineries to sample local wines by the glass. The island is very well known for its jewelry, made from the rare Lapis lazuli stone found in nearby mines all over the Balkans, which was highly prized by ancient societies as well as today’s fashion designers.

The vibrant nightlife scene is not necessarily as chaotic as other party islands, but it has its moments – especially if you make your way to the legendary “Carpe Diem.” There are plenty of bars and cafes that have live music every night of the week, and there is also an annual cultural event called “Cherry Night” held every July, during which Hvar celebrates the first sour cherries harvest every year. Local restaurants offer up amazing Mediterranean dishes that will make any foodie happy, including fresh fish and traditional Croatian cuisine like a filet of beef served with a delicious truffle sauce.

WHAT TO DO IN HVAR

• Visit the day bars, Hula Hula Hvar (bar) and Majerovica
• By night visit the never-ending party island of Carpe Diem
• Visit the beaches to the east and west of the main harbor. Beaches in the east rent kayaks for cheaper
• Rent a boat and motor you and your crew around the islands surrounding Hvar

WHERE TO STAY IN HVAR

• Villa Skansi
• The White Rabbit Hostel (Party centric)

MOVING ON FROM HVAR

After Hvar, continue by ferry (3.5 hrs, ~$30) from Hvar to Dubrovnik , or return back to Split and travel from Split to Dubrovnik by bus (~4 hours, ~$25)

DUBROVNIK CROATIA

Known as the Pearl of the Adriatic, Dubrovnik offers more sights and activities than any other city in Croatia. The “Game of Thrones” esque old town is a prime destination for anyone looking to explore some Croatian history and culture and enjoy some amazing views from up high. The city was nearly destroyed during the 1992 war. Since then, Dubrovnik was rebuilt impeccably, maintaining a look that conjures feelings of a “Slavic Venice” considering Dubrovnik (and much of Croatia) were once ruled by the Venetian Empire.

Along with walking along the old city’s high walls and exploring fortifications (complete with cannons), there are also plenty of beautifully secluded beaches not too far away by car or public transportation from Dubrovnik. Just minutes outside of Dubrovnik, you can take it easy lounging on a beach that feels worlds away from busy Old Town. There are smaller gems like Ston where you can see some beautiful medieval architecture, go diving off its limestone rocks nicknamed “The Rocks,” and peaceful Lokrum island, littered with tons of peacocks.

Top your Dubrovnik experience with a sunset towering over the city after a cable car ride up Mount Sryoy, and you cap an epic experience before moving on to even better Balkans destinations.

WHAT TO DO IN DUBROVNIK

• Walk Stradun street, the main street in the Old Town, flanked by Venetian style buildings and Game of Thrones backdrops, ending at the clock tower
• Walk the Old Town city walls
• Old Town sites to see: Rector’s Palace,
• Hop a boat to Lokrum Island for the view, the experience, and peacocks
• Cable car ride up to 412 meters tall Mount Srdj for a birds-eye view of Dubrovnik
• Do a Game of Thrones walking Tour
• Enjoy the beaches that flank the city

TIME NEEDED: 1 to 2 days

ISLANDS NEAR DUBROVNIK TO CONSIDER

• Korcula: Beautiful Venetian architecture and the childhood home of Marco Polo, Princeton Beach, and winemaking
• Elite archipelago of 14 small islands: orchards and fruit groves, white sands beaches, more beautiful architecture and each island has a character all its own

COOL NOTES ON DUBROVNIK:

• The Old Town was a set for Star Wars as well as Game of Thrones

GETTING AROUND DUBROVNIK: On foot is your best and easiest bet as the best parts of Dubrovnik are walkable

WHERE TO STAY: The Old Quarter is a highlight and a great place to stay but pricey. Budget travelers should aim for the surrounding neighborhoods of Pile, Ploce, and Lapad. I highly recommend Hostel Angelina , and there are plenty of options on Airbnb

After you’ve finished exploring Dubrovnik, you’ve likely reached the end of your adventures in Croatia if you are taking the “from north to south” route through the Balkans. If you are in the Balkans for less than two weeks, hop a bus from Dubrovnik to Kotor, Montenegro (~3.5 hours, $8), for insanely beautiful fjords, towering green mountains, and warm, deep blue waters.

If you are on the extended tour through the Balkans, hop a bus on to Mostar, Bosnia, to begin the tour through Bosnia & Herzegovina and Serbia.

BOSNIA & HERZEGOVINA

Ottoman food, culture, and heritage in the Balkans, with dense European history

Bosnia and Herzegovina deliver a unique experience in the Balkans thanks to heavy Ottoman influence in their culture, food, religion, and architecture, and due to the Bosnian history of war – from the assassination of Archduke Franz Ferdinand in Sarajevo, which started World War I, to the Bosnian War in the mid-1990s.

Bosnia used to be a small, medieval kingdom (and existed before Sarajevo); however, in the late 15th century, the Ottomans conquered the Bosnian kingdom, destroying much of the original history and leaving behind much of the culture and architecture we observe today.

Beyond the history-laden walking tours, Sarajevo delivers a rich experience of “Little Vienna meets Little Istanbul.”

Whereas other Balkan destinations deliver pure sunshine and pleasure, Bosnia and Herzegovina deliver culturally enriching and educational experiences in a way any travel will appreciate.

INTERESTING BOSNIAN FACTS: WHY THE BOSNIAN COASTLINE IS ONLY 17 KM LONG

Bosnia &Herzegovina have only 17km of coast: During the period of the Ottoman and Venetian empires, the Venetians controlled present-day northern Croatia. The Ottomans controlled Bosnia (without a coast at the time). Croatia (south of Bosnia) was the Dubrovnik republic. The Dubrovnik republic agreed to give the Ottomans the 17km of coastline to aid trade via access to the oceans, under the conditions that they would fight the Venetians if they ever attempted to invade. This is why present-day Bosnia has this coastline

BOSNIA AND HERZEGOVINA ITINERARY

BOSNIA & HERZEGOVINA TRAVEL INFO

• Mostar: Cliff diving and a small-town feel
• Sarajevo: Vienna meets Istanbul, intense history (Balkan wars, WW2), unique foods,

ESSENTIAL FOOD & DRINK OF BOSNIA & HERZEGOVINA

• Dolma: Served many ways, but stuffed in onion and stuffed in peppers are the most common ways.
• Bey’s Soup or Begova Corba – slow-cooked chicken or beef and vegetables make a thick, slightly creamy, but extremely (simply) delicious soup.
• Klepe: Bosnian meat dumplings served with a creamy yogurt-like cream infused with garlic
• Cevapi: Simple, grilled rounds of minced meat served with a traditional bread somewhat like pita. Simple, yet filling. Good for an uneventful but tasty lunch
• Burek: A savory pastry filled with cheeses, meats, spinach, and the like (comes from Turkey and was brought to the Balkans by the Ottomans). Try it for a quick breakfast.
• Baklava: A layered pastry of flaky bread covered in honey and sugary sweet sauce. Common in many Middle Eastern countries and Greece. Absolutely delicious! Similar to everywhere else in the Balkans and the Middle East, it’s no less enjoyable here. Perfect with a cup of coffee

VISA: Most nationalities can stay for 90 days free without a visa but need to have at least 6 months validity on their passport on arrival

BUDGET/PRICES: $45/ Day for hosteling backpackers and ~$75 for budget travelers staying in budget hotels

CONNECTIVITY: HT Eronet SIM cards for 3G coverage

MOSTAR, BOSNIA  

The famous Old Bridge, built-in 1566 over the Neretva River, is one of Mostar’s most recognizable features. It was destroyed in 1993 when Croat forces bombed it in order to create a dividing line across the Balkans. Reconstruction began in 2002 and ended ten years later; today, it is again one of Bosnia and Herzegovina’s top tourist attractions.

But there isn’t just cultural significance here–this city also has plenty of natural beauty: nearby peaks can reach 3,000 meters high (10,000 feet). Take a hike through Medjugorje (30 minutes away) or its surrounding hillsides for some epic views that are rarely seen by anyone but locals–as well as perhaps sightings of wild animals like deer.

Also, check out Kravice waterfalls – some of the tallest in the Balkans at 80 feet tall – between Split, Croatia and Mostar, 45 minutes away from Mostar. There is a swimming pool at the foot of these falls, and you can take a walk along a path that goes behind them to see where it all comes from. Many day hikers picnic along the shores and enjoy the paradise.

If you need one more destination around Mostar and in Bosnia, consider experiencing some local cuisine on Pliva Lake’s shore, featuring plenty of fresh fish and other delicacies, but expect a 2+ hour drive to get there.

The Balkans are known for their hospitable locals–and this is no different in Mostar! Take the time to talk with some of the friendly people who help run shops and cafes. You’ll be able to get a taste of local life that you wouldn’t otherwise see as a tourist.

HIGHLIGHTS OF MOSTAR BOSNIA

• The Stari-Mos Bridge: The iconic bridge, the “stari most” (meaning “old bridge”), has existed since the 1400s. The bridge was used to connect the commerce and residential neighborhood sides of the river. Now, you can jump from the Stari Most after getting certified by the local coaches – or jump from the lower platform. During my time in Mostar, Red Bull was running a cliff diving competition from the Stari Most Bridge.
• Terrace café by Day and Ali Baba disco by night
• Central mosque
• Top of Franciscan Church
• Heavy Ottoman influence
• Fantastic rich food with strong Turkish notes
• Do the free Mostar walking tour

AROUND MOSTAR

• Kravca Waterfalls
• Roman Ruins
• Pocitjeli: A medieval fortress and walls surrounding a town that dates back to 1444. 30 minutes from Mostar.

TIME NEEDED: 1 Day for Mostar, an additional ½ day today for each day trip out of town

WHERE TO EAT

• Restaurant Sadrvan – a plethora of local, Bosnian cuisine at great prices despite the touristy location and feel. Perfectly situated next to the UNESCO heritage bridge ” Stari Mos.”

GETTING TO MOSTAR

• From Dubrovnik or Split, go to Mostar, then Sarajevo, then depart to Serbia (east) or Montenegro (South)
• Traveling by bus, booking on the GobyBus site is your bet

The capital city of Bosnia and Herzegovina is one of the most varied and historically significant cities in Europe. The heritage of the rule of the Ottoman empire remains clear in the cuisine, architecture, and half of the city’s downtown. Museums host the memories of the Yugoslav wars, a product of the splitting of Yugoslavia, as well as the assassination of Franz Ferdinand by student revolutionaries that kicked off World War 2.

The highlight of the Sarajevo is absolutely standing at the border of east meets west in the downtown border between little Vienna and little Istanbul.

HIGHLIGHTS OF WHAT TO DO IN SARAJEVO

• Monday night party at the “unofficial bar.”
• Walking tour (hopefully with Neno)
• A museum (there are so many)
• Crimes against Humanity Museum (I had no idea of the atrocities, genocide, and torture that took place in Bosnia & Herzegovina
• Sarajevo Tunnel
• Latin Bridge – site of the assassination of Franz Ferdinand and the start of WW2
• Walk the Main Street
• “The cultural meeting point” is the line between mini Istanbul and mini Vienna

BEST RESTAURANTS IN SARAJEVO AND WHAT TO EAT:

• Dalmatinska.
• Amazing Burgers
• Walnut Rakija Aperitif
• Stuff peppers and Zucchini
• Gastro Pub Vucko
• Sarajevo eating tip: Stick to the Old Town for cheap, authentic, and delicious food

GETTING AROUND

• Unofficial shuttles 8, 12, 5 for 25 Euros or 50 Marks

WHERE TO SLEEP

• Hostel Kucha
• Doctors Hostel – comfy private beds, clean facilities, and a relaxed yet welcoming atmosphere
• 6:00AM bus to Belgrade from the east bus station

A proud country with a very Eastern European feel, robust history, and intense nightlife.

Serbia is a Balkan country that, through the countless empires and booms of tourists, has been able to hold on to its history and culture more than its neighbors. At times Croatia feels consumed by summering Europeans and GoT tours, and other cities can feel more Ottoman than Balkan at times. Serbia, on the other hand, feels 100% Slavic and 100% Serbian in a unique way for the Balkans. Serbia offers travelers a chance to experience the Balkans untouched, so it is nearly impossible not to have an amazing time during a trip there.

A uniquely Serbian experience awaits in Belgrade and beyond – from Rakia bars to floating nightlife to college-style warehouse parties, then waking the next day to absorb and discuss culture; Serbia will surprise you with its variety and uniqueness.

Serbia, formerly part of Yugoslavia, has a long tradition of hospitality and welcoming people epitomized by the Balkan proverb: “Whoever visits Serbia in wintertime knows what hospitality is.”

If you’re looking to get away from the tourist traps that can sometimes make traveling feel less personal, Serbia is one of the best places to go.

SERBIA ITINERARY

SERBIA TRAVEL INFO

• Insane Nightlife
• Deep History
• Experiencing a Slavic country that remains very true to its culture, unbent by tourism and other invaders

TIME NEEDED: 2 Days

• Ćevapi
• Karađorđeva šnicla
• Punjena Paprika
• Čvarci

VISA: Serbia is not part of the Schengen zone and offers a free 90-day visa for most visitors

• Hostel: $12/night
• Budget breakfast: $1
• Diner or Café Meal: $5
• Coffee: $1.50
• Beer: $1.50
• Inter-city Train: $4.50
• $60 for budget travelers staying in budget hotels

CONNECTIVITY: SIM Card from VIP, Telenor, or MTS for best 3G connectivity

BELGRADE, SERBIA

Belgrade has a rich history, ranging from Roman times to the Ottoman occupation and Serbian Christianization when Serbs converted to Orthodox Christianity in order to counter moves by Catholic clergymen coming from Rome. It was later captured by Turks in 1459, conquered briefly by Habsburgs in 1688, taken by Austrians in 1717–39 during the Great Turkish War, when it was known as “Belgrad” (Turkish: “Novo Brdo”), and liberated by the Serbian army in 1876 during the Serbian–Ottoman War of 1876–78.

Belgrade was also the capital of several Yugoslav states until the dissolution of the former Yugoslavia in 1992. Belgrade is still the capital and largest city of Serbia. It is the only major Serbian city with a population above one million.

• Do the free Belgrade walking tour, hosted by Hostel Hedonism
• Visit the Belgrade Fortress and hang out at the Park in front of it
• Visit old town (Zaman)
• Visit Sajmiste (remnants of a concentration camp)
• Walk Belgrade’s “Stari Grad” (Old Town), seeing the main walking
• The main pedestrian walk of Kneza Mihaila and plenty of places to eat, drink, and people watch
• Visit Republic Square, at the end of Kneza Mihaila
• The Belgrade Fortress, which has never been overtaken
• Kalemegdan Park surrounding the fortress, which includes the military museum and a zoo
• Walkthrough Skadarjila, Belgrade’s most stylish and bohemian neighborhood
• Enjoy the never-ending nightlife at the riverfront bars and clubs
• Visit Zeleni Vanac farmers market
• Visit the Nikola Tesla Museum
• Visit the neighbors of Zemun and Novi Beograd for a taste of what local life is like outside of the city center.
• Noteworthy landmarks to see: National Assembly, Church of St Mark, Church of St Sava
• Belgrade is the largest city in the Balkans
• The Belgrade fortress has never been captured by a rival

TIME NEEDED: 1-2 Days

ESSENTIAL FOOD, DRINK, AND WHERE TO EAT

• Fabrika (Restaurant)
• Leila Records (Radio-Televizija Beograd) – A café, bar, and record located a 10 minutes walk from the tourist strip but authentically (hipster) Serbian.
• Go to new Belgrade or Zamun for food
• Cafeteria (coffee bar in tourist center)
• Fabrika Restaurant

BARS AND NIGHTLIFE

• Go to Passenger Café (have a Kas beer) next to Hedonism Hostel
• Rakia Bar – The name says it all!
• Splavoli (floating clubs built into houseboats on the Rivershore)
• Drugstore (Warehouse District – Bus 16), Old factory clubs complex

GETTING AROUND: Most of the parts of Belgrade you’ll want to see are situated in the downtown and historic areas, so you’ll be able to explore the entire city on foot

• Bongo Hostel
• Hostel Hedonism
• Take the train (11 hours) or fly back to Podgorica, Montenegro and continue on the Balkans backpacking route.

Novi Sad is the second-largest city in Serbia. It’s known for its significant role at the end of World War I, when it was occupied by Serbian troops and became an important anti-Bolshevik base. This great deed earned it a reputation as a Christian bastion that turned out to be undefendable against merciless Ottoman forces.

The dynamic atmosphere attracts many visitors and workers from abroad, who come to experience this Mediterranean Balkans feel during their Balkans tours. Novi Sad is also famous for its thriving art scene as well as the annual jazz festival attracting celebrities and musicians from around the world every October.

As one of the youngest European capitals, Novi Sad’s restaurants, bars, galleries and concert halls all reflect its cultural diversity, which in turn gives the city an alluring nightlife that is often described as unique.

Novi Sad’s strategic position on the Danube River makes it a natural hub for inland waterway transport, and there are good road connections to all major cities around the Balkans.

• Smaller version of Belgrade
• Student city
• Lively nightlife
• EXIT festival in July – biggest music fest in the Balkans

WHAT TO DO IN NOVI SAD

• Visit the Petrovaradin Fortress
• Walk Dunavska pedestrian street
• Enjoy peace and quiet in green Danube park
• Visit the Museum of Vojvodina which documents 8,000 years of history in the region
• Enjoy the architecture: Name of Mary Church, Novi Sad Synagogue, Vladičanski Dvor (the Bishop’s Palace), St. George’s Cathedral
• Enjoy Strand, the sandy beach on the shore of the Danube
• Visit the Matica Srpska Gallery housing 7,000+ pieces of Serbian art from 1500 to present
• Visit Fruška Gora 30 minutes from town, a National Park of vineyards, pastures, and woodlands that was the shores of an island in the Pannonian Sea 90 million years ago
• Drive 35 minutes away to the vineyard laden small town of Sremski Karlovci

TIME NEEDED: 1 day

MONTENEGRO (HIGHLIGHT OF THE BALKANS)

The southernmost fjords in Europe tower above pristine, beautiful waterways and castles

Montenegro is a small yet intensely beautiful country dominated by the southernmost fjords in Europe, waterways, and towering mountains with centuries-old, medieval-style cities dotting in between. Montenegro’s views and stories feel unreal, whether walking a cobblestone road in the afternoon, taking a cheap boat tour through the waterways with the captain narrating the hidden history, or hiking to a monastery.

For many travelers, Montenegro is the highlight of their Balkan itinerary.

You’ll find the popular sites, Kotor and Budva, frequented by cruise ships and locals (Croatians and Serbians). Montenegro delivers all of the enjoyment of Croatia at about 1/3 the price.

MONTENEGRO ITINERARY

MONTENEGRO TRAVEL INFO

TIME NEEDED: 2 to 3 days for the essentials

• Moussaka (in general)
• Musaka od Ketola

GETTING TO MONTENEGRO

• International travelers coming from outside the Balkans will need to fly into Dubrovnik and then bus to their destination in Montenegro.
• No matter where you come to Montenegro from (within the Balkans), traveling by bus is your best bet.
• From Dubrovnik to Kotor, take a 3-hour bus ($10) .
• From Albania, bus from Skoder (3 hours) or Tirana (6 hours).
• From Mostar, Bosnia, or Sarajevo, taking the bus will be your best option.
• From Belgrade, take the train from Belgrade to Podgorica, and hop a bus from Podgorica to your next destination in Montenegro

VISA: Montenegro is not part of the Schengen zone, and a free 90-day visa is offered on arrival

CONNECTIVITY: Telenor SIM Card best for 3G access countrywide

• Hostel: $12/day
• Transportation: $7 between cities, most cities are walkable and need no transport
• Tours: $35 for Kotor Bay and Lady of the Rocks Tour
• $75/night for budget travelers option for hotels

KOTOR, MONTENEGRO

Kotor is one of the most picturesque cities in Montenegro and a popular destination to visit for people all over the Balkans and beyond!. It’s located on a dramatic bay where the Adriatic crashes into towering limestone walls, forming cliffs and caves. Kotor is home to UNESCO World Heritage Site Old Town, which begins at the foot of Stari Grad (Old Town) and ends at Lovrjenac Rock in the center of the bay, and is considered one of the most beautiful places along the Adriatic Coast. Nearby seaside villages include Tivat, Budva, and Sveti Stefan. With its beautiful beaches, magnificent fortresses and interesting history, Kotor is perfect for travelers of all ages.

Roman Emperor Augustus spent time in Kotor in the 3rd century BC and praised it as a “city defended by strong walls” back then.

If you are planning a Balkans itinerary, be sure to put Kotor on your list. The beauty of this coastal town, as well as its historical significance, will not disappoint.

HIGHLIGHTS (BLURB)

• Kotor Bay Boat Tour
• Visit Our Lady of the Rock Church (UNESCO Site)
• The Kotor Bay Boat tour (€35) is a must-do. 3 hours on a boat spent cruising the crystal clear, blue waters up to the border with Croatia, visiting some interesting sites in between (includes lady of the rock church, underwater tunnel)
• Beaches abound around Kotor , walking distance with water so warm and calm. I went for midnight, moonlit swims every night in Kotor.
• Two fishermen found a picture of the Virgin Mary on a rock in the middle of the water. It was gone the next day but reappeared a week later. The locals decided to build a church on the rock but needed to build an island first. For 100 years, sailors in the bay would drop small rocks from their boats each time they went out, and the town sank enemy ships over the rocks to build the island. Today, the church and the island are UNESCO world heritage sites.
• Old Town and the Castle: The old town is an ancient, walled complex and castle that crawls up the steep mountain behind the city. This complex houses most of the nightlife in Kotor and caters to partiers and backpacker life.

TIME NEEDED: 1 to 2 days for the essentials

GETTING THERE: The destinations in Montenegro are close together, so, anywhere in Montenegro you go, travel by bus. Rome2Rio will be your best tool for planning bus travel, but be smart and book at the train station beforehand.

GETTING AROUND: Kotor is a small and beautiful town that is tightly packed and very walkable. Plan on just walking to get anywhere you’d like to go.

WHERE TO SLEEP IN KOTOR

• Hostel 4 U Montenegro : A hostel on the beach and an anomaly. When I stayed, they had 2000+ reviews and a rating of 9.9 out of 10. On arrival, you won’t check-in. Instead, you’ll be handed a shot of homemade Rakia.
• Old Town Hostel
• Use www.getbybus.com to find your bus out

LOGISTICS VISA: Montenegro is not part of the Schengen zone, and a free 90-day visa is offered on arrival

BUDGET/PRICES: (1 NIGHT ACCOMMODATION, 1 MEAL, 1 BEER)

NOTES : Next to the old town is Kotor’s only shopping complex with a grocery store and anything else you’ll need

BUDVA, MONTENEGRO

Budva is a coastal town with great nightlife and vibrant atmosphere, long sandy beaches, beautiful residences, hotels and hostels. Its off-season city is charming as well – not too big yet numerous things to see and do. The city’s old town centers around its signature pedestrian street, which is the center of activity for visitors, lined with shops, restaurants, bars, and cafes. The Old Town is bordered by the site of a 14th-century Franciscan monastery on one side and a 17th-century Orthodox church on another. A walk through this picturesque area also gives a breathtaking view of mountainside villages and the shores leading up to the Adriatic Sea.

• Soak up the sun on the Budva Riviera
• Walk the Budva Old Town
• Visit the Cathedral of Saint Stephen
• Sail the bay and view Kotor fjord

GETTING AROUND: Just like Kotor, Budva is tightly packed and walkable, so plan out using your feet to get around for the best experience

Undiscovered and packed with experience: the Albanian Alps and the Albanian Riviera are Balkan highlights

Albania is one of the highlights of the Balkans – “young,” undiscovered, and filled with some of the best beaches (the same coastline as you’ll find on the Greek Riviera) and Alpine views in all of Europe, at a travel price that is easily the lowest in the Balkans and Europe.

Albania opened up to the west and abandoned communism much later than its neighbors, leaving Albania with a very young and “new” and somewhat adventurous feel as a country. Though traveling through Albania can be slightly more difficult than its neighbors, the natural beauty you get in return makes Albania a highlight of the region thanks to two things – the Albanian Riviera and the Albanian Alps. As you travel through this country, you will experience the highs of travel and the calamity of “adventure travel.” Some parts will feel like the Greek isles and riviera or Alps of other countries, while other places will feel as chaotic as urban India – in all situations, though, the experience is exquisite and worth the trip.

The Albanian Riviera is the coastline shared with Croatia (to the north), but more interestingly, it is shared with Greece to the south. This is the same immaculate beaches and coastline that would cost 5x as much to travel in Greece, but (in Albania) you experience it with a more authentic, less touristy feel, and without the crowds.

The Albanian Alps are tucked just across the Albania-Montenegro border, near the Albanian towns of Theti, the Valbona River Valley and deliver sights as amazing as the Swiss Alps and Dolomites, surrounded by charming rural towns, yet just a few hours drive from warm beaches. All of this is still under traveled, undiscovered, and perfect for budget travels.

INTERESTING FACTS ABOUT ALBANIA

• Albania was the first atheist country in the world in 1967
• The clock tower in Tirana has been rebuilt several times because, at the start of wars, it was usually the first thing destroyed, and after wars, it was usually the first thing rebuilt
• Albania has over 170,000 bunkers strewn throughout the country
• Albania is the international name based on the first tribe that was found here.

ALBANIA ITINERARY

Consider Albania route –> Tirana –> Shkoder –> Albanian Alps –> Albanian Riviera (Vlore, Sarande, Himare) –> Berat –> Gjirokaster –> Tirana to do the adventurously strenuous experiences (trekking) first, and end the trip on the beachy riviera

Or reverse the route if you would prefer to get adventurous first and then end on the beach.

HIGHLIGHTS ALBANIA

• Tirana (capital) and learning of the country’s history
• The Albanian Riviera and exquisite beaches for insanely cheap
• Sarandë (Best coastal destination)
• Rough camping on the beaches of Albania
• Shkodër
• Berat and Berat National park (UNESCO heritage site)

ESSENTIAL FOOD & DRINK IN ALBANIA

• Byrek: Savory pastry
• The Mediterranean Staples: Olives, cheeses, fresh fruits, fresh vegetables, baklava, byrek
• Stuffed Peppers
• Fried Eggplant

WHEN TO VISIT: Shoulder seasons of April to June and September to October are best, with great temperatures and thin crowds. July and August are great, too but expect heavier crowds.

GETTING THERE: From within the Balkans, international busses connect to Tirana from Montenegro, Kosova, Greece, and Macedonia. From outside of those countries, expect to fly in. Momondo is your best bet for finding cheap flights.

GETTING AROUND: Albania is small and easy to get around. You can travel from north to south in a single day, all via public transport (no need to rent a car). Fulgoni and busses are your best options for travel.

Fulgoni are shuttle buses or minivans that run between cities in Albania. They’re accessible and cheap but often only leave when full. To find them, it is best to ask your hostel or hotel where to find the appropriate one for your next destination.

Long-distance busses are another great option, more reliable, easier to book, and my preferred option.

If you are pressed for time and don’t want to waste time sorting transport, consider a tour from G Adventures or Intrepid Travel.

MOVING ON: From Albania, take a cheap flight into Bulgaria (Sofia and Bansko) for great food adventures, a Bohemian café scene, low-key yet engaging nightlife, and some great day hikes.

VISA: 90 days free with no visa required for citizens of EU countries and 59 other countries, including the US, Australia, Canada, and the United Kingdom ( Source )

ALBANIAN BACKPACKING BUDGET/PRICES: Albania is the cheapest country to travel in the Balkans

• $35 per day total
• Hostel: $11/night
• Good meal: $5
• Transport: $75 to $100 for bussing the entire loop of Tirana to the Riviera to the Alps

WIFI AND CONNECTIVITY:

• Vodafone SIM for 3G is best, also Eagle Mobile, Telekom
• Larger, chain cafes will have wifi, don’t expect strong wifi in small cafes

RECOMMENDED TOURS: (G Adventures, Intrepid, Contiki)

TRAVEL INSURANCE: Albania is adventurous enough that I recommend travel insurance, and Safetywing and World Nomads both suffice

Tirana is the Albanian capital and full of history in Tirana, dating back to about 3000 BC. Tirana was once the crown jewel of the Balkans and was considered Europe’s newest and most modern city. But the Balkans lost a lot of its charm following World War 1 which destroyed major portions of the Balkans, including Tirana and many other cities in Albania.

After the war, a communist government was established, and Albania became a communist state, isolating itself from not but the west, but even China, the Soviet Union, and neighboring Yugoslavian countries.

In 1992, Albanians voted to end communism and instead embrace democracy. Since then, Albanian has been gradually reopening and recovering from decades of isolation.

Tirana is the perfect place to learn about, experience, and absorb this history from walk tours, wherein guides share the history that they lived through, museums, and daily life that has eery remnants of a time passed.

• The City Square: Has a plant from every region of Albania and has 100+ small fountains, so the square stays cool in summer.
• The National Museum located next to the square
• A Free Walking Tour for a firsthand account of Albania’s history
• Block Ware (former place of the elite – now a place to go out)
• Sky Bar – a bar that rotates completely every hour, giving a 360-degree view of the city
• The Bunker Museum
• Visit the Bunk’Art 2 museum: A nuclear bunker turned Albanian dictatorship history museum.
• Take a free walking tour to discover the history
• Visit the National Museum
• Visit Skanderberg Square
• View Et’hem Bej Mosque in the Square
• Cable car up to Dajti Mountain for sunset after bussing to Daytime National Park for a panoramic view of Tirana
• Visit Tiranas New Bazar for food and people watching.

RECOMMENDED RESTAURANTS IN TIRANA

• Oda Restaurant
• Sofra Beratase Restaurant
• Head to Himare, on the Albanian Riviera
• By bus from the south bus station (1000 Leke) at 5:45, 6:15, 1:00pm, 6:00pm
• From center to bus station ~700 Leke

RECOMMENDED TOURS

• Any free walking tour
• The Bunk’Art Tour

The gateway to the Albanian Alps and an ancient city that was home to Illyrian tribes that ruled Albania, Kosovo, Montenegro, Croatia, and Bosnia and Herzegovina. Later, this city was ruled by the Serbs, Romans, Byzantines and Ottomans, and the remnants of these cultures still remain today.

A prep town before heading into Theth and the Albanian Alps. One of the oldest cities in the Balkans.

When not prepping gear and planning transport for the Theth to Valbona hike, walk the city streets to absorb the vibe. The main street (G’juhadol), the shopping street (Kole Idromeno) are great places to walk through.

• Hike up to Rozafa Castle
• Prep for the Theth to Valbona hike (food and equipment are best gathered here)

TIME NEEDED: 1 Night

SHKODER LOGISTICS NOTES

• Plan on going to the SPAR Market in town to stock up on everything you’ll need for the hike
• Bring enough cash for your time in the Alps because there is no ATM in Shkodra.
• Transport to Theth will be best arranged through your hostel or hotel, including transport back from Valbona.

THE ALBANIAN ALPS

The Albanian Alps is a high-altitude mountain range in southern Albania, with the highest peak, Mount Korab towering at 2,764m above sea level. The range spans 100km from north to south and rivals the beauty of the alpine regions elsewhere in Europe, making for the same amazing outdoor experience at a fraction of the price and with a fraction of the crowds.

You already know Albania is already a country that has maintained its beauty with charming rural villages untouched natural landscapes. A relatively small Balkans country, to begin with, having an area of only 28,750 km2, the Albanian Alps continue to be an unexplored gem tucked in the northeast corner of Albania. The Albanian Alps stand as a national park immaculate and pristine trekking and hiking by summer and international ski resorts to explore by winter. Throughout your wanderings here, you’ll find scenic views of snowy peaks surrounded by green pine forests as backdrops to crystal blue watering holes and waterfalls. Tourists choosing to hike and make the most of their time in the region here, around Theth and Valbona, can choose from different levels of difficulty in treks, from easy to difficult, making the adventures here suitable for everyone.

The Albanian Alps offer many activities beyond just hiking, such as sightseeing, kayaking, horse trekking, and skiing. This destination is a perfect escape where you will get to travel throughout the Balkans but have the feeling that you are far away from civilization.

An Alpine Mountain town with hiking as its main draw, and that’s plenty.

• The Theth to Valbona hike through the Albanian Alps (7 hours)
• Hike the trail to Danielle (5 hours)
• Hike to the Blue Eye (7 hours) + Grunas Waterfall on the route

TIME NEEDED: 3 Days

The destination city of an amazing, 7-hour one-way hike from Theta to Valbona. You will complete the hike with a walk through the town with a beautiful view on both sides, ending with dinner at your guesthouse.

Be sure to go out after sunset and take in the night sky. Then rest up and prepare to go back to Shkodra the following day.

• Arrange transport back to Shkodra through your guesthouse for the following day.
• The travel back will require a furgon from Valbona to Fierce, a ferry across Loman Lake to Koman, and another Furlong from Koman to Shkodra.

A central town on the Albanian Riviera surrounded by beautiful beaches and a great base for comfortably exploring as many as your trip allows.

• Gjipe Beach (accessible by kayak)
• Jala Beach (accessible by kayak from Himara)
• Filikuri Beach (accessible by rented kayak)
• Rent a kayak and explore the coastline by day, visit the beaches and coves that dot the shoreline.

RECOMMENDED RESTAURANTS & ESSENTIAL FOOD & DRINK

• Sunset Restorat Bar (more for sunset than the food)

UNESCO World Heritage site and city of 1000 windows and home to Ottoman era homes and fortresses on the route to the Albanian beaches

• Berat Castle
• Holy Trinity church, and Byzantine church from the 13th century
• Walk the Mangalem Quarter (home to Muslims) and Gorica Quarter (home to Christians)
• Make the hour-long hike up the hill behind the Gorica quarter for sunset
• Walk Bulevardi Republika just after sunset to experience “xhiro hours” when friends and family come out to walk and socialize
• Two buses daily run from Berat to Gjirokaster from the Berat Bus Terminal, one at 8 am and the second at 2 pm for ~200 LEK. The ride will be ~3 hours.

GJIROKASTER

A UNESCO world heritage site known as the “Stone City of a Thousand Steps.” One of the Balkans’ oldest cities, Gjirokaster, is worth a visit for its architecture, ancient ruins, and abundant Ottoman-era houses.

WHAT TO DO AND SEE IN GJIROKASTER

• Gjirokaster Castle, a beautiful Ottoman-era fortress sitting atop a hill
• Gjirokaster Museum
• Explore the hundreds of bunkers in Gjirokaster
• Gjirokaster Old Bazar
• Do the Free Walking Tour hosted by Stone City Hostel if staying there
• Hike to the Ottoman era Ali Pasha Bridge

WHERE TO STAY

• Stone Coty Hostel

Calm, quiet, and potent for foodies and lovers of pub culture

Quaint, calm, and charming in a peaceful way, Bulgaria is a wonderfully relaxed destination in the Balkans that is less about natural beauty, architecture, and nightlife than its neighbors and more about food and absorbing culture by osmosis. Additionally, you will constantly be surprised by the history, culture, and cuisine of Bulgaria that you’d never even heard of. At night, the restaurants and nightlife make Sofia and Bansko places that a nomad could hang their hat.

Food in Sofia, Bulgaria is surprisingly amazing ; a strong locavore food scene encourages restaurants to commonly experiment with the foods of the region in a gourmet way. The yogurt you commonly eat started here. My favorite meal in Bulgaria was local wild boar that fed on a particular berry in the forest, served with greens and salad foraged from the same forest, paired with a wine made from the same plucked berry from that forest, and finished with ice cream made from the same berry – and this was a standard meal for my entire time in Sofia for cheaper than an average meal in a western European country.

Bulgaria’s history can be explored with day trips (to Plovdiv) and walking tours wherein you’ll discover ruins and remnants from the Ottoman Empire’s former footprint, as well as how the Bulgarians protested the deportation of Bulgaria’s Jews to concentration camps and came up with a scheme to save the Jews in Bulgaria.

Bulgaria’s pub and local bar is an adventure on its own. Whereas Croatia’s nightlife rivals Barcelona’s, Bulgaria’s dark pubs seem reminiscent of Game of Thrones pubs. As contrasted and low-key as the vibe is, the locals are welcoming, and a few beers on the town in Sofia can be a great time.

All in all, Bulgaria is a less exciting destination, but calmly pleasing in many ways and a great way to end a trip through the Balkans.

BULGARIA ITINERARY

• Shopska Salad
• Tarator Soup
• Shkembe Chorba
• Chushka Biurek (Stuffed Peppers)
• Madradjisko (Egg & Cheese in Clay Pot)
• Palačinka (Bulgarian Pancakes)

BULGARIAN VISA: You can travel in Bulgaria for up to 90 days every 180 days. Visits to Bulgaria do not count towards your 90-day visa-free limit in the Schengen area.

CONNECTIVITY and SIM Cards: Telenor, Vivacom, A1 Bulgaria

• Accommodation: $11/night
• Transportation: $10 between cities, $17 to taxi across the entire city
• Attractions: $10
• Accommodation: $25/night
• Food: $25/day
• Attractions: $10  

Sofia, the capital and largest city of Bulgaria, is a fascinating blend of European and Slavic styles with architecture that encompasses many different periods. The Balkans itinerary would be incomplete without at least a short stopover in Sofia.

This city may seem dull on the surface, but it is actually cultured, entertaining, and has a heavy hipster influence beneath the surface.

A strong gourmet and locavore food scene at insanely low prices (as expected in the Balkans), a great pub and dive bar scene, tons of kitsch coffee shops, and more add up to a destination that doesn’t quite blow your mind but is a perfectly enjoyable and relaxing stopover for backpackers, digital nomads, and anyone who can appreciate artsy and “low key.”

WHAT TO DO IN SOFIA

• Food Tour with Balkan Bites
• Free walking tour with Sofia free tours
• Go on a graffiti tour or simply wander the town and admire the street art
• 10 pm pub crawl every night from Hostel Mostel
• Consider day use of the spa and sauna at Central Hotel Sofia if you’ve been running too hard.
• Wander and explore the countless cafes as there’s a strong bohemian scene in this city
• Hike up Vitosha Mountain, just outside the city
• Visit “ The Red Flat ” for a peek into what life was like under communism
• Do the Seven Rila Lakes Hike, glacial likes high in the surrounding mountains
• Day trip outside the city to the colorful Rila Monastery
• Landmarks and architecture to see: Alexander Nevsky Cathedral

TIME NEEDED : 1 day for Sofia proper, 2 days including hikes

GETTING THERE:

• Fly in as Sofia is one of Europe’s most affordable cities to fly into. I paid $32 for my flight in and $1.50 to get from the airport to my hostel.

WHERE TO STAY:

• Hostel Mostel: At $11, I got a dorm bed, made tons of friends, and all-you-can-eat breakfast and free dinner. The crowd here was the best part.
• Consider heading to Turkey as a train ticket to Istanbul is only $29.
• Balkan Bites Walking Tour
• Sofia Free Walking Tour
• Free Sofia Graffiti Tour (or just wander on your own)

Bansko is best known as a budget-friendly ski location and mountain town for digital nomads. If you’re traveling to Bulgaria in the winter, stop off for some snowboarding and skiing. Outside of winter, your trip to Bansko will be filled with hikes and day trips to nearby cities.

If you’re on the long trail, backpacking for months, Bansko is worth stopping at for some outdoorsy relaxation. If your schedule is tight, skip this destination and allocate more time for other Balkan cities.

WHAT TO DO IN BANSKO

• Ski-in the wintertime
• Hike to Vihren Peak
• Rila Monastery Day Trip
• Pirin National Park Day Trip

TIME NEEDED: 1 Day + 1 day for each of your chosen hikes/day trips

RESTAURANTS

• Hadjidragana Tavern
• Skaptoburger
• Salted Cafe

ALTERNATE DESTINATION: THE BULGARIAN BLACK COAST

City 1: Varna – The Marine Capital of Bulgaria (1 Day)

• The Retro Museum
• The Stone Forest
• Cathedral of the Assumption of the Virgin
• The Butterfly House

City2: Sunny Beach – A sunny vacation spot filled with nightlife (1 Day)

• Erma Turkish Bath
• Church of Saint Sophia

THE ADDITIONAL BALKANS DESTINATIONS

Kosovo (optional).

Honestly, many other countries in the Balkans have more to offer, but the act of visiting this formerly war-torn country will help you open your mind and shed stereotypes that will enhance your travels down the road. Though Kosovo lacks the sights to see that its neighbors do, Kosovo is very safe to travel to, and visiting can open your mind.

If you are traveling the region for less than three weeks, skip Kosovo and save the travel days for another highlight destination (Albania, Montenegro, or Croatia).

If you are backpacking in the Balkans and have plenty of time, stop through Pristina, Kosovo and walk the town, and be sure to read the history of Kosovo to truly appreciate how far this country has come.

KOSOVO ITINERARY

WHAT TO DO IN PRISTINA

• Take the cathedral elevator up for a good vantage point of the new city
• Check out the statue of Bill Clinton
• Walking tour – 11 AM daily from the steps of the National (Library)?
• Walk down the main drag (??name and Mother Theresa road) in the evening to see normal life.
• National Museum

VISA: For most nationalities, no visa is necessary for up to 90 days

MACEDONIA (OPTIONAL)

With all of the other amazing sights to see in the Balkans, it is difficult to justify detouring to Macedonia instead of spending extra days in one of the country’s neighbors.

Skopje’s Bazar, reminiscent of Turkey, is topped by Little Istanbul (and Little Vienna) in Sarajevo, Bosnia. The countless statues in Skopje’s downtown are interesting but more reminiscent of Las Vegas than a Balkan backpacking adventure and are one-upped by the old walled cities in Croatia and Montenegro.

At the same time, Lake Ohrid’s, and Ohrid’s, beauty are topped by that of Kotor Bay in Montenegro and Lake Shkoder/Shkodra on the Montenegro /Albania border.

Plus, all of these other options above are a shorter distance to other worthwhile sites.

If you are traveling or backpacking the Balkans for less than three weeks, skip Macedonia and spend more time in the other, highlight locations.

If you are traveling the Balkans for more than three weeks and want to include Macedonia, do a quick layover in Skopje and add Ohrid and Lake Ohrid if you are enchanted enough.

MACEDONIA ITINERARY

• Poletti Peperki

VISA: Visas are not required for tourist or business trips of less than 90 days within a six-month period.

VISA INFO FOR THE BALKANS

General: For most borders in the Balkans, you can show up to the border and easily get a 90-day visa or a 90-day entry, visa-free as long as you have 6 months validity on your passport. Slovenia is the only Schengen zone country in the Balkans, sharing its 90 visa with the entire Schengen zone.

Country by Country Balkans Visa Information:

• Slovenia: Schengen Zone country meaning 90 days in a 180 day period, shared with all of the Schengen zone / EU countries
• Croatia: No visa is required for tourist visits less than 90 days – Croatia is not part of the Schengen zone
• Montenegro: Montenegro is not part of the Schengen zone, and a free 90 day visa is offered on arrival
• Bosnia & Herzegovina: Most nationalities can stay for 90 days free without a visa but need to have at least 6 months validity on their passport on arrival
• Serbia: Not part of the Schengen zone and offers a free 90-day visa for most visitors
• Albania: 90 days free with no visa required for citizens of EU countries and 59 other countries, including the US, Australia, Canada, and the United Kingdom
• Bulgaria: You can travel to Bulgaria for up to 90 days every 180 days. Visits to Bulgaria do not count towards your 90-day visa-free limit in the Schengen area. Bulgaria is an EU country but is not in the Schengen zone.
• Macedonia: Visas are not required for tourist or business trips of less than 90 days within a six-month period.
• Kosovo: For most nationalities, no visa is necessary for up to 90 days

CROSSING BORDERS IN THE BALKANS

Border crossings in the Balkans are fairly easy, for the most part. Just be sure to have at least 6 months validity on your passport.

The only border crossing difficult will happening attempting to travel from Kosovo into Serbia. You will have no issues traveling from Serbia into Kosovo, however, traveling from Kosovo to Serbia is forbidden and you will not be allowed through the border.

MONEY AND CURRENCIES ACROSS THE BALKANS

With the exception of Slovenia, Kosovo, Montenegro, and Greece, each country in the Balkans uses its own currency, so be sure to limit the amount of cash you convert to avoid losing too much on the exchange when you exit.

Better yet, aim to keep the bulk of your cash in Euros or US dollars and only exchange as necessary.

The respective currencies for each country in the Balkans are:

• Euros are the standard currency in Slovenia, Greece, Kosovo, Montenegro
• Croatia – Kunas/HRK
• Bosnia and Herzegovina – Bosnia Herzegovina convertible mark/KM –
• Serbia – Serbian Dinar
• Bulgaria – Bulgarian Lev
• România – Romanian Leu
• North Macedonia – Macedonian Denar
• Albania – Albanian Lek

You will receive the best exchange rate at ATMs, so avoid exchanging at money changers if all possible.

TRAVEL INSURANCE: DO YOU NEED IT IN THE BALKANS?

If you can’t afford travel insurance, you can’t afford to travel.

As often as this saying is repeated, it doesn’t make it any less true.

Despite the fact that most of the travel in the Balkans is slow-paced and far from danger, it is wise to pick up travel insurance just in case you get a stomach bug, have an unexpected accident, or fall victim to something related to the recent pandemic.

I normally recommend World Nomads for adventurous travel and high-risk travelers, thanks to World Nomads’ robust coverage.

However, the Balkans is low-risk enough that I recommend inexpensive (yet still reliable) Safetywing travel insurance, as that is the insurance I currently use and have had for the past two years. At ~$40 a month, you can’t afford not to.

GETTING TO THE BALKANS

Budapest Ferenc Liszt International Airport and Dubrovnik’s Čilipi Airport are the cheapest airports in the region with the most flight options per day.

If you are flying into the Balkans, where you should fly into depends on whether you plan to travel from south to north or north to south through the Balkans.

If you plan to travel from the north (Slovenia, northern Croatia) to the south, I recommend flying into Budapest’s international airport. Budapest will have the cheapest inbound international flights in the region.

If you plan to travel south to north, beginning in Albania, fly into Dubrovnik’s international airport (this will be the cheapest airport for inbound international flights in the south), then travel south into Albania, looping back up to Dubrovnik and Montenegro and continue your tour of the Balkans.

WHEN TO VISIT THE BALKANS

Anytime is a great time to visit the Balkans, but the shoulder season is by far the best season to visit the Balkans. Spring and fall, between April to June and September to October, are the shoulder seasons and the best times to visit the Balkans. If you can visit in either window, you’ll have warm waters and sunny skies, yet not too hot, while exploring mostly empty streets. Additionally, prices will ½ the normal tourist season (summertime) prices.

During the Balkans summer of July to September, you’ll have perfect beach weather with amazingly warm waters but plan on sharing the views and beaches with throngs of travelers. Plan on Dubrovnik, Hvar, and Budva to be exceptionally crowded. Also, plan on any of the old town destinations at sea level, such as Split, Dubrovnik, and Hvar, to be scorching hot on the pedestrian streets.

For more open-minded travelers, winter has appeal as well. Winter brings a cold and eerie calm to the Balkans with an equal amount of beauty. If you can brave the cold, you’ll have the cities to yourself. However, plan on the guesthouses, hostels, and hotels closing shortly after tourist/summer and being closed for the winter. You should book accommodation well in advance to avoid booking issues.

WHERE TO STAY IN THE BALKANS

Based on my experiences booking accommodations in the Balkans, both good and bad, I recommend the following booking guidelines

• Hostels & Boutique Hotels for Backpackers and Budget Couples
• Booking.Com for Stays 3 Days or Shorter
• Airbnb for Stays Longer Than 4 Days Or Longer

SOLO TRAVELERS, BACKPACKERS, AND BUDGET COUPLES: OPT FOR THE GREAT HOSTELS IN THE BALKANS

The Balkans are extremely developed, just as well developed as Western Europe, so you will have plenty of accommodation options to fit your tastes or budget.

For solo travelers and backpackers (especially if on a budget), I highly recommend hostels. The hostel standard in the Balkans, especially in Croatia and Montenegro, is very good while being very cheap. For instance, Hostel 4U in Kotor Montenegro is about $12 per night, has maintained a well-deserved 9.8 or 9.9 rating for the last 5 years, and is literally situated on a beach. The beds are comfy, the dorms are clean, and the building seems more similar to a chalet from Game of Thrones than a hostel. Best of all, this is the general standard throughout the Balkans – with the exception of Albania and Kosovo.

For couples and more private budget travelers who still want to be social, private rooms in hostels throughout the Balkans deliver a great balance between the social and the isolated feel of hotels while being friendlier on the pocket.

Bottom Line: For solo travelers, backpackers, and budget travelers, hostels are a great bet. I recommend booking on Hostelword as the site has most of the hostels (or at least the good ones) available on the site.

TRAVELERS STAYING FOR 3 DAYS OR LESS: BOOK VIA BOOKING.COM

If you’re staying less than four days and not interested in hostels, you’ll find the best value for your money and selection on Booking.com. Simple as that.

TRAVELERS STAYING FOR 4 DAYS OR LONGER: AIRBNB

If you’re staying for four days or longer, I recommend booking via AirBnB for a more cost-efficient experience and to better experience what life is truly like off the tourist circuit. While hotels (on Booking.com) tend to be in touristy areas, AirBnB’s and hostels are more often in real neighborhoods where people actually live. As a result, you’ll naturally be exposed to the restaurants, bars, and experiences that locals frequent in their daily lives – which adds a whole new layer to your travels.

BALKANS TRAVEL BUDGET

The Balkans are the cheapest place in Europe to travel and one of the best places in the world in terms of “bang for buck”.

10 TIPS FOR TRAVELING THE BALKANS ON A BUDGET

• Book hostels . Hostels for your Balkans accommodations instead of booking hotels. Hostels in the Balkans can be as cheap as $10 to $15/night and often offer free breakfast too.
• Spend more time in fewer places. The longer you stay in a destination, the cheaper it gets, as room accommodation is cheaper by the week or month than by the day, you learn the great “local” restaurants with cheaper and better food, and you spend less money per week traveling between towns.
• Go in the shoulder season between April to May and September to October when the tourists are fewer, and everything (sites, accommodation, food) is as much as ½ high season prices.
• Sleep, eat and drink off the main street . Sleeping, eating, and drinking on the tourist thoroughfare, a couple of streets over, will cost you 25% to 50% more than walking an extra 5 minutes.
• Use “Trip Advisor Cheap Eats” to find the best food that fits your budget
• Pick destinations wisely – according to your budget and tastes. Croatia is amazing, but the most expensive in the Balkans. Albania delivers amazing beaches and outdoors for 25% of the Croatia coast.
• Bus everywhere as your primary mode of transportation. Flights are extremely inconvenient in the Balkans, and taxis are expensive and unnecessary. Checkout out the best list of Balkans bus and travel booking sites here .
• Travel carry-on only to save fees on flights traveling in and make life easier when transiting by bus – so you can keep your bags with you.
• Grab a beer and quick food to go, make friends, and eat in the park or on the water for a cheap night out or pregame, instead of burning money at a bar. The Balkans has a great tradition of gathering in parks and green spaces around sunset and some great parks to take advantage of.

ESSENTIALS FOR YOUR BALKANS PACKING LIST

You can get by with very little in terms of packing while you travel the Balkans. However there are a few items that are essential for a good experience and making the most of your opportunities in the Balkans.

• Sport sandals: Walkable, adventure-ready sports sandals such as Chacos or minimalist Xero Trails are perfect for the Balkans because so many experiences involve walking and hiking but are equally close to beaches. Whether you are walking Hvar to get to a beach or on a boat tour in Montenegro, you’ll appreciate having comfy sandals that are ready to get wet. Any of these seven great travel sandals will work as well.
• Walkable shoes: Many of the experiences in the Balkans will involve walking, whether on tour, looking at the architecture, or walking to catch a bus. Make sure you have comfortable shoes for walking to make it a 100% enjoyable experience. This mega list of travel shoes has plenty of options if you don’t have a solid pair of travel shoes.
• If you come in December or January or between April and June, be sure to bring a rain shell as those are the rainiest months in the Balkans. Outside of those months, it’s still smart to keep a waterproof layer in your backpack
• If you max out your Balkans experience, you will spend A LOT of time in swim trunks and shorts. Especially if you visit during summer or just outside of the window, you’ll be so hot that pants will be unbearable. Make the most of it by bringing at least 2 pairs of swim trunks, ideally that double as walk shorts too. I highly recommend the Outlier New Way shorts , as they’re as stylish as they are swim-ready and functional, but check out these 6 other shorts that are perfect for travel .
• In Croatia, Montenegro, and Albania, the best adventures are aquatic, whether on relaxing beaches, at waterfalls, or cliff diving. Do yourself a favor and bring a simple roll-top waterproof bag like this to keep your phone, passport, and headphones safe while you swim between boats. The bag takes up minimal space and pays HUGE dividends in function.  

HOW TO GET AROUND THE BALKANS

Best options for transport through the Balkans (in order).

• SHORT FLIGHTS

Though there are international airports in Dubrovnik and the neighboring countries, flights between Balkan countries are fairly expensive – so don’t expect the budget airline deals of western Europe. Additionally, when you account for time and hassle spent checking bags, processing through security, and getting to and from the airport from in town, it takes just as long as a bus trip from anywhere to anywhere in the Balkans, but it’s 10x the price. To save time and money in the Balkans, don’t fly; just take the bus.

Best booking platforms for booking buses in the Balkans.

• General Buses in Balkans:  Flixbus
• Montenegro –  https://busticket4.me/EN
• Croatia –  https://www.buscroatia.com/
• General Planning:  Rome2Rio

For more info on transport in the Balkans, check out the Balkans section of this article How to Get Around while Traveling .

BALKANS TRAVEL FAQ

• Which Balkan country is cheapest?
• What countries are in “The Balkans”
• Will language be a problem in the Balkans
• How do you get around the Balkans?
• What is the best time to visit the Balkans?
• Where to start when backpacking the Balkans?
• What is it like crossing borders in the Balkans?

WHICH BALKAN COUNTRY IS CHEAPEST?

The cheapest country in the Balkans by far is Albania. Considering the country shares the same riviera as Greece and Croatia and accommodations and food are ¼ the price of the other two countries if you want a budget travel experience Albania is a no brainer.

At the same time, Montenegro is as expensive as Serbia and Bosnia; however, the value of the experience surpasses the cost. Montenegro has the southernmost fjords in Europe make the nature comparable to what you would see around Bergen, Norway, but at a fraction of Scandinavian prices. This makes Montenegro a high “value to money” option as well.

WHO IS BACKPACKING THE BALKANS BEST FOR

• Budget backpackers looking for a cheaper alternative to Europe
• Adventurous travelers, aiming to get off the beaten path to truly new destinations, like Albania, Kosovo, and changing destinations like Bosnia.
• Nature lovers that could spend days on end exploring beautiful lakes, alpine mountains, endless coastlines
• Partiers that find the all-night music and dance of Belgrade’s riverfront clubs and Hvars club island unusually alluring
• History lovers desiring to see old Roman cities and castles in pristine condition (like Diocletian’s palace in Split) or learn the “interesting” histories of the Balkans’ past struggles, like Albania, and Bosnia & Serbia

Note that though you can find food, parties, history, and peace & quiet in the Balkans, you can very easily fill a trip with one type of experience (i.e., quiet, nature) and fill a multiple months-long itinerary. If any of the above.

WHAT ARE THE BALKANS? WHAT COUNTRIES ARE IN “THE BALKANS”

The “Balkans” is the cluster of 11 countries situated in the Balkan peninsula, the name for the Balkan mountain range situated in Bulgaria.

The following 11 countries are regarded as the “Balkan states” that are mostly situated within the Balkan Peninsula.

• Bosnia and Herzegovina
• North Macedonia

Turkey is also partly situated in the Balkan peninsula. Though some people may not regard Turkey as a Balkan country from a cultural standpoint, Turkey is so amazing and so close that it should absolutely be part of your Balkan itinerary.

As you travel through the Balkans, you’ll notice that, with the exception of Greece, the countries and cultures are strikingly familiar while also being drastically different – especially Albania and Bosnia.

During your Balkan tour, I highly recommend adding Turkey to your itinerary because it’s so close, it’s so cheap, and offers such a fantastic travel experience.

WILL LANGUAGE BE A PROBLEM IN THE BALKANS

No, language will not be a problem in the Balkans. For every single destination on this itinerary, you will be able to easily navigate the experience in English. 

WHERE TO START WHEN BACKPACKING THE BALKANS?

Ljublana, Slovenia or Dubrovnik, Croatia are your best options for starting your Balkans itinerary.

Ljublana as a start point offers you a very straight forward top to bottom itinerary. If you start in Slovenia, consider flying into Budapest and taking the train into Ljublana.

If you don’t want to start in the peace and calm of Slovenia, Dubrovnik is the other best option for starting. Dubrovnik has a large international airport and is central to every location in the Balkans, allowing you to do one large loop.

OTHER GREAT ARTICLES ABOUT BACKPACKING THE WORLD

• The 9 Best South America Backpacking Routes for 2 Weeks to 6 Months of Travel
• 5 Essential Routes for Backpacking the World and Visiting Every Continent
• The Balkan Walk: The Perfect Backpacking Itinerary for the Balkans
• 3 Months in Southeast Asia: A Perfect Plan for the the “Banana Pancake Trail”
• The Mini Backpacking Trails: 15 Itineraries Aroudn the World for 2 Weeks or Less

ABOUT THE AUTHOR

Carlos is a nomad, slow traveler, and writer dedicated to helping others live abroad and travel better by using his 7+ years of experience living abroad and background as a management consultant and financial advisor to help other nomad and expats plot better paths for an international lifestyle. Click here to learn more about Carlos's story.

All Destinations , Asia , China , Overland Itineraries , Plan Your Trip

One month in china itinerary for first timers.

If you’re reading this China itinerary, I’m guessing you’re planning a trip to the country. China is one of my favourite countries to travel in. It’s brimming with history and culture, from the Terrcotta Warriors to its many, many temples, but it has the most dynamic modern scene in cities like Shanghai and Guangzhou. It has desert, beaches and mountains (lots of the latter!), as well as some of the most impressive megacities you’ll likely ever see. I’ve been to China four times now, so I know a thing or two about planning a China itinerary.

Planning Your China Itinerary

First up, don’t feel overwhelmed.

On my first time in China, I landed in Beijing with no guidebook, no phrasebook and I only knew how to say ‘ this is my foot’ , ‘ you are very beautiful ‘ and ‘ make me a cup of tea ‘ in Mandarin.

These phrases are probably only useful to a flirty shoe model with a caffeine addiction and didn’t help me at all when I was navigating the airport, buying a subway ticket and finding my way to my hostel. But I still made it, not only to my hostel but travelling around for two whole months.

I am lucky to have family from China – my stepmum was born here, and I did spend some of my first two months in China with her and her family (although I arrived alone).

I have had some help in that regard, but I’m going to pass on all that I’ve learnt about travel in China from my family in this post and others.

You don’t have to know Mandarin to spend 1 month in China, but I do recommend some forward planning.

First thing first – get your Chinese visa sorted. It’s a bit of a complicated process, but you can check out this handy guide on how to get a Chinese visa  for some great pointers.

The second step is to think about the best places to visit in China and work out exactly where you want to go. Luckily for you, I’ve done all the hard work! Here’s a month’s China itinerary to see the main highlights of the country, including tips for travelling to each destination.

Travelling in China Essentials

(there’s a lot of long bus rides), a rain mac (it can rain at any time of year!), a good first aid kit, a bumbag to keep all of my valuables in and a good smartphone to download some useful apps for China.

One Month in China Itinerary

This one month in China itinerary includes every place that I visited in the country on my first trip, when I was keen on seeing all of China’s highlights. I have returned and visited other places since. On my first trip I also spent a week in Liaoyuan, a non-touristy city in China, visiting family. I loved visiting and would recommend that anyone add a trip to a non-touristy city to their China itinerary, but because this post discusses the highlights, I haven’t included it. But read this post to learn about why I think everyone should visit a non touristy city in China ! This China itinerary covers the following cities:

• Beijing (and the Great Wall of China)
• Xi’an (and Huashan Mountain)
• Guilin (and the rice terraces of Longsheng)

It’s a very packed one-month itinerary for China, but it is feasible. If you have more time in China, I’d also recommend the following places that I have since visited: 

• Yunnan: Travel in Yunnan takes you through a diverse landscape that shifts from dramatic snow-capped mountains to sprawling rice terraces. The province is a mosaic of ethnic cultures, with the Naxi of Lijiang and the Bai of Dali offering rich traditions and vibrant festivals. Your trip isn’t complete without visiting the Stone Forest, a natural wonder of towering limestone formations. Plan to explore the ancient town of Lijiang, a UNESCO World Heritage Site, known for its maze-like streets and canals. When hunger strikes, indulge in local flavors like “Crossing the Bridge Noodles,” a must-try dish. .
• Chongqing : a popular layover destination, Chongqing has some attractions within the city, like the old quarter and various temples, and is also the gateway to the Yangtze River.
• Guangzhou : one of China’s crazy megacities, Guangzhou has modern architecture twinned with a compelling and multicultural history.
• Hangzhou : one of China’s most beautiful cities, Hangzhou has various scenic areas arranged around a beautiful lake.
• Nanning : again, a good jumping place if you’re travelling into/ out of South East Asia (you can take a direct train from Hanoi to Nanning), Nanning is a modern city with not all that much in the way of attractions – but it’s still quite interesting to check out local life.
• Erlian : right at the border of Mongolia in the Gobi Desert, Erlian is famed for prehistoric dinosaur history and is a great place to enjoy Mongolian culture without actually crossing over. If you are crossing into Mongolia, check out my guide to Ulaanbaatar , its capital.
• Zhangjiajie : famed for being the inspiration to Avatar, Zhangjiajie has beautiful mountains and some great hiking opportunities. You can check out my YouTube video below:

Below is a sample one-month China itinerary that I have put together from my four trips to the country and conversations with my Chinese relatives.

As you can see, this itinerary covers a lot of ground in a month.

It includes a fair amount of overnight trains that you might find very tiring.

That being said, I’d recommend thinking about your own travel style.

If you need to omit some of these places, then do so.

If you’re not sure what to omit and what to include, here’s my advice: on a first trip to China, Beijing, Shanghai and Xi’an are must-see cities to understand the nation’s culture and history.

Guilin is probably the most accessible place for nature, and from there it’s an easy jumping-point to Hong Kong.

Jiuzhaigou is my favourite nature spot in China, but you do need to go to Chengdu to get there.

Zhangjiajie is stunning, and worth seeing if you’ve got time.

Hangzhou is a really special Chinese city and worth seeing to prove that cities in China can be beautiful.

Nanjing has a lot of WW2 history, a very sombre but significant message from China’s dark past.

These are all destinations that are worth visiting in their own right.

However, if you think that your one month in China itinerary will be too rushed with all these destinations, it might be worth prioritizing what you want to see.

That being said, it’s entirely possible to do this China itinerary in one month, and even have a couple of days wiggle room!

So let’s get into this one month China itinerary.

Beijing and the Great Wall – 5 days

Start your China trip in its lively and chaotic capital. Beijing is perfect for China first-timers because it has all the conveniences of any large city but is still bursting with culture and history. From Beijing airport, you can take a metro all the way to the city centre, where a lot of hostels and hotels are located.

For the sake of this one month in China itinerary I’m recommending you spend three days in Beijing to see the highlights – but you could easily spend much longer. If you want to take your time to soak in the Chinese capital, 5 days in Beijing is perfect – if you want to take a more leisurely pace (which is a bit of an oxymoron in Beijing, but we’ll go with it), you could spend over a week here. 

Day One: Tiananmen Square and the Forbidden City

Spend your first full day in China visiting two of its most famous attractions: Tiananmen Square and the Forbidden City.

Be amazed at the vastness of Tiananmen Square, and snap a photo of the famous gates which are looked over by a portrait of Mao Zedong.

You can even visit his Mausoleum if you arrive early enough! Then walk through to the Forbidden City, an area filled with magnificent architecture and grandeur. Spend your afternoon wandering around the National Museum of China, which will definitely inspire you to learn more about this compelling country!

Day Two: The Summer Palace and the Temple of Heaven

On day number 2 in Beijing, I’d recommend visiting the Summer Palace and the Temple of Heaven. If you thought the Forbidden City was grand, the Summer Palace will blow your mind away. Wander around this royal park and be amazed at both the enchanting pagodas and the stunning gardens. After a morning here, be transported to the equally compelling Temple of Heaven – one of the most instagrammable places in Beijing – a medieval religious site used by historic emperors. In the evening, check out the Beijing Opera – you can purchase tickets here.

Day Three: Historical and Cultural Beijing

Start your day at the Silk Market, where you can see some of the finest examples of Chinese Silk – which caused all sorts of cultural connections throughout the 12th century including the establishment of the Silk Road in places like Uzbekistan and the introduction of Islam to Central Asia and Western China. It was largely down to this Chinese product that one of the best land routes was ever made. Here you can check out the silk products, and buy some for yourself if you want some souvenirs. Next, head to Lama Temple. This temple sees fewer tourists than the ones that you saw the day before, but it’s actually one of my favourites. Then you can spend the afternoon exploring Beijing’s hutongs, like Nanluoguxiang, and checking out its art scene at the 798 Art district.

I go into this itinerary in much more detail in my three days in Beijing post – check it out!

Where to Stay in Beijing

Day four and five: the great wall of china.

Visiting the Great Wall of China is a must on anyone’s Chinese wish list. But camping on the Great Wall is even more compelling, right? Take an overnight camping tour with China Hiking to Jiankou, a completely unrestored section of the Great Wall. Relish in the serenity that comes with being at such a quiet area of this wall, and enjoy the architectural marvel that so many people associate with this Asian country.

You will camp overnight on the Great Wall, and a transfer back to Beijing will be organized in the morning. Spend the rest of the day visiting some spots you’ve missed out, or just chilling out ready for your overnight train to Xi’an.  Take an overnight train from Beijing –  Xi’an. I’d definitely advise booking trains in advance for your first time in China – it is very daunting to try to negotiate buying tickets with no Chinese and they often sell out. Use this link to see the latest deals . 

Xi’an – 3 days

Xi’an is probably my favourite Chinese city – I love the merge of cultures, the delicious street food, and the fairly compact layout of it all. It’s steeped in history – it’s one of the four ancient capitals of China, after all – and most of your China itinerary here will be spent exploring the stories that the city has to offer. Of course, there’s a trip out the city to see the world-famous Terracotta Warriors, and a day trip to Huashan Mountain as well.

Day Six: Xi’an City

Once upon a time all cities in China were walled. Xi’an is one of few cities whose walls have not been abolished and can be explored at your own leisure.

Spend the morning on top of these walls, either walking along them or exploring the walls by bike (they can be rented from the top of the walls), before descending into the city’s Muslim Quarter. Here you can enjoy the delicious and cheap street food and walk around Xi’an’s Great Mosque.

Day Seven: The Terracotta Warriors

On day two, take a transfer to the Terracotta Warriors, an ancient selection of soldiers that were made with the intention to protect an emperor after his death. The ensemble of figures is an amazing feat – be sure to snap lots of pictures before leaving! Spend the afternoon wandering around the Wild Goose Pagoda, an ancient building from the Tang Dynasty.

Day Eight: Huashan Mountain

For you last day in Xi’an, take an early transfer to Huashan Mountain, a sacred Daoist mountain (and thought by some to be the most dangerous mountain in China!). The path around it can be easily navigated and it offers some spectacular views. But be sure to descend to catch the last bus back to Xi’an that night at 7pm! Read my full guide on a day trip to Huashan Mountain and my thoughts on its safety here .

Where to Stay in Xi’an

Overnight train from Xi’an to Chengdu – use this link to see the latest deals . 

Chengdu – 2 days

Day eleven: chengdu panda base.

Day Twelve: Leshan Giant Buddha

The next day, you could visit the world’s largest Buddha at Leshan, which is 2 hours away. Spend the day exploring the scenic area and the many Buddhas it contains, as well as marvelling at the Big Buddha itself.

Where to Stay in Chengdu

Day thirteen: bus to jiuzhaigou.

Day Fourteen: Jiuzhaigou National Park

Spend the day exploring Jiuzhaigou National Park . With gorgeous waterfalls and outstandingly blue lakes, this park shows off the very best of China’s nature.

Day Fifteen: Exploring Jiuzhaigou’s Surroundings

Jiuzhaigou isn’t technically in Tibet, but it’s culturally as close as you can get without a separate visa. Spend the day exploring the surroundings of Jiuzhaigou and enjoying the sub-Himalayan culture of this area of Asia. You can do so by hiring a driver (you’re unlikely to get an English-speaking driver, but if you ask your hotel/ hostel for someone to show you some local spots they will be happy to oblige and recommend places).

Where to Stay in Jiuzhaigou

Day sixteen: bus to chengdu.

Take the bus back from Jiuzhaigou to Chengdu. Once you’re off the bus, transfer to the train for an overnight journey from Chengdu to Nanjing. Use this link to find the best deals . 

Nanjing – 1 day

Day Ten: Nanjing Massacre Memorial

During your one day in Nanjing, the Nanjing Massacre Memorial . This is a difficult place to visit but a very important one. Here you will learn all about one of the most gruesome genocides of the Second World War, and the story of the war in Asia. The attached museum is fantastic and gives a real insight to WW2 in this part of the world, which is very important to learn about, especially if you only studied European WW2 history in school like most schools in Britain. Take an overnight train from Nanjing – Guilin. Use this link to purchase tickets . 

Where to stay in Nanjing

Shanghai – 3 days.

Shanghai is one of China’s most-visited cities, and the most western-friendly. The city is a huge, glittering, metropolis, with over 23 million inhabitants, but its land size, city planning and public transport make it relatively easy to both enjoy its urban attractions and green spaces – and there are also plenty of day trips from Shanghai that enjoy its nearby nature, that you can do if you have more time in the city.

Day Nine: Shanghai Highlights

Start your time in Shanghai by enjoying the intriguing skyline of The Bund. Even if you only have one day in Shanghai , this should be your first stop. A stark contrast to the ancient temples of Beijing, The Bund showcases futuristic China. After taking some snaps of this modern marvel, take a walk down East Nanjing Road, the busiest road in Shanghai. And if you want some serenity after the chaos, take a stroll down to Yuyuan Garden which is a calm oasis in the middle of the mad city.

Day Eight: Alternative and Historical Shanghai

The next day, take a walk around the French Concession and visit the alleyways brimming with shops and restaurants of Tian Zi Fang. Then head out and explore one of the city’s most unusual museums – the Propaganda Poster Museum! Afterwards, learn all about China’s modern city at the Shanghai Museum. You can also ascend the TV tower for a great view over the city – this is best done at sunset, but do be aware that there are sometimes queues of an hour or more to reach the top of the TV tower.

Day Nine: Zhujiajio Floating Village

On your last day in Shanghai, consider getting out of the city and exploring the water village of Zhujaijio, which is home to a network of scenic canals, as well as cute cafes and bars and authentic culture. Then head back to the city for an evening bullet train to Nanjing! You can check out my YouTube video to see what to expect from the bullet trains below and use this link to find some awesome deals .

Where to Stay in Shanghai

Mid-Range Hotel: San Want Hotel Shanghai is located in the Xujiahui commercial center close to metro line no. 9 (Guilin Road subway station)  to easily roam around Shanghai. From standard to superior to suites, it has options for all type of budget travelers.

Complimentary mini-bar snacks and drinks, free broadband Internet, In – House Spa, 2 Authentic Chinese Dining places, Banquet hall to accommodate up to 600 people for conference or Marriage purpose. Grand Lobby, a separate tea room,  special festival celebration keeps the guest engaged throughout the day. Being part of a Taiwanese Hotel Chain, the facilities and hospitality is uniform across the places of stay. Click here for rates and to book. By Chandresh from Family on the Wheels

Day Seventeen: Guilin City

Arrive in Guilin and spend the first day exploring the city, maybe doing a free walking tour . Visit the famous elephant trunk hill and walk around the varied and interesting food markets, enjoying some street food for dinner.

Day Eighteen: River Li and Yangshuo

The next day, get a transfer to the River Li and take a cruise around the river.

Afterwards, spend some time enjoying the natural scenery around Yangshuo . If you have some spare time on your China itinerary, consider staying here ofr a night to enjoy the scenery. Or if you’re in a rush, take a transfer back to Guilin for the evening.

Day Nineteen and Twenty: Longsheng

Take a bus to the Longji Rice Terraces and spend the day walking around the stunning area. Enjoy both the scenery and the rustic village atmosphere, and spend the night there for a sunrise over the picturesque rice terraces. Here are some reasons why you should favour staying in Yangshuo and Longsheng over Guilin!

Where to Stay in Longsheng

Day twenty one: hong kong.

Take a train from Guilin to Shenzhen in the morning – book tickets by clicking here – and then cross the border into Hong Kong (I personally couldn’t stand Shenzhen, but some travellers do spend time here).

Spend the first afternoon in the Kowloon area, visiting the Temple Markets as they open at night.

Day Twenty-Two: Hong Kong Highlights

The next day, take the Peak Tram up to Victoria Peak and enjoy the impressive cityscape of Hong Kong laid out in front of you. In the afternoon, take a trip to the Hong Kong museum to learn more about the city. And be sure to catch the Symphony of Lights at 8pm.

Day Twenty-Three: More Hong Kong

On your next day in Hong Kong, take the cable car up to the Hong Kong Buddha and visit the Po Lin Monastery. Spend your last afternoon in Hong Kong exploring the Tsim Sha Tsui area of the city. If you have a bit more time in Hong Kong and the surrounding areas, check out this detailed itinerary for Hong Kong and Macau .

Where to Stay in Hong Kong

Where to go from hong kong.

Your first time China trip ends today! Hong Kong has a very well connected airport that can take you to global destinations. Alternatively, cross back over into China (if you have a multiple entry visa) to explore more of the country, or have an overland adventure to South East Asia! Still have questions? Check out my other China posts…

• Solo Travel in China  – tips on how to navigate the country if you’re travelling alone (also useful if you’re not!)
• Train Travel in China  – taking the trains through China? Be sure to read this article to learn about everything you’ll need to know

I hope you found this China travel itinerary useful. I’ve got loads of deeper resources on each destination mentioned – click on the hyperlinks for more information! And please do not hesitate to contact me, either in the comments box below or over on Facebook if you have any China-related questions! Have you ever been to China? Wh at were your highlights if so? If not, what is the #1 thing you want to do in the country? If you liked this first time in China backpacking itinerary, please share it or follow me on Facebook!

10 thoughts on “ One Month in China Itinerary for First Timers ”

So many friends are packing to go on a China trip… and I still feel lost because I don’t know this beautiful country enough. Your article was such an interesting read, thank you for posting it!

China is quite high on the bucketlist, but there is so much to see. Hard to make a choice. This post is very useful.

China is on my bucket list as well! It has so many beautiful places to visit, but I also heard a lot about the communication and navigation problems. Your article gave me motivation to try it though! Thanks for sharing this!

China’s an amazing country to visit and it’s really not as tough as I thought it was going to be!

This post is brilliant. I am currently learning Mandarin with the dream of traveling to China and speaking with the locals. This was just the motivation boost I needed just now! I’ve set up a new blog, your welcome to check it out http://www.myputonghua.com Thanks

Nicely written Claire! I haven’t made it into China yet (as you said, it’s daunting) but this itinerary seems to lay everything out in a way that isn’t too rushed but still see’s a lot of a large country in a (relatively) short timeframe! Keep it up!!

Hopefully you’ll make it someday it’s an amazing country! Be sure to check back with this itinerary if you do! 🙂

Oh your camping on The Great Wall looks so interesting and strange. It might be the memory that we can’t forget in the lifetime. It seems that you miss a very beautiful part of China in this trip such as Yunnan. Or you want to combine it with the expedition to Vietnam & Laos? Anyways, thanks so much for the great post!

This was extremely helpful, thanks fro your advice !! Thanks

China has been one of most most favorite backpacking trips!! And a month definitely wasn’t long enough. And second trip is on top of my list!! Next time round I would organize a VPN for both my phone and iPad. And install wechat.

Comments are closed.

• New Zealand
• The Philippines
• The Netherlands
• United Kingdom
• Inspiration
• Overland Itineraries
• Packing Lists
• Travel Tips
• Working Abroad
• Accomodation Guides
• Overland Travel
• Preserving Cultures
• Protecting Animals
• Living Abroad

• How It Works
• Job Board (beta)
• Marketplace

Work & Travel Programs

What’s included in our 1-month trips

Work remotely and explore the world. We’ll take care of the details, so you can make the most of your month’s adventure.

Reliable Workspaces

24/7 access to a centrally located co-working space with strong WiFi

Accommodation (if selected)

Centrally located, apartment or hotel-style accommodations

Leader and Local Team

Full time dedicated staff to manage logistics, curate community, and provide insider knowledge

Supportive Community

Work & Play Companions: A diverse, like-minded traveling community, typically ranging from 15-40 in size

Community Experiences

A thoughtful mix of sessions, events, & social meets up for you to get the most of the destination and from each other

RY Marketplace

A month’s of additional curated local and regional adventures for purchase

View by Departure Date

1 month in Thailand: The Ultimate 30 Days Itinerary + My Best Tips

Itinerary: one month in thailand – best places to visit + tips.

You’re planning to spend one month in Thailand for your next trip?

Great idea!

In order to help you plan your stay , I have prepared for you this 1 month itinerary in Thailand.

During your 30-31 days trip , you will visit the best of Thailand, starting with Bangkok , Ayutthaya , Sukhothai , Chiang Mai and Chiang Rai .

The second part of your holiday will then take you to the Southern Islands to discover Phuket , Koh Lanta , Krabi and Koh Yao Noi .

In addition to the best places to visit for each stage of your itinerary, I will also give you all my best tips and accommodation suggestions depending on your budget.

So, how to spend a month in Thailand? Where to go and where to stay?

Accommodation in Bangkok

Accommodation in ayutthaya, accommodation in sukhothai, accommodation in chiang mai, accommodation in chiang rai, accommodation in phuket, accommodation in koh lanta, best accommodation in krabi town, the best hotels in ao nang, where to stay in railay, accommodation in koh yao noi, you’re traveling to thailand these articles will help you, 1) bangkok (3 days).

For this 1 month trip to Thailand, you must begin with Bangkok, the country’s capital.

Arriving at the Suvarnabhumi airport, you have 2 options to reach your hotel:

• The Airport Rail Link , which connects the airport to the city centre for only 45 Bahts and avoids all traffic jams. Departure every 15 minutes between 6am and midnight . It is very practical and also has underground (MRT) and BTS (elevated metro) connections, making it easy to get to most of the hotels (you might have to end up taking a taxi if you’re staying in the historical centre). This is the quickest and cheapest solution.
• Taxis: between 250 and 450 Bahts depending on your destination and especially traffic conditions. Ask the driver to set the meter and never accept a set fare. Also, show him the address of your hotel in Thai to avoid mistakes.
• Book private transport by clicking here! From 1070 baht (€30 for 2).

Spend a quiet evening and your first night in Bangkok to recover from jet lag.

Here are the places to go on the first full day in Bangkok:

• The Grand Palace: former residence of the monarchs – 500 Bahts
• Wat Pho and its famous sleeping Buddha – 200 Bahts
• Wat Arun , entirely covered with mosaics – 50 Bahts
• The Siam Museum (300 Bahts) or the Bangkok National Museum (200 Bahts), both showcase the history of Thailand, but the Siam museum does so in a more playful and less classical manner.
• Khao San Road for its shops, atmosphere and bars.

And there is nothing better than to end this day with a cruise and dinner on the river to admire Bangkok’s most famous illuminated monuments.

You can book directly by clicking the button below:

If you prefer a more romantic version, you should opt for this dinner cruise on board an old rice barge:

Agenda for the second day in Bangkok:

• Wat Saket for its panoramic terrace – 50 Bahts
• Chinatown and Wat Traimit for its 5.5 ton gold Buddha statue
• Lumpini park for a quiet moment away from the crowds
• The Siam district and its huge, ultra-modern shopping centres
• The Bayoke tower to admire Bangkok at night. Tickets to access the panoramic platform can be booked here.
• Or the King Power Mahanakhon which is now the highest observation deck in Thailand.  Tickets available here!
• Sports lovers may prefer to watch a Muay Thai boxing match, the national sport of Thailand. Tickets available here.

For the last day in Bangkok , if it’s the weekend, you must visit Chatuchak market. The largest market in Thailand has no less than 15,000 various stands : clothes, jewellery, and souvenirs galore. And of course, there are plenty of food stalls too!

If you would rather visit the areas nearby Bangkok , you can opt for a day trip. There are 2 very popular options:

• The Damnoen Saduak floating market for a boat ride on the klongs among the stalls. You can book it here.
• A day in Kanchanaburi where the infamous Kwai River Bridge is located. Book by clicking here.

You will find all the details to visit Bangkok and its surroundings in our detailed article: The best things to do in Bangkok?

When visiting temples, whether in Bangkok or elsewhere on your month-long tour of Thailand, women must have their shoulders and legs covered (also valid for gentlemen in some cases).

The best hotels near the Grand Palace and Wat Pho:

• D Hostel Bangkok: Youth hostel located near the temples and 5 minutes on foot from Khao San Road. Dormitory beds start at €20. Strong points: The location within walking distance to the temples, the cleanliness, the modern decor. Perfect for small budgets!
• Rambuttri Village Plaza: Located 1.5 kilometer from the Grand Palace and 500 meters from Khao San Road. Bright and pleasant double rooms starting at €30 a night, breakfast included. Strong points: Location, the rooftop swimming pools.
• Baan Wanglang Riverside, Bangkok: A hotel located on the riverbank opposite the Grand Palace, only 5 minutes away by shuttle boat. Spacious double rooms with a river view starting at €50. Strong points: The amazing river view, the rooftop, the proximity to the 3 main temples of Bangkok.
• Siri Heritage Bangkok Hotel: A brand new hotel, 10 minutes on foot from the Grand Palace and 1km from the National Museum. Warm and comfortable rooms with a balcony starting at €70, breakfast included. Strong points: The surroundings, the comfortable beds, the friendly staff, the pool. It’s my favorite for its amazing value for money around the Grand Palace!
• Inn a day: located 600 meters away from the Grand Palace. Rooms with unusual and atypical industrial style decoration starting at €100, breakfast included. Strong points: Amazing view of the river and Wat Arun, excellent breakfast, the design.
• Chakrabongse Villas: On the riverbank, only a 15 minute walk to Wat Pho. Rooms and suites with Oriental yet modern decor start at €170, breakfast included. Strong points: The incomparable view of Wat Arun, the excellent location, the pool. It’s my recommendation for a romantic stay in Bangkok!

The best quiet hotels near the metro (to get around easily)

• Bangkok Patio: Located 10 minutes away on foot from the BTS Skytrain. Super spacious and modern studios and apartments with equipped kitchens and balconies starting at €40 per night. Strong points: The pool, the quiet, the location. It’s my favorite for its excellent value for money! Also perfect for family holidays.
• Noursabah Boutique Bed Bangkok: Situated 500 meters from the BTS and Airport Rail Link (a direct line to the airport). Well decorated rooms with super comfortable bed begin at €50 a night with breakfast included. Strong points: The quiet, the comfort, food is available (noodles, yogurt, cereal), water, fruit juice 24 hours a day, super convenient to go to the airport.
• Anajak Bangkok Hotel: Located 5 minutes from the metro and the Airport Rail Link. Very comfortable and cozy rooms starting at €75 a night with breakfast. Strong points: The calm location, the pool, the style of the rooms. An excellent choice for visiting Bangkok or to easily get to the airport at the end of your trip.
• Eastin Grand Hotel Sathorn: Situated just a few steps from the metro. Spacious rooms with large bay windows, staring at €115 including breakfast. Strong points: The great value for money, the infinity pool, the delicious breakfast, the direct access to the metro. It’s my recommendation for a high-end stay in Bangkok.
• Siam Kempinski Hotel Bangkok: Luxury hotel with direct access to Siam Paragon shopping center and the BTS. Elegant and contemporary rooms starting at €230, breakfast included. Strong points: The large pools and garden, the jacuzzi, the spa, the excellent breakfast. The best hotel in Bangkok for a luxurious stay!

2) Ayutthaya (1 day)

To continue your month-long stay in Thailand, you will now head to Ayutthaya , just 75 km from Bangkok.

To get there, you can choose from several means of transport:

• Rent a car (which you will keep until Chiang Rai). This is the fastest way to get around on this month-long road trip in Thailand . My recommendation is renting a car from the Don Muang airport in Bangkok (not the one you arrived at) as it is directly on the way to Ayutthaya. It will only take you 45 minutes by car.

To book your rental car , you must use Rentalcars.com . Simply because the website allows you to compare all the fares for the airport’s rental companies in one click and their comprehensive insurance system is very effective in case of accident or theft.

You can directly compare all the rental rates by clicking on the button below:

• Train: a train ticket costs only 15 Bahts and the journey takes 2 hours, this is the cheapest option.
• Bus: It takes 90 minutes and costs 50 Bahts
• Minivan:  It takes one hour and costs 70 Bahts

Upon arriving in Ayutthaya, you can spend the rest of the day visiting the historical park and its many temples , which are listed as a UNESCO World Heritage Site.

The prices, timings, and must-see temples are given in detail in my dedicated article: How to visit Ayutthaya?

Spend a night in Ayutthaya.

To rent a car or a scooter in Thailand, you will need an international driver’s permit. Remember to get it done before you leave.

• Early Bird Hostel Ayutthaya: Hostel located 700 metres from Wat Mahathat. Dormitory bed from €13, breakfast included. Strong points: friendly staff, cleanliness, privacy thanks the curtain. Perfect for backpackers!
• Baan Baimai Boutique Room: Located 1.7 km from Wat Mahathat or 5 minutes by car. Spacious and well decorated double room from € 27. Strong points: quiet, decor, private parking. An excellent choice for cheap accommodation in Ayutthaya!
• P.U. Inn Resort: Located 5 minutes from the bus station and 10 minutes from Mahathat temple. Comfortable and colourful double room from €45. Strong points: swimming pool, central location, warm welcome.
• Baan Thai House: Located 1.4 km from Wat Yai Chai Mongkon. Spacious villa with balcony and garden or lake view from €65, breakfast included. Strong points: swimming pool, outdoors, good meals, setting, calm.
• Classic Kameo Hotel & Serviced Apartments, Ayutthaya: 5 minute drive from Yai Chai Mongkon Temple. Double room with kitchenette and sitting area, modern and spacious, from €75, breakfast included. Strong points: facilities, comfort, swimming pool, spa.
• Sala Ayutthaya: Located 1.6 km from the historical park and the Wat Chai Watthanaram.  Modern double room with exposed red bricks from €140, breakfast included. Strong points: swimming pool, view of the river and the temples, food quality, hotel design. This is my recommendation for a luxury stay in Ayutthaya!

3) Sukhothai (2 days)

For this leg of our 1 month itinerary in Thailand , I would suggest going a bit to the north : towards Sukhothai , 350 km from Ayutthaya.

In view of the distance, it is best to keep one day just to get there:

• By car, expect it to take around 5 hours, and the roads are in excellent condition, lined with many brand new petrol stations
• By bus: from the Ayutthaya bus station it’s a 6 hour journey. There are several departures during the day. Price: 300 Bahts.
• By train: Sukhothai does not have a railway station, you will have to take the train to Phitsalunok (4h / 700 Bahts) + 1 bus from Phitsalunok to Sukhothai (1h / 50 Bahts).

The next day, you will get a full day to discover the historical park of Sukhothai . Along with Ayutthaya, these are the 2 must-see parks. Sukhothai is also a UNESCO World Heritage Site.

As with for Ayutthaya, I have prepared a comprehensive article with all the information to visit Sukhothai here: Practical tips for visiting Sukhothai.

Spend another night in Sukhothai.

• Vieng Tawan Sukhothai Guesthouse by Thai Thai: Located 1.5 km from the historical park. Warm and comfortable double room from €20, breakfast at €4. Strong points: swimming pool, peace and quiet, welcoming atmosphere. An excellent choice for cheap accommodation in Sukhothai!
• Thai Thai Sukhothai Guesthouse: Located 1.5 km from the park. Double room with traditional decor, wooden furniture and garden view from 30€, breakfast included. Strong points: swimming pool, very warm welcome, charming.
• Sawasdee Sukhothai Resort: Located 1.5 km from the historical site of Sukhothai. Spacious bungalow with Thai decor and wooden furniture, from €40, including breakfast. Strong points: swimming pool and excellent outdoor setting, peace and quiet, bike rental and the location close to the park. It’s my favorite for its excellent value for money!
• Sriwilai Sukhothai: Located 1.8 km from the park. Spacious and bright double room with balcony overlooking the rice fields from €80, breakfast included. Strong points: superb setting, large infinity pool, spa, peace and quiet, attentive staff. This is my recommendation for a luxury stay in Sukhothai!

4) Chiang Mai (4 days)

For the fourth leg of this one-month trip to Thailand, continue further north and travel 300 km to Chiang Mai.

The journey vary depending on your means of transport:

• 4h30 drive by car, once again the roads are excellent and the journey is straight. No stress!
• 6 hours by bus (departure from Sukhothai Bus Station) – 300 Bahts
• By train: from Sukhothai, you will first have to go to Phitsalunok by bus (1h / 50 Bahts) then take the train: 6 to 8 hours and between 100 to 600 Bahts (different classes).

Here too, you can expect a good day’s journey, but if you feel like it, you can take a short walk at the end of the day to get an initial glimpse of the city.

On the second day, you can start with the actual exploration of Chiang Mai, renowned for its many temples. The majority of the temples are located in the old town , which gives you the perfect opportunity to take a walk and see:

• Wat Phra Singh . Free of cost.
• Wat Chedi Luang – 40 bahts.
• Wat Inthakhin Sadue Muang. Free of cost.
• The Three Kings Monument
• One of the 3 history museums of the city : the cultural centre, the history centre and the Lanna museum of popular arts.
• Wat Chiang Man
• Warorot market
• Wat Saen Fang, Wat Buppharam and Wat Mahawan.  Only the Buppharam temple has an entrance fee: 20 Bahts.

From 6 to 7 pm, head either to the Night Bazaar (during the week ) or to the Saturday or Sunday market. Typical of many Thai cities, you will find plenty of souvenirs and food stands where you can taste the excellent traditional cuisine.

You can also explore the night market in a guided visit , which also includes numerous tastings. Click here to book!

Return to your Chiang Mai hotel for a second night.

On the third day in Chiang Mai , head to the Doi Suthep National Park, a classic destination near the northern capital.

It is best to take your car or rent a scooter to go there and have the freedom to plan your day. Alternatively, you can also take one of the shared taxis (song thaew) leaving from the old town. However, you will have to wait until it fills up before you can leave.

Last choice: go on an organised trip with a guide . This is a practical solution because you don’t need to manage anything are picked up from your hotel.

To find our more about reserving this tour by clicking on the button below:

Here is the list of places to see in the park:

• Huay Kaew waterfall: at the entrance – Free of cost
• Mon Tha Than waterfall – 100 Bahts + 30 Bahts for a car
• The Doi Suthep temple and its panoramic view overlooking the whole province – 30 Bahts
• The gardens of Bhubing Palace for a walk at the winter residence of the royal family – 50 Bahts
• The Hmong village at the end of park road. With lots of souvenir stands and a garden with a waterfall – 10 Bahts

On the last day in Chiang Mai , I’ll let you choose between 2 standard activities of a month-long stay in Thailand:

• Spend a day with elephants at a shelter where you can feed and wash them. It is better to book in advance , since there only a small number of are visitors allowed a day so as not to disturb the elephants.
• Take a Thai cooking class with which includes buying ingredients at the market, making delicious recipes and of course a tasting!

If you have a car, you must spending the late afternoon at Huay Tung Tao Lake, about 15 minutes from the city centre. It is very popular with locals who love to come and eat on stilted huts by the water.

There is also a large area with giant straw animals for souvenir photography.

Access to the lake costs 50 Bahts per person.

Spend one last night in Chiang Mai.

Need more information about Chiang Mai? Read my article: Chiang Mai: the definitive guide.

• HOSTEL by BED : Youth hostel located 500 meters from Wat Phra Sing and the Sunday market. The beds are in a modern and clean dormitory and start at 10€ per night, breakfast included. Strong points: clean rooms and common areas, a good and healthy breakfast, bottled water. This is the best budget accommodation in Chiang Mai. Perfect for backpackers!
• Wing Bed : Located in the old town, 800 meters from Wat Chedi Luang. Comfortable and cosy double rooms starting at 35€ per night, breakfast included. Strong points: brand new building, ideal location, excellent service. It’s my recommendation in Chiang Mai for its outstanding value for money!
• Pingviman Hotel : Located 10 minutes away from the weekend market and 700 meters from Wat Phra Sing. Thai style double rooms with carved wooden furniture, spa bath and balcony, starting at 80€, breakfast included. Strong points: swimming pool, traditional decoration, perfect location, comfort.
• 99 The Heritage Hotel : Located in the pedestrian street of the Sunday night market. Double room with tasteful decoration and very comfortable bedding starting at 135€, breakfast included. Strong points: swimming pool, friendly staff, good location, free mini bar, fruits and cakes available all day long. A great choice for a romantic stay in Chiang Mai!
• Chala Number6 : 5* hotel located in the historic center, 200 meters away from Wat Chedi Luang. This luxury hotel offers spacious and very comfortable rooms, starting at 190€, breakfast included. Strong points: swimming pool and garden, lovely staff, charming hotel, snacks offered every day. It’s my recommendation for a luxury stay!

5) Chiang Rai (3 days)

Continue this 1 month tour in Thailand with a last stop in the North, at Chiang Rai.

What are the options to go from Chiang Mai to Chiang Rai?

• Car: 3h30 to cover 200 km between the two cities

Once you arrive in the afternoon, you must take a walk around the city.

The must-see spots:

• Wat Phra Kaew – Free
•  The golden clock tower – Free
• Wat Ming Meuang – Free
• Wat Phra Sing – Free
• Wat Klang Wiang – Free
• Wat Jet Yot – Free
• The HillTribe Museum on the history of the mountainous ethnicities of northern Thailand – 50 Bahts.
• The Oub Kham Museum and its superb collection of objects from the kingdom of Lanna. Only guided tours available (300 Bahts).

In the evening, visit the traditional Night Bazaar for a bite to eat and go stroll among small shops selling souvenirs and local handicrafts.

The next day, you can start strong by going to the absolutely unmissable place of this stay in Chiang Rai: the white temple.   Undoubtedly the most visited monument in the region and one of the most famous in all of Thailand!

Its special feature is the completely white walls covered with lime and mirror shards that make it sparkle in the sun. The entire temple is decorated with many sculptures and statues with impressive details.

The entrance fee is 50 Bahts.

For the rest of the day , you have the following options:

• The Khun Korn waterfall, accessible via a small hike – Free
• Singha Park , to visit the tea plantations, and make sure you take a photo of the park’s emblem: a large statue of a golden lion. Free
• Wat Huay Pla Klang and its 3 temples, each one more impressive than the other – Free
• The blue temple, a beautiful spot, and free!

After a good night’s sleep, you can continue exploring Chiang Rai and its surroundings:

• Visit to the Baan Dam Museum , which is a cluster of several black houses with a peculiar and surprising decor: animal skins, bone thrones, animal skulls… – 80 Bahts
• Go to Doi Tung to explore the Mae Fah Luang Garden , a splendid and very well developed garden, and the Doi Tung Royal Villa , residence of the Princess Mother of Thailand – The pass costs 220 Bahts to visit everything. You can also experience a zip-line descent in the park, but for an additional fee.
• Take a road trip amidst beautiful landscapes between Doi Tung and Mae Salong
• Walk to Mae Salong market.

Last night in Chiang Rai.

All things to do in Chiang Rai can be found in our article: What are the things to see and do in Chiang Rai?

To visit Chaing Rai and its surroundings , it’s better to have a car. The places to visit are scattered and quite far away, and most of them are not connected by public transport.

• Connect Hostel: Youth hostel located 10 minutes from the night market and the bus station. Modern dormitory bed with curtain from 10€. Strong points: cleanliness, modern and really nice common areas, comfortable beds, very friendly staff. This is the best hostel in Chiang Rai. Ideal for backpackers, if you are looking for a cheap hotel.
• Na-Rak-O Resort: Located 600 meters from the Clock Tower and the temples to see in Chiang Rai. Double room with a colorful decoration and a very comfortable bed starting from 21€. Strong points: the availability of the staff, a kitchen for breakfast, the calm. An excellent choice if you’re traveling to Chiang Rai on a budget!
• Nak Nakara Hotel: Located at 2 minutes walk from the HillTribe Museum and the park. Tastefully decorated double room in traditional lanna style starting from €60, breakfast included. Strong points: large swimming pool, free shuttle to the Night Bazaar, comfortable rooms, convenient location. A great choice for its exceptional value for money!
• The Riverie by Katathani: 5 stars hotel located 800 meters from Wat Phra Sing and 1 km from the night market, on the riverside. Modern, luxurious and spacious double room from 100€, breakfast included. Strong points: the huge swimming pool, children’s playground, the view on the river, the jacuzzi, the tennis court. A great choice for a romantic stay in Chiang Rai!
• The Meridien Chiang Rai Resort, Thailand: 5 stars hotel complex located 3 km from the night market. Elegant, design and spacious double room from 105€, breakfast at 14€. Strong points: really beautiful outdoor spaces, swimming pool, Spa, riverside location, quietness, free shuttle to the city centre. Simply the best hotel for a luxury stay in Chiang Rai!

6) Phuket (4 days)

Now we have reached the second part of this 1 month road trip in Thailand. For today, you can reach Chiang Rai Airport and fly to South Thailand.

And yes, visiting Thailand in 1 month also includes enjoying the beaches. And what better way than to start with one of the country’s best known islands: Phuket!

Here is an idea for an itinerary to explore the island and its surroundings in 4 days:

• First day (after landing): go to Patong beach to relax or enjoy water activities like parasailing. At the end of the evening, you can go to Bangla Road with its many bars. You will also have the opportunity to attend a ladyboy show (tickets available for purchase here) or a boxing fight (tickets can be purchased there ).
• Day two: boat trip to Koh Phi Phi. Click here to book!
• Day three: trip to the Similan Islands to swim in one of the most beautiful places in the world. Book your trip here!
• Day Four: road trip to visit Phuket: Phuket Town, Monkey Hill, Khao Rang Hill, Wat Chalong, beaches…

I have explained everything in detail in this article: Visit Phuket.

If you want to be in the middle of the action, I have prepared a selection of accommodation on the Patong side:

• Lub D Phuket Patong: Youth Hostel 5 minutes from Patong Beach and 10 minutes from Bangla Road. Modern and very clean dormitory bed from €12. Strong points: huge swimming pool, common areas with even a boxing ring, design, cleanliness. This is the best hostel in Phuket!
• Mazi Design Hotel by Kalima: Located 5 minutes from the night market and 10 minutes from Bangla Road. Spacious designer double room from €35 per night, breakfast at €7. Strong points: swimming pool, location, comfort of the rooms. It’s my favorite for its excellent value for money in Patong.
• Holiday Inn Express Phuket Patong Beach Central: Located opposite the beach. Modern and warm double room with balcony from €72, breakfast included. Strong points: outdoor facilities, swimming pool, welcoming atmosphere and the friendliness of the staff.
• Phuket Marriott Resort Spa, Merlin Beach: 5-star hotel complex located 2 miles from Patong, right on Tri-Trang beach. Warm and comfortable double room with private balcony or terrace from €110, breakfast at €19. Strong points: sea-side location, private beach, quiet, playground for children, setting. This is my recommendation for a luxury stay in Phuket!

If you prefer to stay in Phuket Town, here is my selection of hotels:

• Baan Baan hostel: Hostel located in Phuket Old Town. Dormitory bed from €8, breakfast included. Strong points: helpful staff, cleanliness, location, calm atmosphere. The best youth hostel to stay in Phuket Town!
• Ritsurin Boutique Hotel: Located 600 metres from Thalang Street. Clean and well-equipped double room from €28. Strong points: location, cleanliness, friendly staff.
• The Malika Hotel: Located 1.8 km from the old town. Double room with very comfortable bedding and balcony from €38, breakfast at €6. Strong points: swimming pool, quiet atmosphere, friendly staff, ideal location to take the boat to Koh Phi Phi. It’s my favorite for its excellent value for money in Phuket Town!
• Casa Blanca Boutique Hotel: Located in the old town. Double room decorated with great taste from €50 per night, breakfast at €7. Strong points: excellent location, friendly staff, right next to the night market.
• Novotel Phuket Phokeethra: Located 1 mile away from the old town. Super spacious double room, modern design from €85, breakfast at €15. Strong points: setting, comfort, ideal to visit the old town, close to the boat to the islands of Koh Phi Phi and Koh Lanta. This is my recommendation for an upscale stay in Phuket Town!

7) Koh Lanta (4 days)

You must continue this itinerary for about thirty days in Thailand with a well known island that is a little less touristy than Phuket: Koh Lanta.

To get there, you have to take a boat from the port of Rassada in Phuket to Koh Phi Phi (2h30) and from there change to another boat to Koh Lanta (1h15). The prices online are about 1000 Bahts but by going through our hotel, who called the company directly, we were able to get our tickets for 700 Bahts for 2 with transfer to and from the port included.

If you prefer to take a single boat, you can also take a speedboat , but there are not many seats. For this trip, it’s better to book in advance. To get more information about the reservation, click here!

In the afternoon, enjoy one of the many beaches on Koh Lanta Island on the west coast. The further south you go, the fewer people there will be.

Spend the first night in Koh Lanta.

For the next 3 days, here are my recommendations:

• Take the 4 islands trip to Koh Chuek, Koh Waen, Koh Muk and Koh Ngai. A fully relaxed schedule with swimming and snorkelling.

• Enjoying the activities planned on the island: kayaking in the mangrove (click here to book) , diving, cooking classes, cave tours…
• Go to Koh Rok for a day trip on this beautiful island with fine sands and turquoise waters:

My detailed explanations of things to do in Koh Lanta can be found here: The best things to do in Koh Lanta?

In Koh Lanta, hotels are located on the west coast of the island, close to the numerous beaches.

As always, the best rooms are fully booked months in advance , so make sure to book as soon as you have your travel dates!

• Hub of Joys Hostel: Hostel located 350 metres from Long Beach. Clean and pleasant dormitory bed from €6 per night, breakfast included. Strong points: friendly staff, 5 minutes from the beach, good breakfast. This is the cheapest accommodation option in Koh Lanta! Perfect for backpackers.
• Long Beach Chalet: Located right on Long Beach. Bright and comfortable bungalow from 25€ per night, breakfast included. Strong points: swimming pool, direct access to the beach.
• SriLanta Resort: Located on Klong Nin Beach. Thai style villa with a terrace overlooking the garden from 35€, breakfast at 10€. Strong points: 3 swimming pools, the setting, ideal location to go to the beach, comfort. It’s my favorite for its excellent value for money!
• Kaw Kwang Beach Resort: Located on Klong Dao Beach. Nice and spacious double room from 50€, breakfast included. Strong points: sea-view, very quiet and accessible beach, swimming pool, landscaped garden, free pick-up and drop-off at the port.
• Rawi Warin Resort And Spa: 5 star hotel located 400 metres from Klong Nin Beach. Modern Thai style double room with wooden furniture and balcony from 85€, breakfast included. Strong points: swimming pools, playground for children, view, competent staff, ample and varied breakfast. Ideal for an upscale romantic stay!
• Pimalai Resort & Spa: 5 star hotel located 650 ft from Kantiang Beach. Very spacious and tastefully decorated double room from 210€, breakfast included. Strong points: the splendid infinity pool, dedicated staff, location, view, excellent breakfast. This is my recommendation for a luxury stay in Koh Lanta!

8) Krabi (4 days)

Another stop on this 4 week trip to Thailand: Krabi.

Same as for the previous legs, you will have to take the boat to go to Krabi from Koh Lanta: approximately 350 Bahts per person for a 2 hour and 30 minute crossing.

In Krabi you must stay in Ao Nang , the main seaside resort of the province. This will allow you to spend the afternoon on the first day on the Ao Nang beach or Nopparat Thara beach, which isn’t far away.

For the other 2 days in Krabi, you can:

• Spend a day on the Railay peninsula, which is accessible only by boat from Ao Nang beach: 10 minutes for 200 Bahts. At Railay you can enjoy the 2 beautiful beaches of Railay West and Phra Nang. If you feel like exercising a bit, you can choose from kayaking, paddling and climbing. Railay is a destination which is known worldwide for this sport. Beginners can even book a course there directly!
• Take a trip to the islands of Koh Poda, Koh Kai and Koh Tup on a boat with a snorkelling stop.

On the last day at Krabi and Ao Nang , you have the following options:

• Climb to the tiger temple to admire the view and visit Krabi Town in the afternoon.
• Take a day on tour to the emerald pool and hot springs. You can book it here.
• Hiking in the Khao Phanom Bencha National Park
• Different sports activities: kayaking , zipline , quad biking, rafting, horseback riding on the beach, Thai boxing lessons…

If you want to know more about Krabi, read our article: Krabi: the definitive guide.

Accommodation in Krabi / Ao Nang

There are 3 main areas to stay in Krabi province:

• Krabi Town, practical for visiting “land” sites such as the national park, the tiger temple or the emerald swimming pool.
• Ao Nang if you are looking for a lively area on the seafront and for trips to nearby islands such as Koh Phi Phi or Chicken Island.
• Railay to enjoy the beach.

To help you, I have prepared a selection of the best hotels to stay based on these areas and your budget.

• Pak-Up Hostel: Hostel located in the centre of Krabi. Dormitory bed from 7€. Strong points: cleanliness, large storage lockers under the beds, air conditioned dormitories. Perfect for small budgets and backpackers! 
• Krabi Golden Hill Hotel: Located 500 metres from the river and 900 m from the Night market. Spacious and bright double room from €25, breakfast included. Strong points: swimming pool, friendly staff, free shuttle to the city centre.
• The Nice Krabi Hotel: Located opposite Maharaj market. Comfortable and modern double room from €40, breakfast included. Strong points: The staff was very friendly. It’s my favorite for its excellent value for money in Krabi Town. 
• River Front Krabi Hotel: Located on the riverfront, 900 metres from the weekend market. Spacious and warm double room with balcony, from €55, breakfast included. Strong points: swimming pool, very comfortable bedding, brand new hotel.
• K-Bunk Hostel: Hostel located 15 minutes walk from Ao Nang beach. Dormitory bed from €13. Strong points: the staff, the ambiance, comfortable beds.
• Cocco House: Located 1.5 km away from Nopparat Beach. Very clean and quiet bungalow from €30 per night, breakfast included. Strong points: excellent breakfast, free bike rental, good bedding. It’s my favorite for its excellent value for money in Ao Nang.
• Wake Up Aonang Hotel: Located right next to the beach. Double room with large bay windows and sea view from €50. Strong points: the beach adjacent location and all the restaurants, swimming pool, comfort.
• Phu Pha Aonang Resort Spa: Located 800 m away from Ao Nang Beach. Wooden and parquet floor room with patio from €75, breakfast included. Strong points: lush garden, view of the cliff, swimming pool, free shuttle to the town. This is my recommendation for an upscale stay in Ao Nang.
• The Nine Thipthara Klongson Resort: Located 5 km from the sea. Very spacious and tastefully decorated villa with a spa bath, from €220, breakfast included. Strong points: environment, swimming pool, beautiful rooms. My recommendation for a luxury stay in Ao Nang. The best place to spend a romantic holiday!
• Railay Garden View Resort: Located at Railay East Beach. Wooden bungalow with balcony and lounge area from €50, breakfast included. Plus: the view, spacious the bungalows.
• Railay Phutawan Resort: Located 250 metres from Railay East. Warm and bright double room from €90, breakfast included. Strong points: swimming pool, setting, view of the sea and the cliffs.
• Sand Sea Resort: Located on West Railay beach. Deluxe bungalow, very charming, with a terrace, from €140, breakfast included. Strong points: the beachfront location, 2 swimming pools, ample breakfast.
• Bhu Nga Thani Resort & Spa: Located next to East Railay beach. Elegant, modern and warm room from €170, breakfast included. Strong points: swimming pool, jacuzzis, magnificent setting, very helpful staff, excellent breakfast. My recommendation for a luxury stay in Railay!

9) Koh Yao Noi (3 days)

For the last stop of this 1 month tour in Thailand, you must end your holiday on a small island that is not yet flooded by tourists: Koh Yao Noi.

A super practical option and only 30 minutes by boat from Krabi (the journey costs 300 Baht).

On the agenda for these 3 days on Koh Yao Noi:

• Enjoy the beaches and take a walk. You can rent a scooter to explore the island.
• The boat trip to the 4 islands was the best experience I had during my entire one month road trip in Thailand! The fare is 2500 Bahts for the boat (divided by the number of passengers).
• The trip to Phang Nga Bay, with James Bond Island and Koh Panyee for 4500 Bahts per boat (here too, divided among passengers).

All the things to do in Koh Yao Noi are given in our article: Visit Koh Yao Noi.

And now your one month vacation in Thailand is coming to an end! From Koh Yao Noi, you can either return to Krabi or Phuket to get to the airport and catch your return flight.

• Tha Khao Bay View: Located to the east of the island. Simple bungalow with fan from €25 per night. Strong points: the incredible view of the sea, the location in the middle of nature, the friendliness of the owners. An excellent choice for a cheap stay in Koh Yao Noi!
• Koh Yao Seaview Bungalow: Located on the seafront, 15 minutes away in a songthaew from the port. Very spacious bungalow with a large bed and private terrace overlooking the swimming pool or the sea, from €45 per night. Strong points: the beach is nearby, the calmness, the swimming pool, the really cheap restaurant which provides delicious food in ample quantities. It’s my favorite for its excellent value for money!
• Paradise KohYao: Located to the north of the island. Tastefully decorated room with an outdoor bathroom and private terrace from €95, breakfast included. Strong points: idyllic setting, infinity pool, private beach, location in the bay.
• Cape Kudu Hotel, Koh Yao Noi: Located to the south-east of the island. Spacious and bright double room with very fancy decoration, from €150 per night, breakfast included. Strong points: design, calm, dreamy setting, friendly staff. A beautiful hotel in Koh Yao Noi, perfect for a romantic stay!
• Laguna Villas Yao Noi: Located to the south-east of the island, right on the beach. Beautiful fully equipped villas, a perfect mix of modern and traditional Thai style from €200 per night, including breakfast. Strong points: sea-facing location, large swimming pool, close to excellent restaurants.
• Six Senses Yao Noi: This is the most luxurious hotel on the whole island. It offers splendid villas with private swimming pools and even a butler that will be assigned to you for the duration of your stay. From €570, breakfast included. Strong points: Spa, gym, private beach, comfort, excellent meals, exceptional service. This is clearly the most beautiful luxury hotel in Koh Yao Noi. A dream place to spend your honeymoon or a romantic stay!

If you have any questions for organising your 1 month itinerary in Thailand, please feel free to ask me in the comments.

Thailand travel Guides

• Buy the Lonely Planet Thailand guide on Amazon.com or on Amazon.co.uk
• Buy the DK Eyewitness Thailand guide on Amazon.com or on Amazon.co.uk

Discover all my articles about Thailand : All my articles to help you plan your trip to Thailand are listed there.

The 25 Best Things to Do in Thailand

• Itinerary: One week in Thailand – Perfect to visit Bangkok, Ayutthaya and Chiang Mai!
• Itinerary: 6,7 or 8 days in Thailand – 2 itineraries to the southern islands, starting from Phuket or Krabi
• Itinerary: 10 days in Thailand – The perfect itinerary to discover the best of Thailand!
• Itinerary: 2 weeks in Thailand – Discover Bangkok, Ayutthaya, Sukhothai, + Best Southern islands!
• Itinerary: 15 days in Thailand – The best itinerary to visit the most beautiful Southern islands
• Itinerary: 3 weeks in Thailand – Discover the best of Thailand in 20-21 days
• Itinerary: 1 month in Thailand – The most complete itinerary to visit Thailand!
• Road trip in Thailand: The best itineraries for 7, 10, 15, 21 and 30 days
• Ayutthaya: The definitive guide to visit the archaeological park
• Bangkok: The 30 best places to visit
• Chiang Mai: The 20 best things to do
• Chiang Rai: The 17 must-see attractions
• Koh Lanta: The 15 most beautiful places to see on the island
• Koh Yao Noi: All the things to do on this paradise island!
• Krabi: Top 17 best places to visit
• Phuket: The 23 best things to do
• Sukhothai: How to visit the historical park?
• 3 days in Bangkok – The best itinerary to visit the Thai capital in 72h!
• 3 Days in Chiang Mai – The perfect itinerary to visit the Chiang Mai in 72h!

You’re using Pinterest? Here is the picture to pin!

Creator of the Voyage Tips blog, travel and photography lover. I give you all my best tips to plan your next trip.

Related Stories

3 Days in Chiang Mai: The Perfect Itinerary (First Time Visit)

3 Days in Bangkok: The Perfect Itinerary (First Time Visit)

Thailand Itinerary: 6, 7 or 8 days + My Best Tips

Discussion 2 comments.

We would like to visit next year Thailand snd we would like to spent 1 month How much fies it cost pls .

Regards Michelle Borg

As I often explain, it’s not possible to give you an overall budget for this one month itinerary in Thailand. It depends on the season you go, how far in advance you book, the type of hotel, the activities you do or don’t do and the cost of the transport. It can range from one to four times.

However, you can find some price information in the article: – For the places to visit (temples and museums), it’s all written. – For activities likes boat trip, elephant sanctuary, cooking class, don’t hesitate to click on the orange links or green button to see the prices. – For hotels, just click on any hotel name in orange in the article to see the rates for your travel dates. – For car hire, it’s the same: just click on the green button in the article « I checked the rental car prices in Thailand ». – For train, buses or minivan, it’s also written in the article. So you can calculate quite easily depending on what you want to do.

Enjoy your month in Thailand!

Leave A Reply Cancel Reply

Your Name (required)

Your Email (required)

Your Website (optional)

Save my name, email, and website in this browser for the next time I comment.

• Middle East
• North America
• Cheap car rentals: my best advice
• Back to Homepage

I thought Costco was just for parents, but my partner and I love it. Here are 12 things we buy on a typical trip.

• My partner and I are dual income, no kids, so we shop at Costco for just adults .
• We love going to Costco for great deals on produce and sparkling water. 
• Buying Kevin's Natural Foods premade meals saves us money and time each month. 

I never imagined I'd be shopping at Costco regularly. It seemed like a very "mom" thing to do.

After all, buying in bulk can help families save money — and, as some recent data suggests, more than half of Costco shoppers have children .

But ever since I got a Costco membership for my birthday in October, I haven't looked back.

I'm 30 years old, living with my partner in Chicago. I work from home as a journalist, and he's a service technician for a major beverage-dispensing company. Together, we make about $112,000 a year.

We're unmarried, and have decided not to have children — I guess you could call us DINKs (dual income, no kids). We don't set a strict budget for groceries, but buying food and other household items at Costco has saved us so much money.

Here's what we buy on a typical trip to Costco, which usually costs us about $140.

Duke's Smoked Shorty Sausages are a great snack during a busy week.

Working from home means I have the luxury of controlling my lunch break, but I usually prefer to snack throughout the day instead.

Between meetings and interviews, it's easier to stick to grab-and-go bites like these Duke's Smoked Shorty Sausages. Costco has a large selection of beef jerky and sausage, but I prefer these because they aren't individually wrapped.

This 16-ounce bag cost me $12

Costco's produce section is full of gems.

At $7, the 2-pound Wild Wonders tomato medley is a staple in our house.

I do the majority of the cooking, and it's easy to throw these into a salad or add them to an entrée.

We usually pick up at least one fruit on Costco trips.

The fruit we buy tends to rotate, and I usually go with what's on sale and how fresh it looks.

On this trip, our choices were blueberries or raspberries, and the latter looked much more appetizing. We got just under a pound of raspberries for $9.

If you open our fridge, you're almost always going to find cucumbers.

On this trip, we picked up more One Sweet snacking seedless cucumbers.

These small cucumbers are easy for my partner to pack in his lunch bag and are so versatile. A bag of these cost us $6 at Costco.

We always pick up snacks at Costco — this time, we got a nut mix.

We buy a ton of snacks at Costco , sometimes that includes nuts.

Savanna Orchards Country Club nut mix is great to munch on throughout the day or to serve when friends visit . And the 36-ounce bag was just $11.

We also picked up a pack of Veroni meats for a charcuterie board.

I love to make charcuterie boards , and this variety pack of Italian meats from Veroni is a great way to add multiple meats to a platter in one swoop.

In my experience, buying this 12-ounce pack for $12 is easier and cheaper than picking up a bunch of individual packages of meat.

We were tempted by Costco's bakery this trip.

We always look at Costco's bakery , but we don't often buy anything. The smells and sights are tempting, but a giant cake is just too much for a two-person household.

This trip was my first time seeing these almond-filled danishes, though, and they looked too good to resist. (They ended up being delicious.)

When we were checking out, the cashier told us that these were actually buy one get one free, so we got eight danishes for $12.

Sometimes we pick up a gadget we want but don't exactly need.

One of the benefits of the DINK life is having more disposable income to buy the things you want and not only what you need.

I've wanted a salad spinner for a while, so I threw this one from Faberware in the cart when I saw it.

Since we eat salads several times a week, I figured we'd get enough use out of it to justify spending the $15. It does make it easier to remove excess water after washing fruits and vegetables and the outer bowl is great to serve a big salad in.

We rely on premade meals from Kevin's Natural Foods for quick dinners.

Premade meals from Kevin's Natural Foods have been lifesavers for getting dinner on the table after a long day of writing.

The meals from Kevin's can be pricey at our usual grocery stores, so we buy them from Costco since the multipacks can be a better value.

On this trip, we got 2½ pounds of beef stroganoff for $16. Kevin's version contains coconut milk and cauliflower pasta, making it a lighter option than a traditional beef stroganoff.

I also picked up Amylu's Italian-style chicken meatballs.

Again, I love buying things at Costco that could help us easily and quickly get dinner on the table .

Amylu's Italian-style chicken meatballs are an easy protein to heat up and serve for lunch or dinner.

Costco's sparkling water section is awesome.

My partner is obsessed with sparkling water, and we come home with a new variety almost every time we visit Costco since the retailer's selection is huge.

On this trip, we picked up a Waterloo variety pack with 24 cans of sparkling water for just under $10. I like having a few different flavors so we don't get bored.

And we usually find something new, like a fun tea, to try on our shopping trips.

I prioritize stocking up on our essential grocery needs at Costco, but I also usually find something new to try.

On this trip, I grabbed a pack of two 40-ounce Natural Benefits guava-lemon green-tea bottles for $10. I ended up loving it.

In total, we spent about $140.

On this trip, we spent about $139 picking up essentials and trying some new products.

I felt like we got some great deals and staples, and I look forward to my next Costco visit.

Click to keep reading Costco diaries like this one .

• Main content

1 Month UK and Ireland Itinerary for First Timers

by Sharyn McCullum | Last updated Dec 30, 2023 | Ireland Live Work and Play , Itineraries , Live Work Play Travel , London and UK Live Work and Play

White Cliffs are just one place you will visit on my 1 month UK and Ireland itinerary

You have one month holiday and you want to spend it holidaying in the United Kingdom and Ireland. I know just how you are feeling. Excited. Daunted. Maybe a little stressed at how many amazing places there are and how you will fit seeing them all in to one month? But it doesn’t have to be.

In this post I will show you the best places to visit and advise you on some of the ‘must’ things to do and see in the UK and Ireland. Plus, I provide an idea of how many days you will need to make the most of your time in each city and country. The itinerary is based on my own travels in the UK when I moved abroad to live in London on a working holiday for a few years.

I’ve divided the post into 2 sections. The first section is devoted to planning your UK itinerary which starts and finishes in London. While the second section is my suggested UK 4 week itinerary. So get ready to start planning your 1 Month UK and Ireland road trip itinerary .

FYI – The UK is made up of the countries of England, Scotland, Wales and Northern Ireland. Countries that make up Britain are England, Scotland and Wales. Then, on one island you have Northern Ireland and the Republic of Ireland. This itinerary I have put together starts and finishes in London and visits 5 countries on 2 islands. England, Scotland, Wales, Northern Ireland and the Republic of Ireland.

Table of Contents

Is one Month Long Enough in the UK?

If I had the choice I would spend a lot longer than one month travelling around the UK. But one month in the UK is a very good start to begin discovering this amazing country. Now before you read any further, I must warn you that this itinerary of the UK is jam-packed with things to see and do every day. Providing you with as many opportunities as possible to experience the UK.

Planning Your 1 Month in UK Trip

Who is this uk 1 month itinerary for.

If you are wondering who can go on this UK holiday, well, anyone! This UK 1 month itinerary is very comprehensive and versatile and there is something in this itinerary for everyone. No matter if you are travelling solo to the UK or with a friend or partner, as a backpacker to the UK or coming to the UK on a family holiday to explore the UK with kids, there is something for everyone in this itinerary.

Best Time to Visit the UK and Ireland

You can visit the UK and Ireland anytime however, they have very cold winters. So if you don’t want to be wearing 3 or 4 layers of clothes when outside and then boil inside from the central heating, I suggest visiting during the warmer months. However, winter in the UK (December, January and February) can be magical with chestnuts being roasted by vendors on the streets and the Christmas lights are so bright and welcoming.  

Summer in the UK (June, July and August) see the most overseas tourists visiting and this is when accommodation is the most expensive. I lived in the UK on a UK Working Holiday Visa so I experienced all the seasons. If I was going to visit as a tourist I would suggest visiting during the shoulder seasons of mid-Spring or mid-Autumn because the weather is warmer, accommodation not as expensive and you can enjoy doing all the touristy things with less people. But any time is a magical time to visit the UK as there is plenty of things to see and do.  

How to Get to the UK

As the UK is an island surrounded by water, the best way to get to the UK is to fly. Major international airport hubs of Heathrow Airport and Gatwick Airport are outside London. Another option is to catch a ferry from Europe, Scandinavia or Ireland. But most international visitors to the UK arrive by plane. You can check out airfares to the UK here .

How to Get from Heathrow or Gatwick Airports into London

Both airports are well connected to London by train. The Gatwick Express train will take you into London while the Piccadilly Line of the London Underground (Tube) will take you into London. There are also buses and the very expensive option of catching a taxi.

How to Travel Around the UK and Ireland?

There are a number of options to travel around the UK and Ireland. They include by train, bus, ferry and car. This itinerary is best suited to travelling by car as it gives you the flexibility to go where you want, when you want, and deviate if you want to. There are a couple of ferry trips on this itinerary. If you don’t have a car, you can hire one in Britain. Check out DiscoverCars  for pricing and availability. And don’t forget to bring an International Drivers Licence.

Where to Stay in the UK and Ireland

There are many styles of accommodation in the UK and Ireland to suit every budget and need. Accommodation comes in all sorts of sizes and shapes including hostels , hotels , B&Bs, camp sites, boats, apartments and even castles. My biggest tip for booking your accommodation is to book early, particularly during the summer months as many places book out well in advance. Many young and solo travellers stay at hostels and there are a number of small hostel chains such as Wombats, Generator and of course YHA (Youth Hostels Association). They provide all the services you need in a hostel from a bed, bathroom, kitchens to cook in, communal areas, cafes, bars to free wifi. I have listed some hostel contact details under each city but for more options check out HostelWorld to compare and book a hostel bed. Other affordable accommodation can be found through Booking.com. . This is the place I book all my accommodation because of the range available and the ease of the process.

LWPT Tip : Before I begin my suggested itinerary I just want to recommend you purchase travel insurance. I know travel insurance is an extra cost on any holiday but it is well worth it. Things can happen when you least expect them. You don’t want to be stuck with thousands of dollars in medical bills or without any luggage. I recommend World Nomads and SafetyWing for travel insurance but if you don’t purchase a policy through either of them, please ensure you purchase travel insurance from somewhere else. You never know what might happen and you need to be covered.

How much will One Month in the UK cost?

To work out how much a trip to the UK will cost you, create a spreadsheet as follows.  TIP: Pay as much as possible in advance so you know how much spending money you have to take.

Airfare to the UK $_____ Accommodation (per night) $_____ x 30 = $_______ Transport around the UK (Car rental) – $_______ Day tours $_______ Meals x 3 per day $_______ Entrance Fees $_____ Extras (souvenirs, etc) $______

What to Pack for a Trip to the UK and Ireland

What to pack for your trip to the UK and Ireland will depend on the season you are visiting. It is always best to dress in layers so you can take them off if hot, and put them on when cold. I would suggest if you are visiting at the height of winter to ensure you have thermal underwear and a good waterproof jacket. You will be doing plenty of walking on this driving tour of the UK and Ireland so definitely invest in a good pair of walking shoes.

1 Month UK and Ireland Highlights

This 1 month UK and Ireland itinerary starts and finishes in London

The Amazing Experiences included in my suggested itinerary include:

• Discover London and see places on the Monopoly Board on a Hop-on Hop-off London Sightseeing Bus Tour
• Visit Stonehenge, Bath, Cardiff, Liverpool, Glasgow, Edinburgh, Dublin and Belfast
• See crystal being made in Waterford
• Visit Blarney Castle and kiss its Blarney Stone
• See the birthplace of Shakespeare in Stratford-upon-Avon
• Get your Harry Potter on in Oxford and Edinburgh
• See Hadrians Wall
• Experience the Cliffs of Moher, the White Cliffs of Dover and the Giant’s Causeway
• Visit museums including the National Wallace Museum in Stirling
• Taste whisky in Scotland and Guinness in Ireland

Days 1-5 – London

No trip to Great Britain should miss the capital of England, London. And this is where this 1 month UK and Ireland itinerary starts and ends. Use day 1 to get use to UK time and start exploring this wonderful city. You will have it in your mind what you want to see and do in London. I usually start my visit to a new big city with a hop-on hop-off bus sightseeing tour. One of these tours takes me to all the places to see and provides a commentary of each place. Then I can decide which places I want to go back and visit longer.

The bus will swing by must-see attractions like Buckingham Palace, Westminster Abbey, Trafalgar Square, St Paul’s Cathedral, Piccadilly Circus, Parliament Square, Big Ben, Harrods in Knightsbridge, Natural History Museum, V&A Museum, Hyde Park, Marble Arch, Kings Cross, Tower Bridge, Oxford Street shops, Madame Tussauds, the Tower of London, London Eye, The Shard and so much more. You can book you hop-on hop-off sightseeing tour of London here .

Day 1 in London – get use to UK time and get your bearings on a hop-on hop-off bus around London. Followed by an evening in Covent Garden to get a meal and drink.

Your second day in London is all about Westminster and Buckingham Palace. Catch the tube or bus to Westminster and discover Westminster Abbey, the Houses of parliament with Big Ben, 10 Downing Street and nearby is Buckingham Palace and The Mall. Then take a walk through Hyde Park.

Day 3 discover the history of London with a visit to the Tower of London. Take a walk across Tower Bridge to the Southbank Area.

On your fourth day in London before you head through England get some shopping in on Bond or Oxford Streets or at Harrods in Knightsbridge.

Day 5 is a day trip to Windsor to visit Windsor Castle . This is the birthplace of Queen Victoria and you can see a lot of memorabilia from her childhood and reign here. Walk the cobbled streets and pick up a royal trinket or two. You can get to Windsor on a tour or catch the train. It is a very pleasant train ride and quite spectacular when Windsor Castle appears.

How to Get Around London

London is synonymous with black cabs, red double decker buses and the Tube. Get yourself a day ticket and this public transport to visit all the places you want to see in London.

Where to Stay in London

As you will be spending 5 nights here in London you may wish to choose accommodation with cooking facilities. This way you could have breakfast each morning. Make lunch to take with you for the day and cook your dinner if you don’t want to go out each night. Cooking your own meals will definitely help you save heaps of money.

If hostels are your choice of accommodation style then you are in luck because London has around 150 of them. I lived in London for 4 years and stayed in many hostels, hotels and B&Bs. Here are some hostels I have stayed in in London and can recommend.

YHA Central London Astor Hyde Park Generator London The Walrus Bar and Hostel

If you are wanting a budget hotel then consider:

Earls Court Garden Hotel  which is in Earls Court and is easy to reach from the airport and has lots of transport into central London. Oxford Hotel Lord Jim  – I have stayed in this one and it was enjoyable. Mayflower Hotel and Apartments

For a bit of luxury consider  The Savoy  or  The Ritz . For more London accommodation options visit  Booking.com .

You could consider house sitting for your 5 days in London. Check out  Trusted Housesitters  for options.

Day 6 – Canterbury, Hastings and Brighton

Take a walk along Brighton Pier while in Brighton

Distance London to Brighton via Canterbury and Hastings – about a couple of hundred miles which will be around 3 hours of driving.

Today, pick up your car and hit the road. Take the M2 and onto the A2 towards the East Coast. First stop is the town of Canterbury which is home to Canterbury Cathedral, founded 597AD. This beautiful cathedral is the headquarters of the Church of England. Take a walk around the ancient walls, originally built by the Romans that encircle the city centre. See beautiful old timber-framed houses built on cobbled streets. Step back in time on discover this beautiful old town. Maybe enjoy a meal before jumping in the car for our next stop on this British road trip.

Next stop, White Cliffs of Dover which is the English coastline facing the Strait of Dover and France. These cliffs are composed of soft white limestone which give them their white chalk appearance. The cliffs are about 350 feet high and you can walk along the cliff face if you are feeling energetic and the weather is good. You will be treated to great views if you do! Start your visit at the Dover Visitor Centre where you can park and have access to a cafe, toilets and the walking tracks. Parking costs 5 pound per day or free for National Trust members. Did you take out membership?

From Dover head to Hastings . This town is known for the 1066 Battle of Hastings which was fought on a field where the Battle Abbey now stands. If you love history, you will love this place and you will definitely want to visit the ruins of Hastings Castle which was once the home of William the Conqueror. There are also a couple of museums nearby, Hastings Fishermen’s Museum and Shipwreck Museum which document the maritime history of the area.  

Onto Brighton. Check into your accommodation for 2 nights as tomorrow you will have a full day discovering Brighton.

Where to Stay in Brighton – book fo r 2 nights.

Hostel: YHA Brighton , Selina Brighton Backpackers Budget-Mid Range: Royal Albion Hotel , The Queensberry Hotel

Day 7 – Brighton

Brighton is a seaside resort, well a British version of a seaside resort on the East Sussex coast of England. Realistically it is only 47 miles south of London and you could visit it doing a day trip from London. I have done it a few times by train from London but if you do, you won’t have the flexibility to visit the White Cliffs of Dover and Hastings.

I love visiting Brighton, particularly walking along the pier and stopping in the arcade to play a couple of games and to buy some Brighton rock – a hard lolly to suck. If the weather is warm, buy an ice cream and sit on the pebbly beach ‘ouch’, and enjoy the water. Or perhaps some fish and chips might be on the cards! As Brighton is rather compact it is easy to walk around. Many of the streets are cobbled so wear good walking shoes to see the old buildings and visit the Royal Pavilion. Enjoy a drink in one of the pubs before heading back to your accommodation for the night.

Day 8 – Stonehenge to Winchester to Salisbury to Bath

Distance Brighton to Stonehenge is 97miles or about 2 hours drive passing by Portsmouth and Southampton.

After breakfast, hop in the car and head west through the beautiful English countryside to Wiltshire and Stonehenge. Stop by Winchester and visit the Winchester Cathedral to see King Arthur’s Round Table. Then to Salisbury , home of the Salisbury Cathedral for a quick look around and maybe some morning tea.  

Then to Stonehenge. Stonehenge is an iconic symbol of Britain with a history spanning some 4,500 years with different meanings to people. After parking in the car park visit the information centre to learn about Stonehenge before walking under the main road to the field where the sacred stone circle making up Stonehenge reside. You will need an entrance ticket to Stonehenge which you can purchase here . Budget to spend a couple of hours here, then onto the town of Bath in the county of Somerset for the evening.

READ MORE : How to Visit Stonehenge .

Where to Stay in Bath – book fo r 2 nights

Hostel: YHA Bath Hostel , Bath Backpackers Hotel: St Christophers Inn , The Z Hotel Bath

Day 9 – Bath

Me enjoying the baths in Bath

You might be itching to see the Roman baths, but start your day on the Bath Hop-on Hop-off Sightseeing Bus which will take you to all the places of note. Before deciding which ones you wish to spend more time at. Then spend the rest of the day discovering the Roman era natural hot spring water baths, built in 60AD that are still operating today. Then see Bath’s honey-coloured Georgian architecture with the iconic Royal Crescent and the majestic Circus. End the day with a good meal in one of Bath’s pubs. Then maybe have a nightcap before heading back to your accommodation.

Day 10 – To Cardiff

Distance Bath to Cardiff – 1 hour 5 mins, 54 miles afternoon Cardiff

After breakfast, jump in your car, cross the massive Severn Bridge into Wales, heading for the capital of Cardiff . On arriving in Cardiff, find a place to park and get to know this beautiful and compact city. Maybe take Cardiff’s Hop-on Hop-off Sightseeing Bus . The head back to visit the medieval Cardiff Castle located in the city centre before enjoying a meal along the ultramodern Cardiff Bay Waterfront . Why not also visit the Millennium Stadium , known as Principality Stadium since 2016 and is home of Welsh rugby.

Where to Stay in Cardiff for the night .

There are a number of hostels close to the city centre –  Bunkhouse  (0.3km) and  The Riverhouse  (0.7km) for those of you looking for a bed in a dorm room. For a budget hotel try the  Ibis Budget Hotel Cardiff City  or the  Holiday Inn . Happy to splurge for your time in Cardiff check into  The Parkgate Hotel  or the  St David’s Cardiff an IHG Hotel .

Day 11 – To Liverpool

Get a photo with the Fab Four

Distance Cardiff to Liverpool 3.5 hours, 196 miles along the M6.

Leave Wales and head back into England to arrive in Liverpool by lunch time and spend the rest of the day getting to know this city. Famous for the Beatles you can visit The Beatles Story and Museum while taking the Liverpool and Beatles Hop-on Hop-off Sightseeing Tour . Perhaps include a visit to the world-famous ‘ Cavern Club ’ on Mathew Street. Then take walk around the Albert Docks along the Mersey river and discover historic architecture and local Liverpudlian lifestyle. Maybe even get a photo with the fab four statue! Enjoy an evening in one of the pubs and discover a ‘Scouse stew’ with a pint before heading to your accommodation for the night. Or take the overnight ferry to Dublin rather than waiting for tomorrow. However, I think you see more on the day sailing. Leaving one harbour and coastline behind and arriving to a new coastline and harbour is quite spectacular.

Where to Stay in Liverpool for the night if not doing the overnight ferry but doing it during the day tomorrow. Taking the overnight ferry will give you more time in Dublin.

Hostel: YHA Liverpool Albert Docks , Liverpool Central YHA Budget-mid-range Hotel: Easy Hotel Liverpool , Tune Hotel Liverpool

Day 12 – Ferry to Dublin

Ferry to Dublin takes between 6.5-7.5 hours or you could fly.

Today cruise across the Irish sea to Dublin . On arrival check into your accommodation and head out to Temple Bar for the evening. This area is full of restaurants and bars offering good Irish ‘craic’ (fun). Maybe an Irish Stew and a Pint of Guinness is on the cards!

Where to Stay in Dublin – book for 2 nights

There are plenty of hostels in Dublin for your 2 night stay.

Jacobs Inn Hostel , only 600m from the city centre. The  Apache Hostel  in the Temple Bar area. Generator Dublin , about 1.2km from the city centre and is great value if you measure it in terms of star rating, facilities and reviews. Backpackers D1Hostel , only 450m from city centre. The Times Hostel , College Street, only 500m from city centre. Backpackers Citi Hostel , Dublin City Centre, 450m from centre.

If it’s a budget hotel room you are after then check out:

RIU Plaza The Gresham , Dublin is a 4 star hotel only 250m from the city centre. Amberley House  by the KeyCollections, 400m from centre, and includes breakfast. Arcadia House B&B

Day 13 – Dublin

Dublin is a compact city and to get to know it I suggest you get onto the Dublin hop-on hop-off bus to discover what this magnificent medieval city has to offer. Then you can head back to the places you want to spend more time. Such as:

– Dublin Castle – Guinness Storehouse to discover how Guinness is made and to have a sample in the bar on the top floor with fabulous views over Dublin. – St Stephen’s Green, the city’s most famous park. – National Museum of Ireland – Book of Kells at Trinity College – Irish Whisky Museum – Do some shopping along Grafton Street, a pedestrian only shopping street filled with many street-level stores and coffee shops.

End your day in Dublin in another traditional Irish pub for another Irish meal, Guinness with Irish music and dancing.

Day 14 – to Waterford, Blarney Castle to kiss the Blarney Stone

Today leave Dublin and head south to Ireland’s ancient east coast and to its oldest city, Waterford . This city was founded by Vikings in 914 and has a fascinating history. Make time to visit the Waterford Crystal Factory to watch professional crystal crafters at work and maybe buy some crystal to take home.

After some lunch, continue to Blarney Castle housing the famous Blarney Stone. The stone is legendary for being the Stone of Eloquence and if you kiss it, you will never again be lost for words. Be warned, to kiss the stone you will be hung upside down by a couple of friendly guy! Then onto Killarney for the night.

Where to stay in Killarney – book for 2 nights

Hostel: The Black Sheep Hostel , The Railway Hostel Budget-Mid Range Hotels: Killarney Royal Hotel , Killarney Country House

Day 15 – Ring of Kerry

The Ring of Kerry is a popular scenic circular driving tourist route skirting the edges of the Iveragh Peninsula in County Kerry, south-western Ireland. It is only 111 miles long and can take a couple of hours if you don’t stop. But you must stop, and you will as you drive through picture-postcard quaint and charming towns. Plus you will see plenty of Ireland’s rugged coastline with breathtaking coastal views and emerald-green paddocks. Definitely have your camera full charged for your visit today. Also, stop in the little villages and enjoy culinary treats from cute cafes, restaurants, bars and pubs in the area.

You can choose to stay in one of the small towns along the way or back in Killarney which will be easy and closer for our drive tomorrow.

Day 16 – Killarney to Adare to Limerick to Galway

The Cliffs of Moher – a must on any Irish holiday

Today is another day for dramatic Irish scenery as you make your way up the ‘Wild Atlantic Way’. Take a little time to stop in Adare and Limerick . Adare is renowned as Ireland’s prettiest village, with its string of beautiful 19th-century thatch-roofed white-walled cottages. Another good photo shot here! Then journey through the county of Limerick, maybe even stop in the town of Limerick before making your way to the famous Cliffs of Moher . These staggeringly beautiful, entirely vertical cliffs rise to a height of 214m. Their edge abruptly falls away into a ceaselessly churning Atlantic. The views on a clear day are absolutely breath-taking. The wind can be extremely strong and blustery, but well worth the visit.

Continue to Galway for the evening. Here you will discover remnants of the medieval town walls as you walk around the shops selling musical instruments, books and handcrafted Claddagh rings – have you bought one of these yet? Enjoy a night out for dinner in one of the local pubs.

Where to Stay in Galway for the night

Hostel: Galway City Hostel , Kinlay Hostel Budget-mid-range hotel: Galway Arms Inn , The Lane Boutique Hotel

Day 17 – To Enniskillen, Londonerry & Belfast, Northern Ireland

Today leave the republic of Ireland and drive into Northern Ireland, part of the United Kingdom. It is quite a long drive but you will see plenty. Take the N83 and drive through beautiful green open fields with many towns along the way. This area is a key filming location for the hit television show Game of Thrones. If you love the show, you will know where you are! One of the towns you might drive through is Enniskillen . Known for the Remembrance Day bombing (also known as the Enniskillen bombing or Poppy Day massacre) which took place on 8 November 1987. Twelve people were killed and 63 injured from the bombing.

Leave Enniskillen and onto Ireland’s second largest city, Derry (Londonderry) . There is plenty of history to discover here within the 17th-century city walls. Learn about the Siege of Derry, the Battle of the Bogside and Bloody Sunday – sung about in U2s song ‘Sunday Bloody Sunday’. With all this history enjoy some frivolity in one of the vibrant pubs.

Take the A37 to your next stop of the well-known phenomenon of the Giant’s Causeway . This is about an hour or so away but is one of natures most beautiful formations. Hear the stories as you walk around the some 40,000 interlocking basalt columns.

Then head south driving some 60 or so miles to the capital Belfast for the evening.

Where to Stay in Belfast – book for 2 nights

Hostel: Lagan Backpackers , Belfast International Youth Hostel Budget-Mid Range Hotels: Holiday Inn Belfast , Hilton Belfast

Day 18 – Belfast

Belfast is an interesting place with its nod to Titanic and its healing with its Peace Wall

Wake up in Belfast and get ready for a full day of things to do.

• Get a ticket and jump on the Hop-on Hop-off bus of Belfast, taking you to all the best places to see.
• Discover where RMS Titanic was built at the renovated dockyards’ Titanic Quarter. Check out the aluminium-clad museum, Titanic Belfast Experience , to discover more about this ship that struck an iceberg and sunk in 1912.
• Delve into Belfast’s history visiting Catholic and Protestant estates and the Belfast Peace Wall .
• Finish your day in the Cathedral Quarter for a meal and a pint of Irish stout.

Day 19 – Ferry from Belfast to Cairnryan in Scotland and drive to Glasgow

Say goodbye to Northern Ireland and hello to Scotland today by hopping on the ferry from Belfast to Cairnryan. It’s only a couple of hours away, then continue driving to Glasgow. After some lunch, get on the hop-on hop-off bus to discover Glasgow. After a good Scottish meal in a pub head to your accommodation.

Where to Stay in Glasgow – book for 2 nights

Hostel: Euro Hostel Glasgow , Glasgow Youth Hostel Budget-Mid Range Hotels: Holiday Inn Glasgow Central , Motel One Glasgow

Day 20 – Glasgow

Glasgow is such an underrated city. Known for being bleak with plenty of housing commission dwellers Glasgow has come into its own with many vibrant pubs and coffee shops to enjoy. Highlights to see in Glasgow include:

• Glasgow Cathedral
• Riverside Museum
• St Vincent Place
• Glasgow University to name a few.

Day 21 – Glasgow to Stirling and Scottish Highlands

Today sees you hit the 3 week mark in my 1 month UK and Ireland itinerary – isn’t it going too fast! But we are now headed to one of my favourite places on earth – the Scottish Highlands. The first time I visited the Scottish Highlands I stood in the Cairngorm Mountains and thought, ‘I could easily move abroad and live here’. Maybe its because my surname is McCullum that I feel this way! But I could easily move to Scotland, rent or buy a stone farmhouse and live in the Scottish Highlands. In the meantime……

After breakfast, head to Stirling , only half an hour or so drive away and one of the must visit places in the Scottish Highlands . Stirling is one of my favourite Scottish towns, it’s got a beautifully preserved Old Town with many historic buildings. And it has cobbled streets so ensure you have good flat walking shoes so you can walk around the ramparts of Stirling Castle . A must see is a visit to the famous Wallace Monument standing on the summit of Abbey Craig . This honours the legendary Braveheart freedom fighter, William Wallace. You know, the one made famous in that movie with Mel Gibson as William Wallace.

Can I suggest while in Stirling, introduce yourself to whisky. There are many whisky distilleries in Scotland all making fine single malt whisky and Stirling Distillery is just one of them. And lucky for you, in the shadow of Stirling Castle, you will find Stirling Distillery. Discover how whisky is made and maybe have a taste or two!

I hope you are under the limit to drive up through the picturesque highlands to Inverness , which is a good 3 hours of driving away. Lucky there are a number of stops including Glencoe , one of Scotlands ski towns to stop at. But keep going to Fort William on the shores of Loch Linne. Often talked about in the ‘Outlander’ Netflix series, roam around Fort William and see what you recognise. Fort William is known as the gateway to Ben Nevis , the UK’s highest peak and if you are visiting during the winter months you may wish to include some skiing or snowboarding into your stay here on the Nevis Range Mountain Resort . If not, visit the West Highland Museum focusing on life in the area and keep your whisky tasting pallet up with a trip to the Ben Nevis Distillery . Spend the night here in Fort William.

If you are a working holiday in the UK and you love skiing and snowboarding, why not get a job in the Scottish ski fields. Scotland has a good snow season from November to March and need staff to ensure the season goes off without a hitch. If you would like to work and ski Scotland, read how to do it here .

Where to stay in Fort William

Hostel: Glen Nevis Youth Hostel , Fort William Backpackers Budget-Mid Range Hotel: Muthu Fort William Hotel , Nevis Bank Inn

Day 22 – to Loch Ness, Inverness and Colluden Battlefield

Urquhart Castle on the banks of Loch Ness – Did you see Nessie?

After breakfast head north and deeper into the dramatic Scottish Highlands to Loch Ness . You’ve got a number of options here to spot ‘Nessie’, the Loch Ness Monster. You can walk to the 1000 year old Urquhart Castle on the banks of the loch to explore it and to look for Nessie. Or you could take a Loch Ness Cruise in search of Nessie .

After a wonderful morning head to Inverness via Colluden Battlefield which is only 8 miles or so outside of Inverness. The Colluden Battlefield is the site of last battle of the Jacobite Rising – where the Scots were fighting the English for their freedom. Alas they lost with a great loss of life. You may have seen this in the Outlander series. Here, at the Colluden Battlefield Visitor Centre you discover all about this battle and what led up to it. The places almost comes alive through wonderful interactive exhibitions and artefacts. Then walk outside into the field and along the battle lines of the clans. Then onto Inverness for the evening.

Where to Stay in Inverness

Hostel: Inverness Youth Hostel , Hillview House Hotel Inverness Budget-Mid Range Hotel: Colluden House Hotel , The Royal Highland Hotel

Day 23 – Inverness to Edinburgh

Many use Inverness as a base to explore Loch Ness and Colluden. However, Inverness is known as the cultural capital of the Scottish Highlands and has a number of places to see. Start with the Old Town where you will find Inverness Cathedral and the Old High Church . This will take up you r morning, then you hop in the car and head to Edinburgh via the A9 covering 200 or so miles during the 3 hour drive.

On the way to Edinburgh you could stop at Aviemore , often referred to as Aussiemore due to the number of Australians who get jobs here during the Scottish ski season. Aviemore is at the base of the Cairngorm Mountains which have a great ski season plus plenty of hikes in the warmer months. There are other towns to stop in along the way including Perth before arriving in Edinburgh .

Where to Stay in Edinburgh – book for 2 nights

Hostel: Castle Rock Hostel , Kick Ass Greyfriars Hostel Budget-Mid Range Hotel: The Scotsman Hotel , Novotel Edinburgh Centre

Day 24 – Edinburgh

Wake up in Edinburgh and get your walking shoes on because you will be doing a lot of walking today. But first, ride aboard the Edinburgh hop-on hop-off bus . it will take you to all the places in Edinburgh of note and interest. Then head to Edinburgh Castle . You can’t miss it sitting high on a crag overlooking the city. Take a tour and see where Mary Queen of Scots gave birth to her son James and also the spikes where William Wallace’s head was displayed after his death. Then walk the Royal Mile and visit a few shops on the way down to Holyrood Palace . Holyrood Palace is the home of the British monarch when in Edinburgh. These things will mostly take you all day, depending on your interest. Other things to do in Scotland include:

• Take a walking tour of the city, such as a Potter-themed tour and see if some parts look strangely familiar to those penned in the first Harry Potter novel.
• See St Giles Cathedral.
• Hike up Arthur’s Seat for great views of the city.
• Visit Princes Street Gardens.
• Explore the Museum of Scotland or the National and Portrait Galleries.
• Enjoy more whisky at the Scotch Whisky Experience.
• Shop along George Street.

Finish your day in one of the quirky bars, cosy traditional pubs or craft beer house in the Old Town for a meal – with or without haggis – and a dram of whiskey before retiring to your accommodation.

Day 25 – Edinburgh to York

Today you must say goodbye to Scotland and make your way back into the north of England. I suggest taking the A1 which hugs the coastline for some great scenery and cute towns. A couple of hours drive will see you at the first stop of Alnwick Castle in Alnwick which is the residence of The 12th Duke of Northumberland. It was built following the Norman conquest in 1096 but you will most likely recognise it as being the place a number of movies and TV shows are filmed. Including Downton Abbey, Black Adder and two Harry Potter films (The Philosopher’s Stone and The Chamber of Secrets).

Continue into Yorkshire, and to the county’s capital, York . This is a charming walled city with winding cobbled streets that is overlooked by the largest gothic cathedral in northern Europe – York Minster. As you will be arriving late in the day check into your accommodation before heading out for dinner.

Where to Stay in York – book for 2 nights

Hostel: Safestay York , YHA York Budget-Mid Range Hotel: Ibis York Centre , Doubletree by Hilton

Day 26 – York

Spend the whole day today exploring York. York is a walled city in northeast England that was founded by the ancient Romans. Its huge 13th-century Gothic cathedral, York Minster, has medieval stained glass and two functioning bell towers. The City Walls form a walkway on both sides of the River Ouse. The Monk Bar gate houses an exhibition tracing the life of 15th-century Plantagenet King Richard III. The best things to see and do in York include:

• Go on the York Hop-on Hop-off sightseeing bus tour
• Walk the walls around York
• Visit York Minster to discover its centuries of history and get the best views over the city
• See York Castle Museum
• Discover the viking history at the JORVIK Viking Centre

Day 27 – To Nottingham

Me and Robin Hood Statue in Nottingham

Distance from York to Nottingham is a leisurely 88 miles which will take about 1.5 hours along the M1. You will be there by mid-morning and able to enjoy Nottingham for the rest of the day. This area is known for being where Robin Hood spent a lot of time robbing the rich and giving to the poor. You could visit Sherwood Forest not to far away or the hilltop Nottingham Castle Museum and Art Gallery . However, Nottingham is also known for once being the lace capital of the world. You can discover all about lace, and maybe buy some, in the Lace Market area .

Where to stay in Nottingham

Hostels: Igloo Hybrid , Midtown Lodge Budget-Mid Range Hotels: Park Plaza Nottingham , Doubletree by Hilton

Day 28 – To Stratford-upon-Avon

From Nottingham head to Stratford-upon-Avon, home of Shakespeare – William Shakespeare that is. It is only 83 miles away so will take around 1.5 hours to reach. Stratford-upon-Avon is a medieval market town which William Shakespeare lived in the 16th century. Shakespeare is best known for his sonnets and plays such as ‘Romeo and Juliet’ and ‘Hamlet’. Things to see and do while here include:

• Visit Swan Theatre on the banks of the River Avo
• See Anne Hathaways Cottage and Gardens (Shakespeare’s wife)
• Walk along the river and through the town with its shopping areas and quirky cafes.
• Maybe take a canal boat tour.

After most of the day in Stratford-upon-Avon jump in the car and head to Blenheim Palace in the town of Woodstock. Blenheim Palace is the seat of the Dukes of Marlborough and is the only country house in England to hold the title of palace. Sir Winston Churchill, one of the UK most prominent Prime Ministers was born here. Take a walk through the palace and the grounds. It is then only a 20 minute drive to city of Oxford – the next stop on this itinerary of the UK and Ireland.

Where to Stay in Oxford – book for 2 nights

Hostel: Central Backpackers Budget-Mid Range Hotels: Holiday Inn Oxford , Leonardo Royal Hotel

Day 29 – Oxford

After breakfast take the Oxford Hop-on Hop-off sightseeing bus to see all the sights of the city before going back to some of the notable spots. If you are a Harry Potter lover , get your fix with a walking tour around the incredible Oxford Colleges and see where some of the scenes of the movies were made. End your day in one of the vibrant pubs enjoying a good English feed and a pint, possibly with a bunch of students!

Day 30 – Drive to London, return car and leave

Leave Oxford behind for the journey back to London. Return your rental car and leave the UK and Ireland for home.

And So Ends this 1 Month UK and Ireland itinerary

All good things must come to end, including this holiday of a lifetime in the UK and Ireland. On this last day, depending on where you are going to next, you possibly could have extra time in London or head to Heathrow Airport for your journey home. I hope you have had the best time in the UK and Ireland. This itinerary was designed to see the best ‘bits’ but I do hope it is only the first of many visits to the UK and Ireland for you. I’d love to hear your thoughts on my 1 month itinerary for the UK and Ireland in the comments following.

Don’t have 1 month to spend in the UK?

If you don’t have a month spend in the UK what about 3 weeks in the UK, well actually 3 weeks in Britain. Just cut out visiting Ireland on this itinerary and spend your 3 weeks touring around England, Wales and Scotland. And if you only have 2 weeks in the UK, I suggest spend most of your time in London before heading north to Scotland.

For more UK and Irish travel inspiration:

• UK Working Holiday
• Ireland Working Holiday
• How to Spend 5 Days in London
• Where to Stay in London when you move abroad to live there

You may also like:

Thanks for sharing!

Join my Facebook Group — Ask questions, get answers!

Expat Travel Nest – Living and Working Abroad

Just so you know: some of the links in this post might be affiliate links, which earn me a small commission at no extra cost to you. No pressure to use my links, but I REALLY appreciate when you do! Also, a s an Amazon Associate I earn from qualifying purchases.  

My favourite tools to Travel Live and Work Abroad

🏠 Where Will You Be Sleeping Tonight? – Get a bed in a hostel dorm through   HostelWorld or for a hotel room check out Booking.com . Get free accommodation house and pet sitting through Trusted Housesitters – this has saved me thousands on accommodation, no joke!

✈️ Need a cheap and flexible airfare – head to Skyscanner .

 🚙 Car Rental – search and compare vehicles at DiscoverCars .

 🚆  Train Travel: I love riding the rails. For a rail pass in Europe head to Raileurope . And Japan has a great one too –  JapanRail Pass .

🚌 Travelling by bus is often the cheapest way to travel. Compare and get a ticket or a pass at Busbud .

🏃🏻‍♀️ Jump-the-queue entrance tickets and day tours: I book these through GetYourGuide .

 🌏   How to pick a country to live and work abroad in? Check out my Working Holiday Visa Country Guides and Digital Nomad Visa Country Guides to see where you can live work play travel abroad.

 🚑 Should you buy travel insurance? Absolutely Yes! SafetyWing is great digital nomads and long-term travellers and World Normads has policies for general and adventure travel.

Buy the Guide to Get Ready to Live Abroad, Work Abroad and Travel Full Time Like a Pro

Join Me and Subscribe

Claim your free moving abroad checklist, + receive work and travel abroad tips and news delivered to your inbox., you have successfully subscribed, follow along on facebook, meet live work play travel.

Sharyn McCullum – Travel Writer / Blogger, Remote On-line Worker, sometime Digital Nomad and Travel, Live and Work Abroad Expert. Is a chocoholic, coffee connoisseur and lover of ’80s music. Been travelling all her life thanks to her dad who worked for an airline. Lived in London 4 years on a working holiday. Has holidayed in Hawaii over 15 times and currently calls Melbourne, Australia home. Is inspiring others to live work play travel around the world with this blog. Read more about Sharyn here.

11 Comments

I’ve always wanted to visit Edinburgh – the streets look so beautiful and it sounds like there is so much to do in town!

Hey there – good attempt but one day in Cardiff is all you could include in Wales!?! A great pity!

Yes, one day in Cardiff is good amount during this 1 month UK and Ireland Itinerary as there are a lot of other towns and cities to cover. More days in Cardiff will be included in my 1 month Britain Itinerary and it won’t be going to Ireland.

Goodness what an amaaaaazing ideas for a month long trip! I grew up in the UK (in both England and Ireland) so it is fun to see some of the best bits though your eyes. It looks like you made the most of that working holiday visa! 🙂

What a fantastic Itinerary, it goes to show that 1 month isn’t enough to visit the whole UK and Ireland. I would want to do so much more, we had 4days in London and I know we didn’t get everywhere, but loved wandering Hyde Park.

Oh my goodness come I can’t believe that you explore the UK for one month! That’s so awesome. The cliffs and Lochness look beautiful! I can’t wait to explore some of these incredible places. Thank you for sharing!

1 Month in the UK and Ireland is just a taste and will let you visit all the ‘must see’ highlights. Longer would be more incredible.

Have you been eavesdropping on my conversations? This is EXACTLY where I want to go next year, but want lots of time for genealogy research! This gives me a great starting point for planning!!

I think I’m more of a mind reader! LOL. I hope you enjoy your trip to Australia next year.

I arrive in London on June 5th and have a room booked in Paris on July 13th. That’s 38 days I can spend in The UK and Ireland. What places would you add or spend more time in if you had an extra week??

I have never been and would like to use my time wisely.

I’m going to try to find a home bases, a place(s) centrally located to several areas. I work remotely so moving every night or every other night isn’t practical for me. I prefer at least 3 night in a place but not sure I can do that here.

If I had an extra week in the UK I would spend more time in the Scottish Highlands. Or I would add an extra day here and there in my favourite UK cities – Dublin, London, Edinburgh, Liverpool and Brighton. You can definitely stay in a place for 3 nights or more.

Submit a Comment Cancel reply

Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

Submit Comment

Privacy Overview

You have successfully subscribed..

I will not send you spam, just my newsletter. Unsubscribe at any time.

Healey flew to Puerto Rico last month during four-day trip, aides say

I n an about-face, Governor Maura Healey on Friday acknowledged she took a four-day trip to Puerto Rico in February, divulging her whereabouts after she and her aides had initially refused to say where she traveled.

The disclosure follows days of questions about what Healey, as the state’s chief executive, should be expected to make public. Aides to the first-term Democrat said on Friday that Healey now intends to regularly disclose the location of her out-of-state travels, including for personal trips.

Earlier this week, Healey said she would not share such details publicly, breaking from her predecessors and her own past practice early in her term.

“The Governor’s focus is on balancing the need to protect the privacy and security of her family while also providing information to the public,” Karissa Hand, a Healey spokesperson, said in a statement Friday. “Last month, the Governor’s partner, Joanna Lydgate, took her to Puerto Rico for a long weekend for her birthday — their first vacation together in a long time.”

Healey aides initially refused to say where she traveled when she spent four days out of state on a “personal trip,” a stretch in which Healey’s powers constitutionally shifted to the Massachusetts secretary of state. On Monday, Healey defended the decision, saying she intends to share information publicly about her “work-related travel” but not personal trips.

“My personal life is my personal life,” Healey told reporters . “I’m going to work to make sure that privacy is maintained for my family.”

Hand said Friday the governor’s office going forward will provide the location of Healey’s out-of-state personal travel in her monthly calendar, which it releases upon request.

When Healey initially left Massachusetts in mid-February, it was Secretary of State William F. Galvin, not Healey’s office, that disclosed she was out of state. Under the state constitution, any time the governor travels outside of Massachusetts, it triggers a transfer of executive power.

Healey’s office months ago stopped publicly divulging her out-of-state travel plans ahead of time, citing unspecified security concerns. But the Puerto Rico trip was the first instance in which her office, at least initially, shielded her whereabouts, even after the fact.

A spokesperson for Galvin, a Brighton Democrat, said at the time he would serve as acting governor for roughly three days — from Friday, Feb. 9, until the evening of Sunday, Feb. 11 — because both Healey and Lieutenant Governor Kim Driscoll had left the state. Under the state constitution, the secretary of state is next in line to become acting governor if the governor and lieutenant governor are not in Massachusetts.

A copy of Healey’s monthly calendar, which her office released last week in response to a Globe request, noted Healey was not in Massachusetts on Feb. 8 — the day of her 53rd birthday — and that she was out of state. But, it did not specify exactly when she left Massachusetts, when she returned on Feb. 11, or other details, such as to what airport she was flying to or from.

Healey’s office has routinely included those details for other trips on her calendar, including for an official trip she took later in February to Washington, D.C.

The decision sparked questions about what line a governor can draw between personal and public life. It also refocused attention on Healey’s previous pledge to bring more transparency to the executive suite “ than ever before .”

Elected officials across the country in recent years have faced escalating risks ranging from protests and swatting calls to, in the case of Michigan’s governor, a failed kidnapping plot . In the wake of the Jan. 6, 2021, attack on the US Capitol, state regulators in Massachusetts said they would allow elected officials to use campaign funds to buy bulletproof vests , gas masks, and other safety gear to protect themselves, underscoring the changing nature of the political climate.

While Healey was in Puerto Rico last month, about two dozen members of a regional neo-Nazi group gathered outside her Arlington home, their second demonstration there since the fall. State Police said members of NSC-131, which describes itself as a “pro-white, street-oriented fraternity,” gathered for about 12 minutes before leaving. Police made no arrests.

Healey, the first woman and openly gay governor elected in Massachusetts history, denounced the group after its first demonstration, saying its members were “trying to scare people.” Healey lives in Arlington with Lydgate, who has two children.

Asked in a radio interview on Tuesday whether she is “less safe than previous governors,” Healey demurred.

“I don’t know about me personally. I will say that . . . this is a time of heightened violence, vitriol, hate demonstration,” she said on WBUR’s “ Radio Boston .” “Just more broadly, too, we see this element unfortunately that has infused its way. And so it’s just something that we all have to account for.”

Healey had previously disclosed basic details about her personal travel. For example, she disclosed in February 2023 that she was traveling to Florida for what her office at the time called a “family trip.” Her office also disclosed in July she took an eight-day personal trip to Rhode Island around the Fourth of July holiday.

Speaking on Tuesday, she said while her personal travel may be “of interest to maybe some,” most people are more concerned about how she’s attempting to address the state’s housing crisis or Massachusetts’ high cost of living.

“It’s a job that one takes and assumes, knowing that there’s going to be a lot of stress and a lot of challenge,” Healey said.

This illegal Hawaii hike has caused controversy for years, now it's being removed for good

Starting this month, one of Hawaii’s most dangerous and controversial hikes will be permanently removed.

Oahu’s Stairway to Heaven trail, comprising 3,922 slick steel steps that ascend the narrow ridges of the Koolau Mountain Range, has been illegal to hike since 1987. Although trespassing cost hikers a $1,000 citation, thousands still attempted the trek for an Edenic view of the island. Social media helped propel the trail, also known as Haiku Stairs, into popularity. 

The process of dismantling the “aging, narrow metal stair structure” will begin with the removal of over 600 stair modules, according to a press release by the City and County of Honolulu. The entire project is expected to take six months.

During the Wednesday announcement, Honolulu Mayor Rick Blangiardi said the removal is “long overdue.” 

“This decision that was made was predicated upon our respect for the people who live in and around the entrance to the stairs, our respect for our aina (land), and our respect for both the future and the past history of the culture of the Haiku community,” he added.

Learn more: Best travel insurance

The City and County of Honolulu unanimously passed Resolution 21-154 in 2021 to remove the stairs as an effort to increase the quality of life for the nearby residents, improve public safety and preserve the natural beauty of the lush Haiku Valley. 

Be a better tourist to Hawaii: Volunteer to help leave the islands better than when you arrived

Honolulu City Council Vice Chair Esther Kiaaina, who introduced the resolution, called the project “a new chapter for Haiku Valley” and the collective decision to eradicate the stairs is “for the good of the community” during the press conference , according to Hawaii New Now. 

"After decades of the community asking the government for relief, we had an obligation to make a decision and a decision that I knew would displease some people but at the end, I had to look at a lot of variable factors," Kiaaina, who has been involved in discussions around land management for Haiku Stairs for over two decades, told USA TODAY. She called it "a hard decision."

For decades, residents who live near the stairs have been complaining of disturbances by hikers, who often hopped fences and trespassed onto private property during the middle of the night to catch the sunrise. Some hikers blocked people’s driveways and vandalized or urinated on people’s property, the resolution said. 

Between August 2017 and March 2020, police officers turned away 11,427 people attempting to hike the stairs by passing through the surrounding neighborhoods, according to the resolution. 

With its steep cliffs and unpredictable weather conditions, the trail is highly dangerous. Any mistake can result in a helicopter rescue, although there have not been any fatalities on record. Between 2010 and 2022, more than 188 people were rescued from the hike – paid for by taxpayers. With helicopter rescues costing thousands of dollars, a bill was introduced last year to make people pay for their own rescues, but it has not passed .    

Along with deconstructing the stairs, the project also includes the restoration of native plants in impacted areas. The project will also preserve some of the structure to honor the stair’s historical significance as a World War II military access route. 

"The wonderment is still there, that's the natural beauty of the mauna (mountain) and Haiku Valley," Kiaaina said. "The stairs itself served a purpose for U.S. national security purposes and that purpose is done. Separate from what people think, I feel part of the healing is for the mauna (mountain) and for the valley itself."

The city stressed that the stairs will become even more perilous during construction and “present an immediate safety threat” to anyone who may try to sneak in a final hike. 

Kathleen Wong is a travel reporter for USA TODAY based in Hawaii. You can reach her at [email protected] .

• News U.S. News Life Politics Business Science/Health Good News World Tech Entertainment Sports
• Shows Schedule Show List
• Documentaries In Real Life Next Level Bellingcat All Docs
• Investigations
• About Team Viewer Spotlight Hotline Support

2024 could be the year to travel as airfare prices are declining

Last month there was a notable decline in airfare prices, with a 7.1% decrease compared to the same month last year.

If you've noticed that airfare prices seem a bit more affordable lately, it's because they're on a downward trend.

According to data  released Tuesday  by the U.S. Department of Transportation, the average domestic airfare for 2023 was $382, making it 3.1% lower than the inflation-adjusted average fare of $394 in 2022; and it's 36.4% lower than the peak fare of $600 recorded in 2000.

The news comes while costs continue to rise in most other sectors — yet the desire to travel continues to increase.

"In the first quarter 2023, passenger demand increased with U.S. airlines reporting 75.4 million originating passengers, up 138.8% from 31.6 million passengers in the fourth quarter of 2020," DOT said in the  press release.  "U.S. passenger airlines collected 74.2% of total operating revenue of $39.2 billion from passenger fares during the first three months of 2023, down from 88.5% in 1990."

As for the numbers for this year,  Nerdwallet  reports that airfares dropped by 7.1% in March compared to the same month in 2023, and since 2019 before the start of the pandemic, airfares have only gone up by 2.6%.

While the prices are a bit lower, airlines like Delta are still benefiting from the traveling boom.  Delta's first-quarter earnings  report highlighted a $37 million profit fueled by the strong demand, and the airline says they expect the trend to continue throughout the summer.

Best airlines, top tips for smooth air travel with your pets

American Airlines announced a new pet policy in March, allowing customers to bring regular carry-on luggage with their dog or cat.

Latest in Travel

Delta is implementing a new system for passengers to board planes.

This news comes as the airline shared its first-quarter earnings for this year, saying it has earned $37 million thus far.

Is there going to be a Donald J. Trump International Airport?

Several Republicans have filed a bill to rename a large D.C.-area airport after the former president, but does it have enough steam?

United Airlines is asking pilots to take time off in May

United is asking pilots to take voluntary time off because the airline isn't getting as many new planes from Boeing as it expected.

Top Stories

Popular weight loss drug could treat sleep apnea, company says.

Zepbound was approved last year to treat obesity. The drug's maker, Eli Lilly, says it reduces the severity of obstructive sleep apnea by 63%.

Woman who accused Trevor Bauer of sex assault charged with fraud

The baseball player had previously accused the woman of faking a pregnancy to extort money from him.

Man fatally shoots Uber driver after both were targeted by scam calls

Police said phony phone calls led an elderly man to believe the Uber driver was robbing him after she was told to retrieve a package from his home.

An official website of the United States government Here's how you know

Official websites use .gov A .gov website belongs to an official government organization in the United States.

Secure .gov websites use HTTPS A lock ( Lock A locked padlock ) or https:// means you’ve safely connected to the .gov website. Share sensitive information only on official, secure websites.

Air Travel Consumer Report: January 2024 Numbers

WASHINGTON – The U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT) today released its Air Travel Consumer Report (ATCR) on airline operational data compiled for the month of January 2024 for on-time performance, mishandled baggage, and mishandled wheelchairs and scooters. The ATCR is designed to assist consumers with information on the quality of services provided by airlines. 

DOT expects that airlines will operate flights as scheduled and that when they do not, airlines will provide consumers the services consumers have been promised when a flight is canceled or delayed because of an airline issue. After a two-year DOT push to improve the passenger experience, the 10 largest airlines now guarantee meals and free rebooking on the same airline and nine guarantee hotel accommodations. Consumer-friendly information regarding airline commitments to their customers is available on the Department’s Airline Customer Service Dashboard at FlightRights.Gov. DOT also pushed airlines to provide fee-free family seating and rolled out a new family seating dashboard that highlights the airlines that guarantee fee-free family seating, and those of the 10 largest that do not, making it easier for parents to avoid paying junk fees to sit with their children when they fly.

In addition, DOT is improving transportation for individuals with disabilities. In July 2023, DOT finalized a rule which requires airlines to make lavatories on new, single-aisle aircraft more accessible. Then, in February 2024, DOT issued a proposal to address other barriers that Americans who use a wheelchair encounter when it comes to air travel by, among other things, mandating enhanced training for airline employees and contractors who physically assist passenger with disabilities and handle passengers’ wheelchairs.

Further, when necessary, DOT takes enforcement action against airlines and ticket agents that fail to comply with the Department’s aviation consumer protection requirements. In 2023, DOT issued the largest fines in the history of the consumer protection office. This includes a $140 million penalty against Southwest Airlines for failing passengers during the 2022 holiday meltdown. That penalty, which was in addition to over $600 million DOT already ensured was refunded by Southwest to passengers, requires Southwest to establish a $90 million compensation system for future passengers affected by significant delays and cancellations. DOT has helped return more than $3 billion in refunds to travelers since the pandemic began.

Flight Operations

The 560,352 flights operated in January 2024 were 99.56% of the 562,845 flights operated in January 2023. Operated flights in January 2024 were down 0.44% year-over-year from the 562,845 flights operated in January 2023 and down 7.18% month-over-month from 603,756 flights operated in December 2023. 

In January 2024, the 10 marketing network carriers reported 582,425 scheduled domestic flights, 22,073 (3.8%) of which were canceled. In December 2023, airlines scheduled 606,218 domestic flights, 2,462 (1.3%) of which were canceled. In January 2023, airlines scheduled 573,877 domestic flights, 11,032 (1.9%) of which were canceled.

On January 6, 2024, the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) ordered the grounding of Boeing 737 MAX aircraft with a mid-cabin door plug installed operated by U.S. airlines or in U.S. territory. On January 24, 2024, FAA cleared all such aircraft to return to service after each aircraft operator successfully completed a new inspection process approved by the FAA. Alaska Airlines and United Airlines have informed the DOT that the grounding of the 737 MAX9 aircraft with the mid-cabin door plug installed has impacted their on-time statistics during this reporting period.

January 2024 On-Time Arrival

In January 2024, reporting marketing carriers posted an on-time arrival rate of 72.8%, down from both 83.9% in December 2023 and from 76.2% in January 2023.

Highest Marketing Carrier On-Time Arrival Rates January 2024 (ATCR Table 1)

• Delta Airlines Network – 77.8%
• Allegiant Air – 75.6%
• Southwest Airlines – 73.9% 

Lowest Marketing Carrier On-Time Arrival Rates January 2024 (ATCR Table 1)

• Alaska Airlines Network – 64.7%
• JetBlue Airways – 69.5%
• American Airlines Network – 70.5%

January 2024 Flight Cancellations

In January 2024, reporting marketing carriers canceled 3.8% of their scheduled domestic flights, higher than both the rate of 0.4% in December 2023 and the rate of 1.9% in January 2023. 

Lowest Marketing Carrier Rates of Canceled Flights January 2024 (ATCR Table 6)

• Hawaiian Airlines – 1.5%  
• Spirit Airlines – 1.5%   
• JetBlue Airways – 1.7%    

Highest Marketing Carrier Rates of Canceled Flights January 2024 (ATCR Table 6)

• Alaska Airlines Network – 11.9%    
• United Airlines Network – 6.9%    
• Southwest Airlines – 3.1%    

Complaints About Airline Service

The release of air travel service complaint data in the Air Travel Consumer Report (ATCR) has been delayed primarily because of the continued high volume of complaints against airlines and ticket agents received by the Office of Aviation Consumer Protection (OACP) and the time needed to review and process these consumer complaints. The Department is investing in modernizing its system for handling consumer complaints with the support of a Technology Modernization Fund (TMF) investment to improve the customer experience for the tens of thousands of consumers who use the system each year and enable OACP to more effectively engage in oversight of the airline industry. 

As DOT modernizes its system, given the continued high volume of air travel service complaints concerning airlines and ticket agents, DOT has revised how it processes consumer complaints received after June 1, 2023. From June 2023 until the date its system is modernized, DOT intends to revise the ATCR to display consumer submissions (complaints, inquiries, and opinions) as opposed to complaints for this period. The Department will continue to display civil rights complaints in the ATCR in a similar manner as before and anticipates publishing submission and civil rights complaint numbers in spring.

Tarmac Delays

In January 2024, airlines reported 71 tarmac delays of more than three hours on domestic flights, compared to five tarmac delays of more than three hours on domestic flights reported in December 2023. In January 2024, airlines reported six tarmac delays of more than four hours on international flights, compared to zero tarmac delays of more than four hours on international flights reported in December 2023. 

Airlines are required to have and adhere to assurances that they will not allow aircraft to remain on the tarmac for more than three hours for domestic flights and four hours for international flights without providing passengers the option to deplane, subject to exceptions related to safety, security, and Air Traffic Control related reasons. An exception also exists for departure delays if the airline begins to return the aircraft to a suitable disembarkation point to deplane passengers by those times.

The Department investigates extended tarmac delays.

Mishandled Baggage

In January 2024, reporting marketing carriers handled 37.4 million bags and posted a mishandled baggage rate of 0.75%, higher than both the rate of 0.50% in December 2023 and the rate of 0.73% in January 2023.

The Department began displaying the mishandled baggage data as a percentage (i.e., per 100 bags enplaned) in January 2022. This is consistent with the manner that the mishandled wheelchairs and scooters rate is calculated and displayed.     In the prior three calendar year reports (2019 to 2021), the Department calculated the mishandled baggage rate based on the number of mishandled bags per 1,000 checked bags. 

Mishandled Wheelchairs and Scooters

In January 2024, reporting marketing carriers reported checking 56,659 wheelchairs and scooters and mishandling 836 for a rate of 1.48% mishandled wheelchairs and scooters, higher than the rate of 1.39% mishandled in December 2023 and lower than the rate of 1.47% mishandled in January 2023.

As described earlier, in February 2024, the Department announced its proposal to strengthen its rule implementing the Air Carrier Access Act (ACAA) to address the serious problems that individuals with disabilities using wheelchairs and scooters face when traveling by air that impact their safety and dignity, including mishandled wheelchairs and scooters and improper transfers to and from aircraft seats, aisle chairs, and personal wheelchairs. The proposed rule would require that airlines meet strict standards in accommodating passengers with disabilities by setting new standards for prompt, safe, and dignified assistance, mandating enhanced training for airline employees and contractors who physically assist passengers with disabilities and handle passengers’ wheelchairs, and outlining actions that airlines must take to protect passengers when a wheelchair is damaged during transport. The proposed rule also clarifies that damaging or delaying the return of a wheelchair is an automatic violation of the ACAA.

Bumping/Oversales

Bumping/oversales data, unlike other air carrier data, are reported quarterly rather than monthly. For the fourth quarter of 2023, the 10 U.S. reporting marketing carriers posted an involuntary denied boarding, or bumping, rate of 0.20 per 10,000 passengers, lower than both the rate of 0.35 in the third quarter of 2023 and the rate of 0.30 in the fourth quarter of 2022.

Incidents Involving Animals

As part of its IT modernization, DOT’s Office of Aviation Consumer Protection (OACP) is improving the options for covered carriers to submit their monthly and annual Reports on Incidents Involving Animals During Air Transport. While the new system is being developed, OACP is permitting covered carriers to delay submission of reports on incidents involving animals during air transport. Annual data on such incidents will be published when DOT receives carriers’ complete submissions of the 2023 data. 

In January 2024, carriers reported zero incidents involving the death, injury, or loss of an animal while traveling by air, equal to the zero reports filed in both December 2023 and in January 2023.

Consumers may file air travel consumer or civil rights complaints online at   https://secure.dot.gov/air-travel-complaint , or they may mail a complaint to the Office of Aviation Consumer Protection, U.S. Department of Transportation, C-70, W96-432, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE, Washington, DC 20590.

The ATCR and other aviation consumer matters of interest to the public can be found at https://www.transportation.gov/airconsumer .